Notice: Function WP_Interactivity_API::_process_directives was called incorrectly. Interactivity directives failed to process in "" due to a missing "LI" end tag. Please see Debugging in WordPress for more information. (This message was added in version 6.6.0.) in /home/wimarys/Wim_Arys_photography/public_html/wp-includes/functions.php on line 6114 tips and tricks – Page 20 – Wim Arys
Category for advanced manuals with tips, tricks and a full menu run-through for mirrorless cameras from Sony, Fuji, Canon, Nikon, Samsung, Panasonic, Olympus, Ricoh/Pentax, Sigma.
The Canon EOS M50 uses a 24.2-megapixel APS-C CMOS sensor. The sensor has a native ISO range of 100 to 25,600 and is the same sensor Canon M50.This small camera is definitely a great option both for beginners and more advanced photographers. It’s easy to carry everywhere, has excellent image quality and reliable metering and auto white balance. Thanks to the new DIGIC 8 image processor the M50 can shoot at up to 10fps in Single AF mode, and should you want to track your subject using Continuous AF this drops to a still very strong 7.4fps.
If you’re new to digital photography or Canon cameras, I’m sure this guide full of tips and trips will make you more familiar with the various settings, features and functionalities of the Canon M50. Now it’s time to turn your camera on and press the Menu button. You’ll be able to follow along page by page with this guide. Please note that in order to see all the pages, you’ll need to turn the camera Mode Dial to Av, Tv or M. (In Full Auto, some settings are automatically configured).
Also, if you want to see this more soothing black camera interface instead of the bright white, change the colour of the Menu in: Disp Level settings – Menu Display – Standard.
Canon EOS M50 Menu system
The Shoot Menu (Red Camera Icon)
Page Shooting menu 1 (SHOOT1)
Image quality: you primarily need to decide whether to shoot RAW or JPEG. Raw records all the data from the sensor, Jpeg is basically a much smaller file that has all kinds of information already baked in. Most serious photographers shoot RAW, as this gives you the most flexible file to work with in an application like Adobe Lightroom.
You’ll be able to recover more colour in the highlights of your image for instance, and pull more detail out of the shadows with a Raw file than with a Jpeg. The only downside are the larger files and the fact that of course you’ll need to develop them later on. RAW file average size of 15.5 MB an JPEG file average size of 7.4 MB with the M50.
You’ll see that the is also a cRAW option, this is a format that uses lossy compression to reduce file sizes by roughly 40%. This is absolutely fine to use, the deterioration is negligible.
Image quality
Image size (3:2 aspect ratio)
Shots / 32GB UHS-1 card
Max. shots per burst
Large Fine
6000 x 4000 pixels
3651
Approx. 33
Large Normal
6000 x 4000 pixels
6782
Approx. 33
Medium Fine
3984 x 2656 pixels
6645
Approx. 30
Medium Normal
3984 x 2656 pixels
11741
Approx. 30
Small Fine
2976 x 1984 pixels
9948
Approx. 29
Small Normal
2976 x 1984 pixels
16455
Approx. 29
Small 2
2400 x 1600 pixels
16874
Approx. 30
RAW
6000 x 4000 pixels
1084
Approx. 10
RAW+Large Fine
6000 x 4000 pixels
835
Approx. 10
If you decide to shoot Jpeg, you can choose between Large, Medium or Small, each with a Fine or Normal setting. Check the table above for the relative pixel sizes for each setting. I would advise Large and Fine of course.
Still img aspect ratio: this describes how square (1:1) or wide (16:9) your image is. It’s expressed as a figure, like this: width:height (width always comes first). The aspect ratio of the APS-C sensor is 3:2, and you should use this if you want to use the full surface of the sensor. Cropping can also be done later.
3:2: the native sensor dimension of the M50.
4:3: native resolution of a micro-four-thirds camera .
16:9: for a wider perspective.
1:1: a basic square setting.
Image review: You can modify the amount of time the image displays on the LCD monitor after your M50 writes it to the memory card. You can set the preview time from 2 to 8 seconds or display the image until you turn off the camera. Or you can turn it OFF if you don’t want this. I turn it off as I can always press the play button if I decide to review a shot I’ve just taken..
Off
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
Hold
Lens aberration correction: digital technology provides the ability to adjust images in-camera. One area this can be useful is in correcting for optical performance. By mapping the performance of each camera and lens at a variety of focal lengths, manual focus distances and apertures, it is possible to correct for these irregularities and bring the lens performance closer to ‘perfection’. These corrections are only available for photos captured in the JPEG file format. There is no reason to turn this off, except if you’re noticing a slow down when shooting in burst mode. Then this might be the reason
Peripheral illumination correction: This is called lens light fall-off or drop in the corners or vignetting.
Distortion correction: If you’re shooting with a wide-angle lens you may have noticed that at the wide end you will most likely find some distortion. This corrects distortion for any lens in the lens database.
Digital Lens Optimizer: Performs high- level correction for lens aberration in-camera
Chromatic aberr corr: Automatically remove color fringing due to Chromatic aberration.
Diffraction correction: a camera and lens specific correction that uses a profile of the lens used to ameliorate the effects of diffraction caused by small apertures (usually f/11 and beyond where there will be decrease in sharpness).
Flash control: Using this menu item, you can adjust flash power. The Flash Control option also enables you to customize a few other aspects of the built-in flash as well as control an external flash head.
Flash firing: Normally, this option is set to Enable. If you want to disable the flash, you can choose Disable instead. However, you don’t have to take this step in most cases.(just close the pop-up flash head on top of the camera if you don’t want to use flash).
E-TTL II meter: This option enables you to switch from the default flash metering approach, called Evaluative. In this mode, the camera exposes the background using ambient light when possible and then sets the flash power to serve as fill light on the subject. If you instead select the Average option, the flash is used as the primary light source, meaning that the flash power will expose the entire scene without relying on ambient light. Typically, this results in a more powerful (and possibly harsh) flash lighting and dark backgrounds.
Red-eye reduc.: When flash is used in a low-light environment, the subject’s eyes may come out red in the image. Red eye happens when the light from the flash reflects off the retina of the eyes. The camera’s red-eye reduction feature turns on the red-eye reduction lamp to shine a gentle light into the subject’s eyes to narrow the pupil diameter or iris. A smaller pupil reduces the chances of red eye from occurring.
Slow synchro: Slow Sync Flash is a function found on many cameras that tells your camera to shoot with both a longer shutter and firing the flash. This means you get the best of both worlds above and can both get a relatively sharp shot of your primary subject and get some ambient light from the background and foreground.
Safety FE: The camera automatically changes the shutter or aperture value when the flash fires to avoid overexposing and blowing out the highlights in the scene.
Built-In flash settings:
If you highlight this option and press Set, you display the screen shown here.
But which options are adjustable on the M50 depends on whether you set the first option, Built-in Flash, to Normal Firing, or to one of the two settings that set the built-in flash to trigger off-camera flash units.
The other options available for normal flash operation work like so:
Shutter Sync: By default, the flash fires at the beginning of the exposure. This flash timing, known as 1st curtain sync, is the best choice for most subjects. However, if you use a very slow shutter and you’re photographing a moving object, 1st curtain sync causes the blur that results from the motion to appear in front of the object, which doesn’t make much visual sense.To solve this problem, you can change the Shutter Sync option to 2nd curtain sync, also known as rear-curtain sync. In this flash mode, the motion trails appear behind the moving object. The flash fires twice in this mode: once when you press the button and again at the end of the exposure.
Flash Exposure Compensation: This setting adjusts the power of the built-in flash.
The M50 has four options affecting the flash here. Shutter Sync and Flash Exposure Compensation are joined by:
Flash Mode: Ignore this; it’s not adjustable when you use the built-in flash.
E-TTL II Metering: See above.
External flash func. Setting and External flash C.Fn setting: these last 2 options on the Flash Control list relate to external flash heads; they don’t affect the performance of the built-in flash. However, they apply only to Canon EX-series Speedlites that enable you to control the flash through the camera. If you own such a flash, refer to the flash manual for details.
Drive Mode: Extremely high speeds continuous shooting up to 10 fps is possible using One Shot AF (first AF position is fixed), and up to 7,4 fps using servo AF (where the camera continuously focuses even with moving subjects).
Single: the camera fires one shot each time the shutter button is fully depressed.
continuous high: the shutter keeps firing for as long as you depress the button at maximum burst rate.
continuous: the shutter keeps firing for as long as you depress the button at a slower burst rate. Great idea if you need to be able to shoot and write longer to the SD card without flooding the buffer.
self timer 10: the camera takes a picture after 10 seconds.
self timer 2: the camera takes a picture after 2 seconds.
self timer continuous: the camera take pictures continuously after a small delay.
Page Shooting menu 2 (SHOOT2)
Expo.comp./AEB: Exposure Compensation and Auto Exposure Bracketing.
Exposure compensation: If you believe that your camera is over- or underexposing your images, or you want to do this for creative reasons, you can change the level of exposure by a scale of plus or minus 3 EV.
Auto Exposure Bracketing.: Using the exposure compensation setting, you can capture images at different exposure levels, and then select the optimal image later with a +/- 5 EV scale. These two functions can the be used in combination.
Only 3 shots are allowed. EV compensation is more easily available via other interfaces, but is here so it can be used with auto exposure bracketing.
ISO speed settings for photos
ISO speed: can either be set to Automatic or determine an appropriate value for yourself. Say for landscapes when using a tripod this is generally set to what is called base ISO 100. ISO 100 would give you the optimal quality for this sensor, but for many other types of photography you’ll need a higher ISO in order to have a fast enough shutter speed and hence no movement in your images. Leave this on auto for most uses.
ISO Auto: This is used to set the max for Auto, from 400 to the top value of 25600. When raising the ISO value, you are effectively raising the sensitivity of the sensor by boosting the output. This leads to more and more noise with every doubling of power. A Maximum of 6400 is as far as I would go with this camera. Perhaps 3200 would be better if your shooting style allows it and you don’t get blurry images .
ISO speed settings for movies
ISO Auto: set to 6400,12800 or 25600. Don’t go higher than 12800 for video.
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Auto-corrects image brightness and contrast. This only affects Jpeg and not your Raw files, but it can be handy for the Jpeg shooters out there. Have a go and see if you like the effect set to low or standard.
Highlight tone priority
Improves gradation in highlights to avoid over exposure in bright subjects. What the camera does in highlight tone priority is underexpose the image to avoid clipping highlights, then boost the shadows up to give the appearance of a wider dynamic range in the jpegs. It does the same thing you might do when processing raw files, except it just applies it to jpegs. Another great feature to experiment with. Either Off or enabled.
Page Shooting menu 3 (SHOOT3)
Metering mode
Taking a picture is often referred to as ‘making an exposure’. This is because when you press the camera’s shutter release you set the start for the registration of light hitting the sensor.
Another sensor inside the camera, called the metering sensor, is central to this whole operation: it measures the light that’s coming through the lens and determines how much is needed to produce a well-exposed photo.
You can select four different ways how this sensor will read light:
Evaluative: This mode meters the whole scene, but places more emphasis on what the camera is focused on. Because the camera effectively applies its own exposure compensation in this metering mode, it can improve your chances on getting a good exposure when you need to grab a shot quickly. Most photographers stick with this metering mode.
Partial: This alternative to spot metering enables you to take a reading from a very small area in the centre of the frame. This area is around six percent of the sensor. It’s a slightly larger area than the normal spot metering, which makes it easier to use. This is a great tool for portrait photography.
Spot: Spot metering only covers the centre autofocus point and the area immediately surrounding it. It offers pinpoint precision when it comes to metering, although you’ll need to judge tones accurately to get the most out of this metering mode.
Center-weighted average: This is the oldest metering mode, where a meter reading is taken across the frame. It will however place more emphasis on what is positioned in the center of the frame and it doesn’t use any exposure compensation, it applies the same averaging pattern to every shot.
Metering timer
When you half press the shutter (or use back button focus) in one of the creative zone modes and then release it, the camera’s meter takes a reading and sets the exposure values. These values time out and disappear after the amount of time set by this option. You have to half press again to take a new reading at that point. From 4, 8, 16, 30 sec too 1, 10, 30 min.
Expo. Simulation
When ‘Exp.SIM’ (which stands for Exposure Simulation) is on, indicates the image you are seeing on the rear screen and EVF is what the final image will look like. You can leave this on except when using flash in the studio as you’ll only see a dark frame in that case.
Page Shooting menu 4 (SHOOT4)
White balance
Normally AWB (auto white balance) will do just fine but you also have the option to change this to AWB W (auto white balance with white priority This setting is amazing for indoor lighting), Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten, White fluorescent, Flash, Custom and Colour Temperature adjustable.
Custom white balance
This setting brings up compatible images to use. Set the white balance under the same light source thatwill illuminate your shot.
WB Shift/Bkt.
White balance shift is a setting on the EOS M50 camera that allows a photographer to bias the colours in images in either blue, amber, magenta or green directions. This colour shift can be used to add or remove colour shifts that may occur when shooting in mixed lighting conditions. Typically think flash and daylight, flash and indoor lights, street lights and daylight and so on. White balance can be shifted from -9 to +9 in both blue / amber and green / magenta directions, or combinations of blue/amber and green/magenta shifts. The blue/amber shift is equal to five mired for each step.
Color space
sRGB is what is used online, and Adobe RGB has a more extended colour profile that mimics the human eye. You might think that the latter is preferable, but unless you print a lot of photos with professional equipment, Adobe RGB is more hassle than its worth since you’ll need to proof every picture you want to use online and convert it to sRGB.
Picture Style
Picture style allows you to take photos in the color tones that Canon deems most suitable to each subject . These include normal presets like Standard, Portrait and Landscape but also advanced scenarios like Monochrome, Fine Detail, Neutral and Faithful.
All these picture styles can be individually adjusted to taste with adjustments like Sharpness, Fine detail, Threshold, Contrast, Saturation, Hue. These adjustments can be saved in 3 user defined slots and even transferred to other EOS cameras.
Auto, Standard, Portait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User Def. 1, 2 and 3]
Page Shooting menu 5 (SHOOT5)
Long exp.
Turn On noise reduction for exposures of 1 second or longer with the Canon M50. This function takes a second black or dark frame (with the shutter closed) with the identical shutter time of your first photo. The noise in this frame is then subtracted from the original photo. This method is the most reliable type of noise reduction, as the noise is measured specifically at that place and time with the same level of humidity and temperature. All factors that can contribute to noisy images especially in long exposures.
Some photographers however find it annoying to have to wait for this to finish as it doubles the time. You can turn it off and experiment with other types of noise reduction in Lightroom or any other photo editor if you shoot RAW.
High ISO speed NR
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: Standard, High or Low. This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
Multishot: This technique automatically combines four images captured at once to reduce noise. Compared to setting High ISO speed NR to [High], this feature minimises loss of image quality while reducing noise. Best technique for Jpeg shooters.
Dust Delete Data
This function allows you to download your shots to your computer using the canon software. The software will analyse the images, and it will register any dust spots that show up on multiple images. This database is then relayed back to the Canon M50 that will ignore the pixels with dust on.
I don’t think this is necessary, as periodically wet cleaning yourself or by a professional should be part of your camera cleaning routine, anyway.
Touch Shutter
If the Touch Shutter function is set to On, you can take shots easily by having the camera focus on your subject and adjust the brightness simply by touching. I don’t use this function, but if you’re coming from a smartphone, you could find it very useful.
Touch & drag AF settings
Touch & Drag AF basically means that you can drag the desired autofocus point to anywhere on the screen. This is much faster than any other method to do this.
You can select the active touch area: Whole panel, Right, Left, Top Right, Btm Right, Top Left, Btm Left. I have it set to the Bottom Left since this allows you to look through the EVF and change the focus point easily at the same time.
Page Shoot 6 (SHOOT6)
AF operation
One Shot: for Still Subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once.
When focus is achieved, the dot inside the AF point achieving focus lights up briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light <> in the viewfinder will also light up.
With evaluative metering, the exposure setting will be set at the same time focus is achieved.
While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.
Servo: This AF operation is for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the subject will be focused continuously.
The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
When the AF point selection is automatic, the camera first uses the center AF point to focus. During autofocusing, if the subject moves away from the center AF point, focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by another AF point.
AF method
Face + Tracking:
the Canon M50 searches for faces in the frame. If it finds one, it displays a white focus frame over the face.
In a group shot where more than one face is recognized by the camera, you see arrows on either side of the focus frame. To choose a different face as the focusing target, tap the face or use the Multi-controller to move the target frame over the face.
To lock focus on the face, press and hold the shutter button halfway down or press and hold the AF-ON button. When focus is locked, the focus frame turns green, as shown on the right above, and the camera emits a beep. (Disable the sound effect via the Beep option on Shooting Menu 1.) If focus isn’t successful, the focus frame turns red.
Zone:
Select a zone where the EOS M50 will look for focus. Nice to use with the Touch and Drag AF settings of the previous page .
1 point: only one AF point is used for extremely precise autofocus.
AF frame size
Select either Normal or Small frame size for the 1 point AF operation.
Eye Detection AF
his is an exciting new feature, introduced with the EOS M50 camera. When its AF Method is set to Face Detect + Tracking, the entire active AF area (see the colored outlines in the graphics above) is used for focusing. And, if a human face is detected, the Face Detect technology has been enhanced — the camera doesn’t simply focus on the most prominent face in the scene. Instead, it now is able to detect the nearest eye on that face, and puts a smaller focus box on that eye. If that person moves around the picture area, the Eye Detection AF continues to track that eye, as long as it remains visible.
When Eye Detection AF is active, you’ll see a large, outer box indicating that Face Detection has recognized a human face. And within it, a smaller box will surround the actual eye that is being concentrated upon for Eye Detection AF.
This means that sharp focus will more than ever be placed on the “leading” eye of your subjects, whether you’re shooting portraits or candid pictures. Where many experienced photographers might have previously made the effort to change to a single AF point, and move it manually to cover the face of a human subject, the new Eye Detection AF technology means that the process can be left to the EOS M50 in many cases.
All that has to be done to activate Eye Detection AF is to Enable Eye Detection AF in the 3rd Shooting Menu screen, and be sure that Face Detect + Tracking is the active AF Method. It will function in most shooting modes.
While Eye Detect AF will normally focus upon the eye nearest to the camera, if you want to concentrate on the subject’s other eye, that’s easy to do — just press the AF Point Select button, on the back of the camera, twice. You’ll see the smaller “box” surrounding the detected eye jump to the subject’s other eye.
For Face Detection AF, and the more advanced Eye Detection AF to function, the camera basically has to be able to identify typical human facial features two eyes, a nose, and a mouth. Accordingly, there can be some limits to the M50’s Eye Detection AF:
It will not function with Servo AF, so it’s unable to work with moving subjects (therefore, Eye Detection AF is not possible in Sports Mode or Panning Mode).
It’s disabled if you’re using the Miniature effect or Fish-eye effect settings, within the Creative Filters modes.
Eye Detection AF cannot be used when recording video (overall Face Detection is possible during video recording, including when continuous Movie Servo AF is active).
The primary face in the scene needs to be sufficiently close to take up a certain amount of space in the picture — if a detected face is too distant or small in the frame, the EOS M50 will revert to conventional Face Detection, and you won’t see the smaller “box” displayed over a subject’s eye before you take the picture.
Eye Detect AF may have problems if the subject’s eyes are partially or fully closed.
The primary face needs to be turned so it’s essentially facing toward the camera, and the eyes need to be somewhat in the camera’s direction as well. While direct eye contact with the camera isn’t required, if the subject’s eyes are angled significantly to one side or the other, the M50’s Eye Detection AF may not be able to detect the eye nearest the camera (again, it will usually revert to ordinary Face Detection, or conventional Automatic AF point selection).
If one or both of the subject’s eyes are in deep shadow, Eye Detection AF (and sometimes overall Face Detection AF) may have difficulty functioning.
Sunglasses, excessive make-up around the eyes, masks, and so on will usually prevent the Eye Detection AF from being able to detect and focus upon the nearest eye. And, like Face Detection, it’s designed to detect human eyes… it normally will not work with animals or other non-human subjects.
Continuous AF
Enable or disable continuous AF where the camera constantly tries to acquire focus, even without pressing the shutter. Turn this Off.
Focus mode
Select either autofocus where the camera focusses automatically or manual focus where you need to turn the manual focus ring on the lens to manually achieve focus.
Page Shoot 7 (SHOOT7)
Lens electronic MF
Disable after One-Shot AF/Enable after One-Shot AF: The latter allows you to fine-tune focus manually in AF mode whilst half-pressing the shutter button.
AF-assist beam firing
This is a read beam that some flashes have, which helps to gain focus in situations with low light.
MF peaking settings
Peaking is a manual focussing aide when the camera is set to manual focus. The in-focus area will have a type of coloured noise superimposed onto scene in the EVF or on the screen. This is of course not stored, it’s merely an aide that helps you determine where your manual focus lies and if your subject will be in focus. Very handy feature, I have it set to the Color red and Level High.
IS settings
Some lenses have optical image stabilisation built in. This helps with getting sharp pictures even with low shutter speeds; There are really no negative sides to using this, except that it’s not necessary to use when shooting landscapes.
There is also an electronic image stabilisation system for use with video, that might be beneficial to some, although the effect is minimal.
Movie Auto level:
If you have Digital IS on, this is greyed out. But switch it off – and you may as well if lens has OIS but doesn’t support Combination IS – and you can switch auto level on. This compensates for roll – e.g. it should keep the horizon level.
Page Shoot 8 (SHOOT8)
It’s possible to record 4K video with the Canon M50 but, it comes with some limitations. It’s only available when the Movie mode is selected on the mode dial. And the frame rate is only 25 fps with a maximum bit rate of 150Mbps.
A more serious restriction is the degree of frame cropping, which combines the 1.6x crop associated with the APS-C sensor with an additional 1.6x crop imposed by the 4K setting. This is a very heavy crop and for some bloggers or videographers, it might be a too big a hurdle to overcome.
Movie rec quality: You can choose between 4K, FHD or HD.
Quality setting
Recording file size
Recording time on a 32GB card
4K 25p
15000 KB/sec.
35 minutes 33 seconds
FHD (1080p) 50p
7500 KB/sec.
1 hour, 11 minutes 7 seconds
FHD 25p
3750 KB/sec.
2 hours, 22 minutes 13 seconds
HD (720p) 100p
6500 KB/sec.
1 hour, 22 minutes 3 seconds
HD 50p
3250 KB/sec.
2 hours, 44 minutes 6 seconds
Continuous recording will stop after 29 minutes and 59 seconds or when a single HD 100p recording reaches seven minutes and 29 seconds. It will create new files after recording stops if the user holds down the recording button.
The additional frame cropping doesn’t affect the Full HD or HD recording modes, which can also benefit from Dual Pixel AF, allowing faster, more precise autofocusing. Time-lapse recording is also supported with three pre-set ‘Scene’ modes and users can choose between Full HD (1920 x 1080 pixels) and 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels).
The first (3 seconds between shots) is for subjects like moving people, the second for slower changes (5 seconds between shots), like clouds in motion and the third is even slower (15 seconds between shots) for ‘slowly changing scenes’. There’s also a Custom setting that lets you select the interval between shots and the total numbers of frames in the sequence.
Note that Dual Pixel AF is not available when shooting 4K video. You must rely on contrast-based AF, which can be noticeably slower.
Sound recording:
Sound rec. Auto/Manual/Disable;
Manual gives access to a Rec. Level 5-point scale, and a Wind filter/Attenuator screen with Enable/disable for the Wind Filter and Auto/Enable/Disable for the Attenuator.
All these screens have a full-width live horizontal scale showing the current sound levels on the L and R channels.
Movie Servo AF:
When shooting video, a Movie Servo AF mode offers smooth and natural focusing when changing from different subjects or different distances within the scene, as well as the ability to specify tracking sensitivity, AF speed, and Face Tracking priority.
Shutter release btn function
You can select the function of the Shutter release Half-press here:
Meter.+Movie Servo
AF/Meter.+One-Shot
AF/Metering only
Auto slow shutter
The Canon M50 automatically uses slow shutter speeds to obtain brighter recordings in places with insufficient lighting. It uses speeds down to 1/30 second.
Playback Menu (blue playback icon)
Page Play 1 settings (PLAY1)
Protect images
You can select how to protect and unprotect an image from deletion on the EOS 50D. Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection. If you erase all the images, only the protected images will remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images all at once.
You can choose to Select images, Select range, All images in folder, unprotect all images in folder, All images on card or unprotect all images on card.
Rotate image
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD monitor and personal computer instead of horizontally. The setting of this feature can be changed.
Immediately after image capture, the vertical image will not be automatically rotated for the image review.
If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the image might not rotate automatically for playback.
If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the personal computer screen, it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image.
Erase images
Select and erase images by selecting a range or All images in folder orAll images on card.
Print order
You can connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print your images directly. This setting takes you to the selection screen where you can select a single image, multiple images for printing and the general set up. See the tutorial below on how to connect to a smartphone, it is the same procedure to connect to a printer
Photobook Set-up
This function is useful for ordering photobooks online and for printing photobooks on a printer.
When you select images to use in photobooks (up to 998 images) and use EOS Utility (provided software) to transfer them to a computer, the selected images will be copied into a dedicated folder. This function is useful for ordering photobooks online and for printing photobooks on a printer.
Creative Filters
Creative filters offer a way to add special effects to your images. You have a wide range of filters available: Grainy B/W, Soft Focus, Fish-eye Effect, Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect , HDR Art standard, vivid, bold and embossed.
Page Play 2 settings (PLAY2)
RAW image processing
Being able to perform RAW image post-processing right after shooting on a camera is a function that comes in very handy.
Even if you know little about photography, you can select from on-screen options written in simple English to change the brightness, blur the background, and take pictures that are all your own.
You can also save your favorite settings and easily load them back in later. It can even apply settings from images shot in Creative Assist.
When you display images shot in Creative assist mode, the camera can show you which mode settings correspond to which camera settings, making it easier to step up to the Creative Auto shooting modes.
Quick Control RAW processing
This allows you to quickly process a RAW file according to a creative filter and/or creative assist mode.
Red-eye correction
You can automatically correct red eye in images taken with the flash. You can also correct red eyes in recorded images. However, red eyes may not be automatically detected in some images or the results may not turn out as you intended.
Cropping
Complementary to the other in-camera RAW processing feature, you can crop your image or multiple images here freely or according to preset dimensions.
Resize
It’s also possible to resize your RAW images and save them in-camera for posting on social media for instance.
Page Play 3 settings (PLAY3)
Rating
You can add a star rating to your images here. This rating will show up later when you transfer the images to your computer if you use Canon’s Digital Photo Professional.
You can:
Select images
Select range
All images in folder
All images on card
Slide show
You can setup and start an in-camera slideshow here.
Set image search conditions
You’ll find lots of factors to choose here, I honestly don’t know why this was implemented and never use it.
Image jump w/dial
This setting selects how much of the jump your image library will tale when you turn the dial.
You can select one by one, jump 10, jump by specified number, by date, by folder, display movies only, stills only, protected only or display by image rating.
Page Play 4 settings (PLAY4)
Playback information display
You can enable up to 9 individual screens–all except the first, which is the basic shooting info overlay, allow the histogram to be specified as brightness or RGB, and in some cases, both.
AF point disp.
This setting either shows or hides the number of AF points on screen and in your EVF.
View from last seen
Either enable or disable the view from previous images in order to compare them.
Set Up Menu (Spanner, yellow gear icon)
Set Up Menu Page 1 (SET UP1)
Select folder
You can select and/or create the folder on your SD card where files will be stored here.
File numbering
You can set the file numbering for each new shot to Continuous or Auto Reset/Manual Reset. Continuous will consecutively number your photos. Auto reset will reset the numbering every time an SD card is inserted, and Manual reset will reset the numbering once;
Auto rotate
Auto rotate automatically rotates your images that are shot in portrait mode to fit the screen size. You can turn this on or off and decide whether this will behaviour will also apply to images imported to your PC using the canon software.
Format card
You should format your SD card in-camera every time you insert an SD card when starting a new session. This to make sure that there won’t be any writing errors. Remember that formatting will erase all the images on the card, and won’t even be recoverable if you choose the low level format option.
Wireless communication settings
You can wirelessly send images to your computer, smartphone or printer. This can be done either through Bluetooth or WiFi.
GPS settings
Even though the Canon M50 does not have a GPS module built-in, it is still possible to add location data to your images via the GPS data of your smartphone. You’ll need to install the Camera Connect app from Canon in order to do this.
Set Up Menu Page 2 (SET UP2)
Eco mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power.When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery consumption.
Power saving
The power will shut off in the following circumstances. Press the power button again to restore power.
Shooting Mode
Powers down approximately 3 minutes after the last control is accessed on the camera. The LCD monitor automatically turns off 1 minute* after the last control is accessed even if [Auto Power Down] is set to [Off]. Press any button other than the power button to turn the LCD monitor back on.
Playback Mode or connected to a Printer.
Powers down approximately 5 minutes after the last control is accessed on the camera.
Display brightness
Adjust the brightness of the display in 7 steps.
Date/Time/Zone
Select your local time zone, a date and time for your camera. This information will be written in the EXIF data of your photos.
Language
Select your preferred language for the camera Menus. I choose English, as it is easiest to find information online in English.
Set Up Menu Page 3 (SET UP3)
Video system
Select either NTSC or PAL depending on the region where you live.
Touch control
You can turn on or off the touch sensitive screen on the back of your Canon M50. Standard/Sensitive/Disab
Beep
You can either enable or disable the beep when you engage the shutter as well as when you touch the screen.
Sensor cleaning
You should set this to Auto cleaning. This will send a charge through your sensor every time you turn it off, dislodging any dust particles that might be on the sensor. You should also make a habit of regularly cleaning the sensor cage with a simple air blower.
If you prefer to only periodically clean the sensor, you can use the ‘clean now’ function to immediately do this procedure.
HDMI resolution
You can choose either Auto where the camera will decide automatically what type of device it’s connected too, or 1080p.
HDMI HDR output
HDR output to compatible TV supported with a Micro – Type-D connector. If you won’t be using this function, turn It off.
Set Up Menu Page 4 (SET UP4)
Shooting info. Disp.
There are a few sub menus here, let’s see what they do.
Screen info. settings: these settings give 5 different screen options. The first 3 allow you to configure the data overlaid on live view and save them as 3 separate screen types. You can turn on or off the basic shooting info (the data at top and bottom of screen), the detailed shooting info (the icons running down the left and right sides), whether the data acts as a touch button or not – if not, it loses the white frame and grey background – this applies to the Q menu button, the touch shoot button, the magnify button, the shutter frequency, aperture, EV compensation scale and ISO value and “buttonizes” or “debuttonizes” them all at once; the histogram; the level gauge.
The fourth screen style is just the AF targets and the exposure info when it is active, and the last screen type is the black, non-live view DSLR-style info screen. These options are the ones you cycle through with the Info button when shooting with the camera – effectively this section allows you to customise them to taste.
Still within this submenu we have LVF info/toggle settings (3 different EVF choices – one with basic shooting info under the screen, the other two configurable to individually add and combine as desired the vertical detailed shooting info icons, histogram, level gauge]. Like the previous item, it’s a way of customising what you get when you cycle through the styles of VF display whilst shooting when you use the Info button to do so.
Then the submenu has Grid display [Off, 3×3, 6×4, 3×3+diag], Histogram disp [Brightness/RGB, Large/Small], Reset. That’s the end of this submenu.
Reverse display
Even though the display looks the same when this function is turned on, it is symmetrically opposite along the vertical axis. Quite a neat feature for the swivel screen when it comes to taking a self portrait or on a self-timer mode.
Disp. Performance
You can set this to Power-saving to conserve battery life, even though refresh rates will be a bit slower than with the Smooth setting.
VF display format
[Display 1] shows the Live View image across the entire viewfinder screen. This allows you to fully maximize use of the EVF display, but shooting icons such as those indicating white balance settings and the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be overlaid on the sides of the viewfinder image. If you do not fancy that, you may prefer [Display 2], which features a smaller Live View image, with the shooting icons in the borders surrounding the image. The icons displayed are customisable to some extent and rotate accordingly when you switch to portrait orientation.
Display settings
You can select whether to automatically switch from the back screen to the EVF if your eye is detected, or only use the back screen, or only use the EVF and turn the screen off.
Set Up Menu Page 5 (SET UP5)
Custom Functions (C.Fn)
This Menu has 5 sub menus:
ISO expansion: you can boost ISO setting from 25600 to 51200, but this works for Jpeg files only.
Safety Shift: Safety shift overrides your current settings if they are so far out that you would just get a blank photo. It will override your settings and change either your aperture, speed, or ISO so you get something instead of a blank photo.
Release shutter w/o lens: allows you to engage the shutter even though no lens is detected. This is a function necessary to use lenses with the right fit, but without electronic contacts.
Retract lens on power off: sets whether to retract the lens when you power off the camera or not. Always set to Yes for safety reasons.
Custom Control: see explanation below.
It’s possible to use the camera’s Custom Controls menu to change default operations to assign a different function (like video start/stop control) to any of these keys:
M.Fn button (top of camera, to left of shutter button)
AF/MF button (9 o’clock position, on round rear control pad)
Exposure Compensation button (12 o’clock position on round rear control pad)
Flash button (3 o’clock position on round rear control pad)
Erase button (6 o’clock position on round rear control pad)
There are up to 26 functions that can be assigned to these buttons: exposure compensation, movie record, manual focus, flash mode, one-touch image quality setting [this can be configured in detail], one-touch image quality (hold) [again, configurable in detail], still image aspect ratio, flash function settings, drive mode, ISO, Auto lighting optimiser, metering mode, Picture style, white balance, touch shutter on/off, touch & drag AF, AF operation (one shot/servo), AF method, magnify, peaking, Eco mode, temporarily maximise screen brightness, temporarily manually switch between VF and screen, display off, depth of field preview, or no function on this button.
The exception is the Shutter release button customisation – this is separate from the one in an earlier menu and offers 3 choices of what should happen on half-press of the shutter button: Metering and AF start, Metering start only, AE lock (while button pressed).
Display level (Camera + head and shoulders icon, turquoise)
DISPLAY LEVEL (just the one page)
Menu display
By default the M50 shows a simplified version of the menu, which is different from the standard Canon menu. It hides lots of advanced settings and in order to get access to all settings you’ll need to switch to the classic Canon DSLR menu by setting Menu display to standard.
Mode guide
The Mode guide gives you an explanation of the mode that you choose with the Mode dial. Leave this on if you’re a beginner.
Feature guide
If this is turned on, you’ll see an explanation of every element in the Menu system through a pop-up box at the bottom of the screen.
Star icon (green)
MY MENU1
My Menu allows you to build your own menus. You can add all your most used Menu functions to this page like Format for instance. Adding favourite functions to this menu means that you’ll be able to access them quicker than having to browse through the entire Menu system.
Common Canon M50 questions
Is there a remote for the Canon EOS M50?
The M50 doesn’t have a port for a cable release and lacks an infrared receiver for the Canon RC-6 remote. The Canon BR-E1 Bluetooth remote control can however be used.
How to Use Canon EOS M50 Manual Focus?
Go to shoot page 6 and change to shooting mode to manual focus. On Shoot page 7, turn on Peaking. When uou turn the manual focus ring on the lens, the in-focus area will have a type of coloured noise superimposed onto scene in the EVF or on the screen. I have it set to the Color red and Level High.
How do I update my Canon EOS M50 firmware?
Go to your regional website.
Download the latest firmware in the support section.
Copy the files to an SD card in the main folder.
Make sure your camera battery is fully charged and insert the SD card with the latest firmware.
Turn on your camera and go to the setup menu page 5, Firmware tab.
Press OK and keep the camera on without touching your camera.
Conclusion
I hope you’ve enjoyed this run-through of the entire Canon M50 Menu system with some added tips and tricks.
The Canon M50 is a fantastic mirrorless camera, and as you might have noticed, there are many features hidden inside the Menu system. If you have questions, ask them in the comment section below. Happy shooting!
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony A7000. The latest and greatest mirrorless APS-C camera from Sony features many new enhancements like:
a 32 megapixel Exmor RS APS CMOS Chip with DRAM
an LSI buffer for faster writing
blackout free EVF shooting
925-point PDAF, 60fps AE/AF
10fps/16Bit Mechanical Shutter
20fps/14Bit Electronic Shutter
30fps/12Bit AE-L/AF-C E.S.
Electronic Shutter Speeds up to 1/32000s
4K/24p 10Bit 2.4:1 WDR Movie
ISO 64-64000
If you’re looking for an advanced guide for the Sony A7000 with tips and tricks to improve your understanding of this little wonder, you’ve come to the right place.
I believe that the best way to learn all the features and functions is to have a good look at the menu system and gradually try to understand how everything works. This might take some time if you’ve never owned a Sony mirrorless, and even if you have, the menus have totally changed it this product.
You can bookmark this page and simply refer back to it or continue reading whenever you feel like it.
If you are looking for an A6000 guide, A6300 or A6500 guide, you can find them by clicking on the camera name.
So take your ILCE-A7000, press the Menu button and follow along.
Sony A7000 menu run-through
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 1
Quality:
Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW+jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the Sony A7000 pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.
A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.
Image size:
Large, medium or small is selectable (when you set Quality to jpeg). Set it to large for optimal quality, if SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.
Knowing the pixel size can tell you how large you can print your images without quality degradation. There are techniques nowadays to print larger, but this information might be interesting to some.
When Aspect Ratio is set to 3:2:
L: 32M 8000×5333 pixels
M: 16M 4240×2832 pixels
S: 8M 3008×2000 pixels
When Aspect Ratio is set to 16:9:
L: 32M 8000×3376 pixels
M: 16M 4240×2400 pixels
S: 8M 3008×1688 pixels
Aspect ratio:
You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface) or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.
Panorama Size:
(when in panorama shooting mode) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the Sony A7000 to do efficiently.
Panorama direction
A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the Sony A7000 to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).
Long Exposure NR
Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.
(MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 2)
High ISO NR
Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).
Color Space
You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.
Lens Comp
The Sony A7000 allows you to select whether you would like to apply various lens compensations (shading, chromatic aberration, distortion) even when shooting in RAW. I leave this ON, but you might get a conflict with RAW files and using a lens profile in programs like Lightroom where you’ll see a reverse vignette for instance.
MENU →Red Camera Icon → page 3
Auto Mode
Switch the auto mode between Intelligent Auto and Superior Auto.
Intelligent Auto:
This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen.
These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode.
The Sony A7000 will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though).
Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button.
Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting.
Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6400 (you can’t change the range).
Superior Auto:
Superior Auto is similar to iAuto, as it also detects scenes automatically, except it uses more complex processing.
This includes composite layering (layering different shots on top of each other for HDR style pictures) and automatically choosing what it thinks is the best image.
You can either choose whether you want the Sony A7000 to save all images captured or just the composite image, by selecting S. Auto Img. Extract in the MENU system.
Disadvantage: ISO range is (like in iAuto) fixed and only useable for jpeg shooting.
Scene Selection
This is more easily controlled via the right thumb wheel when you’re in SCN mode, but you can also select the presets for different scenes (like sports or portrait) from here.
S Auto Img Extract
When in Superior Auto, the Sony A7000 takes multiple images and combines them into one (jpeg only). You can either save all images captured (OFF) or only the combined image (ON). Turn it OFF; I’ve tried this functionality, and the combined image feature does not work well.
Drive Mode
Do you want to take a single picture when you press the shutter button or multiple images? You can select this here, as well as self-timer functions and bracketing.
Bracketing is taking a series of pictures, each with different settings, useful for combining your images with various exposures for HDR effects in software afterwards, to name just one example.
You can also press the dedicated drive mode button to get to these settings.
Single Shooting: Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer: Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness.
Single Bracket: Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness.
WB bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and color filter.
DRO Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
Bracket Settings
You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
Selftimer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)
This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your camera settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 4
Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)
This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. The items that you can register are displayed on the menu of the Sony A7000. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.
MENU →Red Camera Icon → page 5
Focus Mode:
Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. Novice users should set into AF-A. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select (see next)
AF-S: With a half-press of the shutter button, the Sony A7000 will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.
AF-A: AF Automatic intelligently switches between S and C, depending on whether the camera detects movement or not. This is the standard setting and the easiest to use.
AF-C: The Sony A7000 will continuously focus on any movement when you half-press the shutter button.
DMF: The Sony A7000 focuses on your subject and allows you to fine-tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.
MF: No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.
You can see a focus indicator on screen or EVF. When it is lit, the subject is in Focus and focus is locked.
Tip: if autofocus doesn’t seem to be working, check the lens barrel to see if the AF/MF slider is set to AF. It’s also possible to assign a button for what is called ‘Focus Hold’. With Focus Hold, you can freeze your focus point when you press this button. This is often used by photographers to allow for a greater flexibility in composition.
Another important fact is that in Movie mode, only Continuous AF and MF are available.
Priority Set in AF-S:
Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF, DMF or Automatic AF and the subject is still.
Options are:
AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Priority Set in AF-C:
Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the subject is in motion.
Choose between:
AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis: Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.
Focus area
The Sony A7000 has a dual phase/contrast on-sensor autofocus system This makes it one of the fastest and most reliable AF systems in the world. You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.
Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
Zone: Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.
Center: Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the Sony A7000 to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.
Flexible spot: Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the touch screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a narrow area. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the Sony A7000 will struggle to find focus when setting to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
Expand Flexible spot: If the camera can’t focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
Lock-on AF: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the Sony A7000 tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor to ‘Lock-on AF’ on the Focus Area setting screen, and then adjust the desired area to start tracking by pressing the multi-selector left/right. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a flexible spot or expand flexible spot.
Tip: You can move the focus area in Flexible Spot, Expand Flexible Spot or Zone by touching the screen.
AF illuminator
The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the Sony A7000 to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on except if you are using an underwater housing.
Center Lock-on AF
This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In the iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and the Sony A7000 is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.
MENU → Camera Settings → page 6
AF system:
Here you can select the focus detection system (Phase Detection AF/Contrast AF) when you attach an Amount lens using an LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor.
Phase Detection AF: Focuses with Phase Detection AF. The focusing speed is very fast.
Contrast AF: Always focuses with Contrast AF. The focusing speed is slower but more precise. Use when you cannot focus with Phase Detection AF.
AF with shutter
Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.
Pre-AF
Select if the Sony A7000 will automatically adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Eye-Start AF:
This configuration starts AF once the EVF sensor has detected your eye near the viewfinder. I’ve never used it personally, but some people might find this setting interesting as it can prolong battery life.
AF Area Auto Clear:
Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Disp. cont. AF Area
You can set whether or not to display the focus area that is in focus when[Focus Area] is set to Wide or Zone and Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF.
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 7
AF Micro Adj.:
Allows you to adjust and register autofocused positions for each lens when using an A-mount lens with the Mount Adaptor LA-EA2 or LA-EA4. In general use, you do not need to adjust the autofocused position using this function. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focus areas or focal lengths. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focal lengths.
MENU →Red Camera Icon → page 8
Exposure Comp
(Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):
If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.
ISO
You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.
I have this range set between 100-3200 as this range is virtually noise free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 3200. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO, you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….
Iso Auto Min SS.
This is a useful and exciting setting. If you select ISO AUTO you are in P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority) mode; you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing. The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower] is 1 EV.
You have three possibilities here:
FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than the Standard (normal). This will help you prevent getting blurred images when shooting action or sports. This at the cost of raising the ISO and noise in your images. Remember this is linked to your Auto ISO settings, so it won’t go any higher than your upper limit, even if the Sony A7000 is capable of doing so.
STD (Standard): The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than the Standard setting. This enables you to shoot images with less noise. Never to be used if you want to shoot action, but can be useful if you are a landscape or architecture photographer who likes to walk around without a tripod yet takes some time to frame and shoot images carefully.
1/8000 ― 30″: The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.
Metering Mode
Metering mode refers to the way the Sony A7000 reads the light and sets the exposure.
In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.
In spot or center, the Sony A7000 only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).
Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the metering circle depends on the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.
Tip: When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.
Spot Metering Point
Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.
Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.
Exposure step
You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values either .3 or .5 EV steps.
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 9
AEL w shutter
Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.
Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.
The Sony A7000 keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.
Exposure Std. Adjust
Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 10
Flash Mode
If you’re interested in flash photography, you’ll need to purchase a hot shoe flash. I would suggest a Godox, as these can both use HSS and TTL, and are quite cheap. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button
If you’d like to get more into flash photography, you should read up on the different possibilities and what their effect would be on your images. This is a basic explanation of what the different modes do:
fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).
Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the Sony A7000 to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.
Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
Wireless: Select wireless is if want to use the in-camera flash to trigger an external flash like the Sony HVL-43M (with TTL!). Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.
Flash comp or Flash compensation:
Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button).
Exp comp set
Selects if the Exposure compensation function (+-5 in 0.5EV or 0.3EV steps) also reduces flash power or not. Leave it to Ambient And Flash, unless if you want to use HSS sync with flashes, then it is handy to be able to control exposure and flash output separately.
Red Eye Reduction:
This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 11
White Balance
You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.
Priority Set in AWB
Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.
Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
DRO/Auto HDR
DRO:
This stands for Dynamic range optimise and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.
Auto HDR:
(not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.
The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.
Creative Style
The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid colour to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to you RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these, and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to colour.
Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.
You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.
This functionality can be changed:
Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
Picture Effect
Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your Sony A7000, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).
Off: Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
Picture Profile
Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.
The basic contrast and coloring are defined by the combination of [Gamma] (gamma curve) and [Color Mode] (color characteristics) settings.
Gamma:
Movie: Standard gamma curve for video.
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images.
Cine1: Softens the contrast in darker image areas and emphasizes gradation changes in lighter image areas, producing a subdued tone overall (equivalent to HG4609G33) Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 33% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 109%. Images shot with this gamma can be used without grading, but since the images have smooth gradation characteristics, this can be used to grade and finalize the viewed image in the post-production process.
Cine2: Similar results to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal (equivalent to HG4600G30) Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 30% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 100%.
Cine3: Stronger contrast between dark and light image areas and greater emphasis on black gradation changes (compared to [Cine1] and [Cine2])
Cine4: Stronger contrast than [Cine3] in darker image areas.
ITU709 ITU709 gamma curve (low-light gain of 4.5).
ITU709: (800%) Gamma curve for checking scenes recorded using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
S-Log2 [S-Log2] gamma curve. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 32%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. The maximum value of video output is 106%.
S-Log3: [S-Log3] gamma curve with characteristics closer to those of film. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. It allows for better reproduction of gradations in shadows and the mid-tone range than S-Log2. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 41%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. As a characteristic of S-Log3, the dynamic range can be extended above 1,300%. However, Picture Profile is set to a dynamic range of 1,300% in order to maintain a balance with camera performance. Under these conditions, the maximum value of video output is 94%.
Color Mode:
Movie Color tones for [Movie] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for movies when Picture Profile is not used)
Still Color tones for [Still] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for still images when Picture Profile is not used)
Cinema Color tones for [Cine1] and [Cine2] gamma curve
Pro Color tones similar to standard Sony broadcast camera image quality (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
ITU709 Matrix ITU709 color tones (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
Black & White Sets the saturation to 0 for recording in black and white S-Gamut Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
S-Gamut3.Cine Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
This setting is easier to use than [S-Gamut3], because it limits the color space to a more practical range than that of [S-Gamut3]. It is recommended in cases where [S-Gamut3], a wide color space, is not required.
S-Gammut3 Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting has a wider color space than that of [S-Gamut3.Cine]. It is suited for converting images to a format with a wide color space like BT.2020. Depending on the type of camera, the entire [S-Gamut3] color space may not be supported.
Black Level:
This function adjusts the black level of the image -15 to +15. As an image effect, you can emphasize the color black to create an image that gives a powerful impression, or you can weaken black to give the image a soft impression.
Shifting Black Level in the minus direction emphasizes the black color in the image, while changing the level in the plus direction weakens the black color.
If you want to simulate an old film, or capture winter morning fog, the black level value should be increased. If you decrease the value, gradations in dark areas will be smoothed out, making the areas appear in crisp black. When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies. This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.
When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies.
This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.
Black Gamma:
This function lets you alter the shape of the selected gamma curve and adjust gradations in dark image areas. Range available between Wide, Middle or Narrow. Leven between -7 and +7.
[Range] controls the luminance range that Black Gamma influences. The [Narrow] setting keeps the range close to black, while the [Wide] setting extends the range to gray. [Range] should be set narrower when you want to control the quality of dark areas. If you want to adjust the overall image tone, [Range] should be set wider. At first, it may be a good idea to start from the [Narrow] setting.
Increasing the [Level] value brightens the image, whereas decreasing the value makes the image darker. For example, if you set [Range] to [Narrow] and decrease the [Level] value, you can create an image with dark areas that are similar to the ones seen in films. Unlike Black Level, Black Gamma Level adjusts luminance subtly.
Knee:
This function sets the knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high-intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your Sony A7000.
First, select whether to set the knee point and slope automatically or manually in [Mode], and then adjust each setting.
Knee > Mode: Auto / Manual
Knee > Auto Set > Max Point: 90% to 100%
Knee > Auto Set > Sensitivity: High / Mid / Low
Knee > Manual Set > Point: 75% to 105%
Knee > Manual Set > Slope: –5 to +5
Mode:
Auto: Automatically adjusts the knee based on what is selected in the following settings (when [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma]).
[Max Point] determines the maximum knee point level (white level). The knee slope is automatically adjusted according to the Max Point setting. The standard is to keep it at 100%. A lower setting will turn white grayish, while a higher setting will discard gradations in high luminance areas.
[Sensitivity] changes the luminance level at which the knee’s automatic adjustment starts. When set to [High], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at lower input signal levels than normal. When set to [Low], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at higher input signal levels than normal.
When a parameter other than [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma], the gamma curve will not exceed the White clip point and over-exposure rarely occurs. When [Mode] is set to [Auto] with these settings, the Knee function is disabled. If you want to enable the Knee function, set [Mode] to [Manual].
Manual: Sticks to settings based on the following selections.
[Point] sets the position of the knee point output level.
[Slope] determines the inclination of the knee slope. A negative slope setting results in a gentler knee slope angle. This expands the dynamic range, but reduces the ability to produce rich gradations. A positive slope setting makes the knee slope inclination steeper. This shrinks the dynamic range, but bolsters the ability to express gradations. When [Slope] is set to +5, the Knee function is disabled.
Set [Point] and [Slope] in [Manual Set] in combination. If you select a higher setting for [Point] and a gentler setting for [Slope], you can obtain video-like sharp highlight effects. If softer film-like highlight effects are desired, select a lower setting for [Point] and a steeper setting for [Slope]. In practical terms, move [Point] and [Slope] up and down in opposite directions while checking the gradations in high luminance areas until you find the ideal settings.
Saturation
A positive value results in more vivid colors, while a negative value presents faded colors. Saturation must be adjusted in tandem with contrast. Bright and vivid settings produce video-like images, while dark and vivid settings result in film-like images. The combination of bright and light creates pastel tones, whereas dark and light settings create artistic finishes.
Color Phase
As you rotate the color wheel to the left (decreasing the set value) or to the right (increasing the set value), the colors shift along the spectrum from red to yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta and red. Because this affects all colors, it is difficult to make specific adjustments exactly as intended. Use this function when matching coloring closely between different cameras.
Color Depth
This function adjusts the luminance for each color phase. The luminance changes more drastically when the selected color is richer (higher saturation). It does not change much at all when the color is achromatic.
A higher set value lowers luminance while deepening the color. A lower set value increases luminance, making the color look paler. This setting does not only enhance the apparent vividness of colors, but also can express deep, dark colors. Because each of the 6 colors — R (Red), G (Green), B (Blue), C (Cyan), M (Magenta), Y (Yellow) — can be adjusted individually, you can apply this function to just the colors you want to emphasize.
Emphasizing image edges (Detail)
This function adjusts how much detail is applied to the subject’s image edges.
Because settings other than [Level] are quite complex, we recommend you start by adjusting only the [Level] setting first.
Level
This function determines the strength of detail image processing to be applied.
If you apply too much detail, the subject’s original atmosphere may be undermined, as its translucence may be lost or it may be given an unnatural luster. Excessive detail when shooting shiny leaves, for instance, may result in the leaves looking as if they are made of plastic. It is also advisable to apply detail only modestly when shooting paintings.
Because Detail makes image edges wider, the original texture of a subject consisting of very fine lines may be lost if too much detail processing is applied. (Example: thin lace curtains)
Also, be aware that Detail may fatten up the edges of noise particles that appear under a high gain setting, and may make such particles highly noticeable. In such cases, you can adjust the amount of detail processing on the noise particles by using the [Crispening] function.
The image edges become more visible when viewed on large screens. It may be advisable to ease off on Detail if you plan to view the image on large TVs or screens.
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 12
Soft Skin Effect
If you’re using this camera mainly for pics of friends and family, this is an excellent feature, as it will soften and smooth skin tones make you and your beloved ones look their best. (only available when quality is set to Jpeg)
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 13
Focus Magnifier
When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the Sony A7000 to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.
Focus Magnif Time
You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.
AF in Focus Mag.
You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.
Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.
MF assist
This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier found on this page too You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.
Peaking Level
Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid which works when you have your Sony A 7000 set to MF or DMF.
You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies, and you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.
Peaking Color
You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.
(MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 13)
Smile/Face Detect
This is another powerful feature. It can be set to detect automatically and focus on (registered) faces and enable a function called Smile Shutter. When the latter is enabled, the Sony A7000 will automatically capture an image when a smile is detected. Did I hear you say Selfie? Yes, it’s the ultimate selfie tool, along with the pivoting screen.
Face Registration
If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when [Face Detection] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)]. Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].
Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].
Auto Object Framing
When enabled, the Sony 7000 will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. Only available for Jpegs, though, a nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.
MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 1
Movie/S&Q Motion
You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting or slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with S&Q Settings later.
Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
File Format (video)
You can choose between XAVC S 4K, XAVC S HD, AVCHD or MP4. AVCHD is a far superior codec than plain MPEG-4. You’ll need a fast UHS Speed Class U3 SD card to record at 100 Mbps or more.
XAVC S 4K: Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM
XAVC S HD: Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
AVCHD: Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
MP4: Records MP4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for playback on smartphones or tablets, web uploads, and email attachments. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 4 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 4 GB during recording, recording will stop automatically.
Record Setting (video):
You can choose the quality of recorded video here. Select the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-rate, the higher the picture quality. Frame- and bit-rate differ depending on your movie file format.
When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K you have these options:
30p/25p: 30p 60M/25p 60Mbps or 30p 100M/25p 100Mbps.
24p: 24p 60Mbps or 24p 100Mbps if your camera is set to NTSC
When File Format is set to XAVC S HD you have these options:
120p/100p: 120p 60M/100p 60Mbps or 120p 100M/100p 100Mbps.
30p/25p: 60p 50Mbps/50p 50Mbps.
60p/50p: 30p 50Mbps/25p 50Mbps.
24p: 24p 50Mbps when set to NTSC.
When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:
60i/50i: 60i 17Mbps(FH)/50i 17Mbps(FH) or 60i 24Mbps(FX)/50i 24Mbps(FX).
60p/50p: 60p 28Mbps(PS)/50p 28Mbps(PS).
24p/25p: 24p 17Mbps(FH)/25p 17Mbps(FH) or 24p 24Mbps(FX)/25p 24Mbps(FX).
When File Format is set to MP4 you have these options:
You can do slow-motion recording or record quick-motion recording. The sound will not be recorded. In a slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
How to record slow motion movie on the Sony A7000:
Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).
Select MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[Movie/S&Q Motion]→ and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
Select MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.
Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.
Playback speed: The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Record Setting] and [Frame Rate].
Dual Video REC
Allows you to simultaneously record an XAVC S movie and an MP4 movie, or an AVCHD movie and an MP4 movie. You can simultaneously record a movie in different movie formats onto a memory card. To set the recording mode for 2 memory cards, such as simultaneous recording or sort recording, use Recording Mode.
AF Drive Speed
You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.
Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.
MENU →Purple Camera Icon→ page 2
AF Track Sens (movie)
You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.
Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.
Auto Slow Shut. (movie)
Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.
On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut.. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
Audio Recording
You can switch off audio recording in movie mode. When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a higher sound level to make the sound easier to hear. Regardless of the Audio Rec Level settings, the limiter always operates.
Audio Rec Level
You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.
Audio Level Display
Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.
Don’t see the audio level display?
Check if Audio Recording]is set to Off.
Check if DISP (Display Setting) is set to No Disp. Info.
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, audio is automatically turned OFF.
Wind Noise Reduction
This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.
MENU →Purple Camera Icon→ page 3
Marker Display (movie)
Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie mode. The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder
Marker Settings (movie)
Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.
Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. [Off]/[On]
Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. [Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. [Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
MENU → Purple Camera Icon→ page 4
Silent Shooting
You can shoot images without the shutter sound, i.e. only using the electronic shutter.
e-Front Curtain Shut.
This shortens the time lag between shutter releases. When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.
Release without lens
Makes it possible to capture images even if a lens is not supported by the Sony A7000. (Like when using an adapter with vintage lenses)
Release without card
If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.
SteadyShot
Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot (sensor stabilization) function.For optimal sharpness, turn it off when using a tripod.
SteadyShot Settings
If your lens does not relay focal length information to the A7000 body, you can still use the Ibis stabilization by dialing in the focal length manually.
Auto: Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
Manual: Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8mm-1000mm)
MENU → Purple Camera Icon→ page 5
Zoom
Turn the digital zoom functionality on or off.
Zoom settings
Set to Optical zoom only (using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens
Two other settings are available which use digital zoom (cropping of the original image):
Digital zoom:
Pictures captured by the image sensor of the Sony A7000 are enlarged using digital signal processing. As the magnification level increases, signals to be also estimated growth and can reduce the picture quality.
Clear Image Zoom:
Zoomed images are captured close to the original quality when shooting a still picture. The camera first zooms to the maximum optical magnification, then uses Clear Image Zoom technology to enlarge the image an additional 2x, producing clear, sharp images despite the increased zoom ratio. If you don’t have a zoom lens, this might be an option as the Sony A7000 uses the RAW file to zoom; although still some image quality will be lost.
Zoom ring rotate
Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses that support this function.
MENU → Purple Camera Icon→ page 6
Disp button
Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.
Finder/Monitor
You can set the behavior of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder? Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.
Finder Frame Rate
Display the subject’s movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting. This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.
120fps/100fps: Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.
60fps/50fps: Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.
Zebra
The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the entire scene.
Grid Line (stills)
Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.
Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off: Does not display the grid line.
Exposure set guide
The exposure set guide is an on-screen scroller that tells you the relation between your chosen aperture and the appropriate shutter speed for the scene you are shooting. I find this quite handy, but you can turn it off if you don’t.
MENU → Purple Camera Icon→ page 7
Live view Display
Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed-in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier autofocusing in low light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL (through the lens) functionality.
Auto Review
You can check your captured image on the screen directly after shooting. You can select how long the image will stay on the screen (10, 5 or 2 seconds). I find this very annoying, so I turned it off. If you want to review your image, you can simply press play to do so.
MENU → Purple Camera Icon→ page 8
Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)
You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, if you assign [Eye AF] to [Center Button] for [Custom Key(Shoot.)], you can easily recall [Eye AF] simply by pressing the center of the multi-selector while shooting.
The keys that can be assigned functions are different for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] and [Custom Key(PB)].
You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.
Custom Button 1
Custom Button2
AF/MF Button/AEL Button
Fn/ Button
Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
Custom Button 3
Function Menu Set.
You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.
Dial Setup
You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial between shutter speed and aperture.
Dial Ev Comp
You can compensate the exposure using the front or rear dial. You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to 5.0 EV.
MOVIE Button
Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button.
Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to [Movie/S&Q Motion] mode.
MENU → Purple Camera Icon→ page 9
Dial Lock
You can set whether the dials will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.
Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.
Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.
Audio Signals
Selects whether the product produces a sound or not, for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
MENU – Wireless functionality – page 1
Send To Smartphone
You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.
You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the Sony A7000 or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).
You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A7000 screen.
It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.
Send to Computer
You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the Sony A7000 using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.
View On TV
If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your Sony A7000 through your home wireless network.
One Touch NFC
Enables Quick, one-touch connection (as opposed to first accessing the camera’s wireless network and then navigating to the Playmemories app) with NFC (near-field communication) capable devices.
I have not tried this (as my iPhone does not have NFC), but it looks a lot easier to use.
Airplane Mode
Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.
Wi-Fi Settings:
WPS Push
If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.
Access Point Set.
You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.
Disp MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of your Sony ILCE-A7000.
SSID/PW Reset
Your Sony A7000 shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection Info.] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.
MENU – Wireless functionality – page 2
Bluetooth Settings.
Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the Sony A7000 and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”
Loc. Info. Link Set
You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.
To use the location information linking function of the Sony A7000, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection
Procedure:
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)
On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].
On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].
Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. Pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].
(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.
Options in this Menu:
Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the Sony A7000 using information from a linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Edit Device name
If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which A7000 is yours in particular situations.
Reset Network set
Resets all network settings.
If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.
MENU – Application List Menu
You’ll find The Smart remote control camera app (which allows you to use your phone as a remote control via PlayMemories phone app for iPhone and Android) and the Playmemories Camera app here.
You can access your online PlayMemories account here, or create an account (once you’ve set up your Sony A7000 connection with your Wifi network).
You’ll also be able to download new apps available for purchase in the Sony Playmemories online app store like the Time-lapse and smooth reflection app.
If you do not want to connect your camera to the internet, you can always install new apps (and updates) if you connect the Sony A7000 to your Mac or PC with the supplied USB cable, using the Sony PlayMemories desktop application.
MENU – playback options – page 1
Delete
Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD card.
View Mode
select how the Sony A7000 will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.
Image Index
Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.
Display rotation
Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the Sony A7000 or not.
Slide Show
Select whether you want the Sony A7000 to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.
Rotate
Change the orientation of images in-camera.
MENU – playback options – page 2
Enlarge Image
Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.
Protect
Protect images (selectable or per date) from accidentally being erased.
Specify Printing
Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)
Photo Capture
Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.
MENU – Setup – page 1
Monitor Brightness
Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.
Viewfinder Brightness
Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.
Finder Color Temp
Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.
Gamma Disp. Assist
Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting and may be difficult to monitor, using [Gamma Disp. Assist], contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma can be reproduced. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when playing back movies on the camera’s monitor/viewfinder.
Volume settings
Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.
MENU – Setup – page 2
Title Menu
choose between tiles or a tiled front page when accessing the MENU or a linear tab style menu layout.
Mode Dial Guide
Turn the description for each shooting mode ON or OFF. Can be handy at first for a novice user to get familiar with what the different shooting modes do.
Delete Confirm
When deleting images on your SD card, you’ll have to confirm every deletion (to make sure you don’t accidentally delete anything). You can turn Off this confirmation here if you wish.
Display Quality
You can change the display quality from standard to high at the expense of shorter battery life.
Pwr Save Start time
Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. I have it set to 5 minutes, a good balance between usability and battery life.
Auto Pwr OFF Temp.
Sets the temperature of the camera at which the Sony A7000 turns off automatically during shooting (overheating). When it is set to High, you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal. Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand as it can cause burns. Use a tripod. This will give you a 9-minute increase in movie recording at high ambient temperatures.
MENU – Setup – page 3
NTSC/PAL Selector
Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.
Cleaning Mode
If dust or debris gets inside the Sony A7000 and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.
Touch Operation
Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor. Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as “touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as “touch pad operations.”
Touch Panel+Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
Touch Pad Area Set.
Sets the area to be used for touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. You can prevent unintentional operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
Whole Screen: Uses the entire monitor as the touchpad.
Right 1/2 Area: Uses only the right half of the monitor as the touchpad.
Right 1/4 Area: Uses only the right quarter of the monitor as the touchpad.
Demo Mode
The Demo Mode function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration) when the Sony A7000 has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select Off.
MENU – Setup – page 4
TC/UB settings
Timecode (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for synchronization of video in post production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.
TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset: Sets the time code.
UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
Remote CTRL
You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER button, 2 SEC button (2-second delay shutter), and START/STOP button (or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the Wireless Remote Commander RMT-DSLR1 (sold separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the Wireless Remote Commander.
HDMI Settings
When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.
Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
4K Output Sel.
Outputs still image in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.
Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the Sony A7000 memory card.
HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(25p)* : Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
USB connection
Selects what will happen when you connect your Sony A7000 to your PC or MAC.
Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer
USB LUN Setting
Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.
Older devices that are not able to connect to the Sony A7000 might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.
MENU – Setup – page 5
USB Power Supply
You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.
PC Remote settings
Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the camera without leaving the camera.
Language
Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.
Date/Time Setup
The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your A7000 for the first time.
Area Settings
Sets where in the world where you are using your camera.
Copyright info
Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.
MENU – Setup – page 6
Format
When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the Sony A7000 for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.
File Number
Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.
Set File Name
Use the standard file naming system or a customizable one.
Select REC folder
Selects where the Sony A7000 will store newly captured images.
New Folder
Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.
Folder name
Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.
MENU – Setup – page 7
Recover Image DB
If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.
Display media info
You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)
Version
Check what version of the operating system your camera and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.
Setting Reset
Fully resets the Sony A7000 to factory settings.
The Next Capter is about the various shooting Modes Available, another concept that is necessary to understand fully.
Shooting modes available via the Mode Dial
Intelligent Auto:
This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen.
These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode.
The Sony A6300 will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though).
Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button.
Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting.
Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6400 (you can’t change the range).
P (Program Auto):
Program (P) mode automatically adjusts exposure and aperture according to your desired setting.
See this as a more advanced iAuto mode, as you’ll be able to change all other settings through the touch screen (Focus area, creative style, exposure compensation,…);
tip: lower the automatic ISO range to 100-1600 for better image quality (ISO-Auto range in MENU SYSTEM)
A (Aperture Priority):
Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot, for example when you want to blur the background (large aperture like f/1.8), or want a sharp corner-to-corner image (around f/5.6-f/8).
The aperture value can be changed during movie recording, a technique that will be familiar to videographers.
Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred (what is called Bokeh).
Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.
If proper exposure cannot be set, the shutter speed on the shooting screen blinks.
S (Shutter Priority):
The go-to mode if you can’t shoot fast-moving subjects, by manually adjusting the shutter speed. You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by changing the shutter speed, for example, at the instant of motion with a high-speed shutter, or as a trailing image with a low-speed shutter. The shutter speed can be changed while recording movies. The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.
If a correct exposure cannot be obtained, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks.
Use a tripod to prevent blurring when you use a slow shutter speed.
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority mode.
When the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer, noise reduction will be applied (Long Exposure noise reduction in the Menu ON/OFF) after shooting for the same amount of time that the shutter was open. This will temporarily freeze your Sony A7000, and you want to be able to capture images while noise reduction is in progress.
The brightness of the picture on the monitor may differ from the actual image being shot (there is no Live view on Sony cameras for long exposures).
M (Manual Exposure):
Both shutter speed and the aperture value can be changed in this mode, also during movie recording.
Press the bottom side of the control wheel to select the shutter speed or aperture value, then turn the control wheel to select a value.
When ISO Auto is used, the ISO value automatically changes to achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.
If the aperture value and shutter speed you have set are not suitable for adequate exposure, the ISO value indicator will blink.
When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.
The brightness of the image on the monitor may differ from the actual image being shot.
Bulb Mode in Manual exposure
Bulb is the mode used to shoot a trailing picture of a subject’s’ movement with a long exposure time. Think light trails from cars, or fireworks.
Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).
Turn the control wheel counterclockwise until [BULB] is indicated.
Set the aperture value (F-value) by turning the control dial.
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.
Tips:
Use a tripod for long exposures.
Use the PlayMemories remote or a wired remote control to eliminate any movement of the camera.
After shooting, noise reduction will be applied (as noise builds up quickly with long exposures). This will take as long as your long exposure did, and you won’t be able to use the Sony A7000 until this is finished.
Can’t get the shutter speed to Bulb Mode? Check these settings and turn them OFF:
Is Smile Shutter activated?
Is Auto HDR enabled?
Is Picture Effect is set to HDR Painting or Rich-tone Mono?
Is Drive Mode set to Cont. Shooting, Cont. Bracket or Self-timer(Cont)?
Movie:
Although you can capture movies in any mode, it is easiest to change all related settings for video recording here. You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for recording movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting.
Press the MOVIE button to start recording and again to stop recording.
Menu:
Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) adjusted automatically. Other settings can be set manually, and the settings are retained.
Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
When a zoom lens is mounted, you can also zoom by operating that lens. When a motor zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever of the zoom lens to enlarge subjects.
Sweep Panorama:
Allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the footage.
Panorama mode will capture a series of images in succession.
You’ll be guided through this process using an arrow on-screen that shows the direction and speed of the camera panning.
The 7000 will automatically detect and capture the series of images while panning.
Afterward, it will stitch together all these pictures into a broad view of the scenery and save it as a Jpeg.
TIP: Panorama size (standard or wide) and panning direction can be changed in the MENU-.
Scene Selection Mode (SCN)
Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. iAuto and Superior Auto detect these scenes automatically for you and applies the presets it deems best, and does an excellent job at that. However, in certain circumstances (when you know what you are going to capture) it is better to select the appropriate scene yourself, as it takes the guessing work out of the equation.
The Sony A7000 has a decent range of well-designed presets:
Portrait:
Blurred background for a beautiful Bokeh, and sharpens the subject. How good this will look relies heavily on the lens you’re using. A zoom is less suited to this kind of photography; best use a prime, fast lens.
This preset accentuates the skin tones softly (you can select skin softening for all Modes in the Menu system too).
Sports Action:
Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
Macro:
Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.
Landscape:
Shoots the entire range of scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors. The Sony A7000 will go to a smaller aperture to achieve this, as lenses are sharper corner-to-corner at smaller apertures.
Sunset:
Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.
Night Scene:
Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere. Will go to higher ISO values and larger apertures to achieve a useable shutter speed, enabling you to capture sharp images without blur.
Hand-held Twilight:
Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera shake, and noise.
Night Portrait:
Shoots night scene portraits using the flash. The flash does not pop up automatically. Pop up the flash manually before shooting.
Anti Motion Blur:
Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.
Eye AF
You’ll need to assign this function to a button for it to work.
MENU – purple camera icon- page 8 – Custom Key Settings – assign the Eye AF function to the desired button.
The Eye AF feature will let the camera focus on the subject’s eyes while you keep the button pressed.
Point the Sony A7000 at a face, and push the button to which you have assigned the Eye AF
Press the shutter button while pressing the button
The Sony A7000 may not be able to focus on the eyes depending on the circumstances, like when no
Eyes can be detected within the autofocus area. In such cases, the camera focuses on the face.
You cannot use Eye AF when the focus mode is set to C, set it to A.
When the Sony A7000 focuses on the eyes and Smile/Face Detect is on, you’ll see a detection frame.
Displayed on the face after it is shown on the eyes. When Smile/Face Detect is off, a detection frame is affixed to the eyes.
Auto Obj. Framing (not available in RAW)
Menu – Red camera icon- page 13- Auto Obj. Framing – desired setting (On or Off)
When the A7000 detects and shoots faces, macro shooting subjects or subjects that are tracked by Lock-on AF, the Sony A7000 automatically trims the image into an appropriate composition and saves it.
Live View Display
MENU – purple camera icon – page 7 – Live View Display – desired setting
Live view shows your images as they’ll appear out of the camera, with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, Creative Style, or Picture Effect on the screen.
Setting Effect ON (default setting and Intelligent Auto, Superior Auto, Sweep Panorama, Movie or Scene Selection): Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen. Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in Manual Exposure mode.
Setting Effect OFF: Shows Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, Creative Style, or Picture Effect. This is useful for precisely checking your composition in particular conditions. Like when you use a third-party Flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings.
e-Front Curtain Shut.
MENU – purple camera icon – page 4 – e-Front Curtain Shut – desired setting ON or OFF
Yes the Sony A7000 has an electronic front curtain shutter! This shortens the time lag between shutter releases.
Remember that when you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.
When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, turn this function off. If you set this function to On, the correct exposure will not be set, or the image brightness will be uneven.
Lens compensation features
The Sony A7000 has a range of built-in lens compensation functions. I can see this being useful for journalism and sports shooters who want to quickly get their jpegs to their editors with the minimum amount of editing.
Shading Comp.
MENU – Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp – Shading Comp – desired setting ( Auto or Off)
Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen caused by certain lenses.
The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses.
Chromatic Aberration Compensation
MENU -Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp – Chro. Aber. Comp – desired setting (Auto or Off)
Reduces the colour deviation at the corners of the screen, caused by certain lens characteristics.
The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses.
Distortion Compensation
MENU -Red camera icon – page 2 – Lens Comp – Distortion Comp – desired setting (Auto or Off)
Compensates for the distortion of the screen, caused by particular lens characteristics.
The Shading Comp function is only available with certain A-mount lenses and with some cannot be turned Off.
Memory card issues
Some people have reported problems with certain memory cards. These problems include:
Unable to magnify images on the card.
Buffer related problems.
Inability to read the memory card.
SD, SDHC, SDXC memory card and Memory Stick PRO Duo, Pro-HG Duo, PRO-HG HX Duo media are all supported.
Make sure you:
Format the memory card once you’ve inserted in the camera.
If you’re using fast burst speeds, use a fast card (32GB 95MB/s read and 45mB/s) write is my recommendation to take advantage of the Sony A6500 FR and Buffer.
If you’re using larger cards (64 or 138GB), make sure you get the fastest available.
An SDHC UHS-I card (stands for “Ultra High Speed”) is recommended for best performance in burst mode.
Sandisk Extreme Pro SDHC UHS-I cards seem to work very well.
Conclusion
Here it is, the advanced manual for the Sony A7000 with plenty of tips and tricks to get you started. If you’re somewhat overwhelmed by this large post, I would suggest that you use the search function in a browser like Chrome at first to find the subject you are actually looking for. If you have any questions or need extra information on any subject covered here, feel free to write something in the comments section below. Have Fun!
Before we get into how to get bokeh in a full body portrait, let’s have a look at what this actually means. What the Japanese call “bokeh” is basically the quality of the out of focus part of the image. This includes how round the specular highlights are in that part of the image (the bokeh balls) as well as how blurry the background is and the smoothness of the transition between the sharp subject and blurry background.
Much depends of course on personal preference when it comes to bokeh, but in general the trend is the more ‘creamy’ the background the better. And it’s currently considered that the more shallow the depth of field is, the more eye pleasing your image will be.
Achieving a beautiful bokeh with headshots is relatively easy, you have to make sure that the eyes are in focus. But for a nice bokeh effect in a full body portrait, there are a few more things to consider. We’ll have a look at what is needed to achieve this much sought after look.
Best Aperture for Bokeh in a full body portrait
One of the most important settings in order to achieve Bokeh in a full body portrait will be Aperture. The general rule is the faster your aperture, the more blurry the background will be. Aperture relates to size of the opening of the lens. If you have a look inside your lens, you’ll most likely see tiny little aperture blades. These can be opened or closed using the aperture ring (or through your camera). Most lenses have an aperture of a range between f/1.4 to f/22. Counterintuitively, the lower the number, the more open your lens will be, and the more light will hit the sensor. So f/4 is a larger opening that f/16 for instance.
This is great for low light shooting, as the more light hits the sensor, the shorter the time will be to achieve a good exposure. Due to lens design and the laws of physics, this also means that the in-focus area will be smaller with a large aperture than with a small aperture. And this is exactly what we want to achieve in this case.
If you’ve ever tried shooting face portraits at f/1.4, you’ll probably have had problems with achieving an image that looks in focus. This is because the closer your subject is to the lens, the more this shallow depth of field effect is boosted or exaggerated. If you’ve ever tried your hand at macro photography, you’ll also have noticed that the in focus part is extremely thin. Hence many macro photographers use a system called focus stacking, where you take several shots with a different focus point and stitch these together afterward.
The good news is that for full body portraits, this is not really a problem. Because you’ll be further away from the subject, you’ll be able to shoot at f/1.4 or f/1.8 without any problem whilst still having the full body in focus. You will need a lens that is quite sharp at this large aperture though, and these generally cost quite a bit of money.
Best Focal length for Bokeh in a full body portrait
When choosing the right lens for a nice Bokeh in a full body portrait, you need to be aware of a phenomenon called lens compression. When you use a longer focal length you’ll be further away from your subject. This gives the impression that distant objects are larger than they are in real life and it appears that the background has pulled closer to the subject. This optical phenomenon together with that shallow depth of field I was talking about gives you the best Bokeh for a full body portrait.
Besides this maximum separation between subject and background, the large aperture will give you the roundest ‘Bokeh balls’ with specular highlights too. This is because the iris mechanism (those little iris blades that are in the lens) are at their most open and hence most round setting.
Another advantage for full body portraits is that using lens compression you’ll be able to ‘crop’ a lot of distracting elements like houses, cars, other people, etc out of your frame.
A disadvantage is that you’ll need some room to move backwards in order to get your subject in the frame from head to toe.
The longer your lens is, the more this effect will occur, but there is a sweet spot focal length that differers per camera system. Besides this fact, faster (large aperture) lenses are generally speaking already quite expensive and fast telephoto lenses are extremely expensive.
You’ll always prefer a prime over a zoom lens for bokeh in full body portraits. This is because generally speaking, prime lenses are faster and we need this for that separation between subject and background. But there are exceptions, for instance Sigma make an excellent 50-100 mm f/1.8 zoom for APS-C system that is ideal for this type of portraiture. Also, many wedding photographers use a 70-200mm f/2.8 zoom lens for their couple shoots. This because you won’t notice too much difference between f/1.8 and f/2.8 at 160 mm. And it’s convenient to have a zoom during a full day of shooting of course.
I prefer a prime lens for shooting full body portraits because it will give you the maximum separation between subject and background with a creamy out of focus area and nice, round specular highlights. The right focal length starts at around 50mm in full frame format. This is a good starting point if you can find an f/1.4 in your camera system that is sharp enough at this aperture like the Zeiss Plannar T 50mm f/1.4.
A better focal length is however around 80mm, you can get away with a somewhat slower lens here like a Tamron 85mm f/1.8. A lens that offers great value and excellent optical quality.
The best marriage between convenience (i.e. how far back you have to step to get your full body shot), large aperture and focal length is around 100mm/ Sigma offers an excellent 105mm f/1.4 for Nikon, Canon, Sigma and Sony mounts that is well worth the investment.
The next traditional focal lights is 135 mm/ This is considered the holy grail Bokeh focal length with a perfect marriage between separation, compression and bokeh. You’ll need to find an f1/8 pithing your mount system like the fabulous Zeiss 135mm f.18 or Sigma again now make a cross platform 135mm fast aperture lens too.
You’ll off course find equivalent lenses from Olympus, Fuji Canon and Nikon too. Remember that you generally get what you payed for. And if budget is no issue, you could go for a 6000 dollar 200mm f/2.
Conclusion
Now that you’ve learned about large aperture lenses, the effect of compression with tele lenses and the right focal lengths for great Bokeh in full body portraits., you’re ready to go out and make your own. Remember that any current camera system can achieve excellent results as long as you have the right lens and technique. Once you’ve mastered this, why not mix it up in the future and add a flash for some high sync daytime photography? Or use the Brenizer method where you stitch together multiple images from a full body portrait scene for the ultimate medium format bokeh look? The possibilities are endless, as long as you enjoy yourself and stay creative.
The Hasselblad X1D-50c is a fine medium format camera but the Swedish company has refused to supply users with any remote trigger or release cord option. It is possible to use the Hasselblad Phocus Mobile application but this is only available for iOS (iPhone/iPad) and can be very buggy. I have found the ideal solution however that works as both a cable remote and can also be controlled from your Android or iOS smartphone. It’s a solution that requires only one device and one cable.
There are also a few other benefits that I’ll get into later.
Pluto camera remote trigger for Hasselblad X1D
After a weekend making long exposures in Amsterdam, it was clear to me that I needed a good remote triggering option for the Hasselblad X1D. I’ve been using the Pluto trigger remote on other cameras for a few months as a normal trigger as well as in more advanced scenarios like for photographing split second water droplets. And since this involves more complex setups, I’m quite familiar with the fact that the main Pluto trigger module output is a 2,5 mm mini jack.
The Hasselblad Release Cord H trigger also uses a mini jack to trigger H cameras, so I wondered if using the headphone or microphone port on the X1D would act similarly. Since these jacks are the larger 3,5 mm variant, you only need to either get a 2,5 mm to 3,5 mm convertor or a cable that does this. After a quick test connected to the mic input of the X1D, I can confirm that it works!
Other benefits of Pluto trigger for the Hasselblad X1D
A few X1D users have already tried a similar technique with a basic (Nikon) camera remote that uses a mini jack connector, but using the Pluto has several other benefits.
You can mount the Pluto trigger on the hot-shoe using the supplied cold shoe adapter for easy and clean storage. and you can purchase a one piece 2,5 mm to 3,5 mm mine jack cable. Don’t worry, this does not harm the camera, in fact the triggering functionality is built in to the mic port. No idea why Hasselblad has not made one themselves…
It’s also possible to use the Pluto standalone, triggering the camera with the black button, but you can also use the Pluto app and remotely control the Hasselblad X1D with a modern, up to date and advanced application for both Android and iPhone.
It’s even possible to use the more advanced functionality of the Pluto application for scenarios like star-trails and time-lapses. These latest triggers also use Bluetooth 3.0 that uses almost no battery life, leaving the extra juice inside the X1D battery for photography. (in case you’re wondering, the Pluto is charged through USB)
You will still need to use the HDR capabilities of the camera though, as these rely on bulb mode with most other cameras and the X1D does not have bulb mode (in the sense that it’s necessary to press and depress the shutter to start/stop an exposure).
The really cool thing is that you can even use the more advanced functions of the Pluto together with the new Pluto Valve for some Medium Format droplet photography!
Conclusion
If you’re looking for a one stop Hasselblad X1D remote triggering solution for long exposure, HDR, time-lapse or droplet photography, the Pluto trigger with 2,5mm to 3,5mm cable is your best bet. You can give this small and portable trigger a semi permanent home on the hot she with the include cold-shoe adapter, you can use it standalone or with a modern app for both iPhone and Android smartphones, and you can extend the functionality of your X1D with more advanced scenarios like star-trails, time-lapses and droplet photography. You can order the Pluto trigger here on their website or I believe they do have local dealers in every corner of the world. If you found another solution or any input on this post, I’d love to hear from you in the comment section below.
Welcome to my Panasonic S1r advanced manual with tips and tricks. This guide starts from your Menu settings and goes through all aspects of this interesting camera. I know it is a lot of information, but you’ll get the hang of it soon. If you’ve reached this page looking for the Lumix S1 guide, you can find it here.
Key Features
47MP Live MOS sensor with no AA filter (not from Sony)
20 fps burst w/continuous AF using the e-shutter (for ~50 frames)
9 fps burst w/continuous AF using mechanical shutter (for 600 frames)
80MP Raw and/or JPEG files using High-Resolution mode
4K/60p UHD video capture
Magnesium body designed to be dust/weather-sealed
Two memory card slots: UHS-II and XQD.
Assortment of 4K and 6K Photo modes and in-camera focus stacking
USB charge and power capability
Top plate LCD
AF joystick
Wi-Fi Bluetooth
I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, and giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way.
Diving into the MENU system
When you switch on your Panasonic Lumix S1r you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.
After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (photo settings)
MENU → photo settings page 1 of 7 (image quality settings page 1)
Photo Style
This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a colour effect here.
Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.
As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Metering Mode
You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the Panasonic S1R takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.
Implementation of this is quite basic in this Lumix, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
Multiple: This is the method in which the Panasonic S1R measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Highlight weighted: Optimise exposure of the subject for highlighted areas of the frae Address measure the whole frame evenly.
Aspect Ratio
You can change the aspect ratio of your photos here. Changing the aspect ratio can be used as a way to boost your creativity, for instance landscapes often look great with a 16:9 ratio, or for sharing on Instagram, a 1:1 crop might suit you better.
An full frame sensor camera has a native aspect ratio of 3:2. You should realise that changing the aspect ratio to anything else than this will actually crop the sensor, meaning that you’ll lose pixels. You should look at it as re-framing your image (like you can do in Lightroom or other photo editors) inside the Panasonic S1R. Jpeg’s will be stored with the chosen ratio, but RAW images (although previewed with the chosen ratio), will still have the full information of the 3:2 sensor retained.
These are the aspect ratios available:
3:2: native sensor ratio
4:3: the ratio used in the Panasonic micro-four-thirds cameras.
16:9: for a wider looking view
1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
65:42: super wide crop for a panorama effect
2:1: the more the better 🙂
Picture Quality
Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.
Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.
If you only shoot in RAW, the image on the rear screen when reviewing the images are of a very low quality. When you import to the computer they are fine but it might be better to shoot both RAW and JPEG.
Picture Size
Picture Size sets the number of pixels for Jpeg (nor RAW). The higher the numbers of pixels, the more detail your pictures will have..
The Panasonic S1r also has a digital teleconverter option, allowing you to zoom in by a factor of times 2 or times 4. This can be a handy feature if you don’t shoot RAW (see next item for more info). Thanks to in-body digital processing, the resulting Jpegs actually retain a larger image size than what you’d expect of de facto cropping the sensor by a factor 2 or 4. I would however only recommend using this feature if you’re a die hard jpeg shooter, since using RAW files and developing your images in Lightroom or another app will almost always get you better results.
HLG Photo
HLG Photo allows images to be shot with a wider dynamic range. By reproducing both glaring lights and dark shadows that are likely to be overexposed or underexposed, the Lumix S achieves rich, precise color expression as close as possible to visual memory.
HLG Photos are produced as an HSP file. The user can play back these vibrant images on the latest Panasonic HLG-compliant 4KTV via HDMI cable connection or other HLG-compliant devices. It is also ideal for photographers’ photo presentations.
High Resolution Mode
Ah yes, High Resolution Mode. Probably one of the most talked about new camera features of the last few years. You’ll definitely try it once, but you’ll be hard-pressed to find a real use for it in day to day shooting. What happens in High resolution mode is that the Panasonic S1R uses the stabilised sensor to make two exposures of the same scene with a one pixel difference (effectively moving the sensor by a pixel in the second capture). This doubles the resolution of your output file. This will really only work in still scenes where there is absolutely no movement, and it is best to use a tripod to avoid camera shake.
It is a quite simple process:
Press up/down to select Start, and press MENU/SET. If there is any camera shake, the High-Res Mode icon will flash, telling you it is not possible to make a high res image.
Decide on the composition, and perform recording. The screen will go dark during recording. The recording state indicator (red) will flash. Do not move the camera while the indicator is flashing. Recording will finish automatically. When the recording has finished, the Lumix S1r will combine the pictures, so it will not be able to perform the next recording for a while.
Press Fn2 to end High-Res Mode.
There is a new Mode 2, which tries to amend movement in the high res mode. This works great for leaves of trees and even water.
Long Exposure NR
The Panasonic S1r will automatically apply noise reduction to long exposures. This applies to both Jpeg and RAW files. A black frame is taken after your initial shot to measure the noise present. Since many environmental factors (like temperature and location) have an effect on the amount of noise that you’ll see, this is the best way to determine what is noise in your frame. This data is then subtracted from your image for a noise-free (more-or-less) result.
MENU → photo settings page 2 of 7 (image quality settings page 2)
ISO Sensitivity
Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 100 and upper limit to 6400, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.
Min. Shtr Speed
A very important setting if you feel that the Panasonic S1R is producing blurry images for your shooting style. Birds in flight, for instance, will need a faster shutter speed than many other types of photography.
Since most of the time, you’ll need to raise ISO to gain faster shutter speeds, Panasonic (and many other camera producers) have made this option available. You can set it to Auto, or choose a minimum shutter speed up to 1/32000. The latter is a bit high, but as I mentioned, if you shoot action sports or for certain types of nature photography, a minimum shutter speed of 1/1000 or 1/2000 should be set. At these speeds, you can begin to “freeze” action.
i. Dynamic Range
This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the Panasonic S1R adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.
This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the Lumix will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful if you are a jpeg shooter.
There is also an impact on RAW images, because the exposure will be underexposed.
Vignetting Comp.
All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images. Especially important for jpeg shooters to turn this on. RAW shooters can apply these corrections later on (and with better results) in a desktop application like DXO optics Pro.
Diffraction Compensation
When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic Lumix S1r will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon. You should use it if you shoot jpeg.
Filter Settings
The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your Panasonic S1R up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.
If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.
And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
These are all the image effects available:
Expressive
High Key
Monochrome
Silky Monochrome
Cross Process
Bleach Bypass
Fantasy
Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
Retro
Low Key
Dynamic Monochrome
Impressive Art
Toy Effect
Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
Star Filter
Old Days
Sepia
Rough Monochrome
High Dynamic
Toy Pop
Soft Focus
One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
MENU → Camera Icon → page 3 of 7 (focus settings)
AF Custom Setting (Photo)
You can customise the operation settings of Auto Focus for stills here. These presets apply only when you’re in AFF or AFC.
There are 4 Sets (or presets) to choose from:
Set 1: This is a basic general purpose setting.
Set 2: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in only one direction at a constant speed.
Set 3: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in random directions and obstacles are likely to appear in the image.
Set 4: This is a setting suited for scenes where the speed of the subject changes significantly.
There are three areas in which these presets can tweaked according to your preferences:
AF Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to movement of your subject.
AF Area Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to your subject moving out of the selected AF area.
Moving Object prediction: For still subjects, you can prevent defocusing caused by a sudden movement of the subject.
AF Assist light
AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half-way making it easier for the Panasonic S1R to focus when recording in low light conditions. Range is about 1 meter.
Focus Peaking
In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when focus is being adjusted manually. Great focussing aide for manual focussing. Can be set to High or Low.
1-Area AF moving speed
This changes the speed of the autofocus point selection so that it’s easier to move your single autofocus point across the frame.
MENU → Camera Icon → page 4 of 7 (flash settings page 1)
Flash Mode
You’ll need to override iAuto and set your S1r to P, A, S or M in order to have these options.
Forced Flash On: The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording conditions.
Slow Sync: when taking pictures against a dark background landscape, this feature will slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated. Dark background landscape will appear brighter.
Forced Flash Off: The flash is not activated in any recording conditions.
2nd Curtain Synchro: activates the flash just before the shutter closes when taking pictures of moving objects such as cars using a slow shutter speed.
Firing Mode
Select whether to set the flash output automatically (TTL) or manually.
Firing mode cannot be set when using a flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:optional). It can be set only when using an external flash that does not use a battery (supplied with some models of Panasonic digital cameras).
Flash Adjust
djust the flash brightness when pictures taken with the flash are over or underexposed plus or minus 3EV.
Flash Synchro
you can Synchronise the output of the flash to the Exposure Compensation.
Manual Flash adjust
Adjust the flash output manually on the flash or not.
Auto Exposure comp.
The Panasonic S1R automatically optimizes the flash output for the Exposure Compensation value.
Red-eye removal
If you use a flash when using Red-Eye Reduction, the Lumix will automatically detect red-eye and corrects the picture.
Wireless
Flashes compatible with this camera (DMW-FL580L (DC-G9)/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: optional) come with the wireless recording function. You’ll need a hotshoe trigger like this to use this functionality. There is no built-in trigger in case you’re wondering.
MENU → Camera Icon → page 5 of 7 (Flash settings page 2)
Wireless channel
With this function, you can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the flash attached to the hot shoe of the Panasonic S1R.
Wireless FP
During wireless recording, an external flash fires an FP flash (high speed repetition of flash firing). This firing allows recording with the flash at a fast shutter speed.
Communication Light
Setting the output of communication light.
Wireless setup
Set up different groups and Flash modes for each group for ultimate control when using multiple flashes.
MENU → Camera Icon → page 6 of 7 (Other Photo settings page 1)
Bracketing
The Bracket function allows you to take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting like exposure or aperture by pressing the shutter button.
Possible bracket types:
Exposure Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images with different exposures. You can select the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure range (from 1/3 EV to 1 EV stops difference).
Aperture Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images at different apertures. Either select all apertures or a number of shots (3-5) within a selected range.
Focus Bracket:Press the shutter button and the Panasonic S1R will sequentially take multiple images with different focus positions. You can select the distance between focus positions, the number of exposures and the sequence from far to near or the other way around.
White Balance Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix S1r will take three pictures with different white balance settings automatically
White Balance Bracket (color temperature): Press the shutter button once to take three pictures with different White Balance Color Temperature values automatically. You can also set the correction range by touching the up/down slider on the screen.
Silent Mode
Disables operational sounds and output of light at once for completely silent stealth mode shooting with the Panasonic S1R.
Image Stabilizer
The Panasonic Lumix S1R has a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the Lumix S1r is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S.), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.
It’s also possible to use the in-body sensor stabilisation with older, manual primes that don’t relay EXIF information (like most importantly focal length in this case). You’ll need to manually set the focal length in the Focal length Set function to get an optimal performance.
There is also a new Auto mode where camera shake is corrected for up/down and left/right movement. This auto mode detects the panning direction automatically.
Burst Shot 1 Setting
The drive mode dial has two options for burst shooting. Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.
You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.
Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.
Burst Shot 2 Setting
You can assign any of these presets to 1 or 2 on the mode dial of the Panasonic Lumix S1r.
Shutter Type
You can use either the mechanical or electronic shutter, or 50/50, or let the Panasonic S1R decide what is most appropriate. The electronic shutter has a maximum speed of 1/32000 sec, the mechanical shutter can go up to 1/8000 second and if you use the Electronic first curtain shutter, you can only go up to 1/2000 second.
AUTO: Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording condition and shutter speed.
MECH: Takes pictures in Mechanical Shutter Mode.
EFC: Takes pictures in Electronic Front Curtain Mode.
ELEC. : Takes pictures in Electronic Shutter Mode.
ELEC.+NR: uses a black frame to apply noise reduction
Remember that in artificial light or when using a flash, you best use the mechanical shutter only to avoid artefacts.
Shutter Delay
To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, shutter is released after the specified time has passed. 1, 2, 4 or 8 second delay are selectable. Keep your hands steady and don’t use this delay, else you might miss that critical moment.
Ex. Tele Conv.
You can digitally enlarge pictures without too much quality deterioration with this function. Only for jpeg use, you can extend the range of your lens by times 1.4 or 1.6 using this function.
MENU → Camera Icon → page 7 of 7 (Other Photo settings page 2)
Time Lapse/Animation
You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a time-lapse movie or stop motion/animation. You’ll need to turn the drive mode dial to Time Lapse for this:
You can choose between Time Lapse or Animation in this menu.
Time Lapse:
Switch to Time Lapse Shot if it is not selected.
change start time and shooting interval according to your preferences.
press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
Stop motion/Animation
Switch to Stop Motion Animation
Change auto shooting and shooting interval according to your preferences
press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
move the subject per frame
press the folder menu to end the recording
Self Timer
The self timer function is self explanatory. If you actually want to use this function, you’ll need to set the drive mode to:
In this menu, you can select what type of self timer you’d like to use: a 10 second delay and one shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2 second intervals or a 2 second delay, all after pressing the shutter.
Flicker Decrease
The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in your photos. 1/50,/1/60,1/100 or 1/120 second are available.
6K/4K Photo
6K/4K photo mode is designed to help you to capture fleeting moments by letting you shoot at an incredible 30fps (60fps for 4K mode). Continuous autofocus mode is automatically activated and it draws on 4K/6K video technology to shoot 18 MP image at this fast frame rate. You’re basically recording video where you can extract the frames in-camera.
There are three 6K Photo Modes, 6K Burst, 6K Burst (S/S) and 6K Pre-Burst. These modes determine at how and when the footage will be recorded.
In 6K Burst mode the Panasonic S1R shoots 6K footage for as long as you hold down the shutter release button.
In 6K Burst (S/S), S/S stands for Start/Stop and recording is started and ended with a press of the shutter release.
6K Pre-Burst mode is useful for short bursts of action because it only records for 2 seconds. However, the camera starts scanning the moment it’s active and it records the 30 images from the 1 second prior to you pressing the shutter button as well as the 30 from the 1 second after you pressed it.
4K is the same, except it allows you to go up to 60 frames per second.
Extracting stills from the 6K Photo Mode footage is pretty easy as follows:
Press the play button to located the files. Clips recorded in 6K Photo Mode are marked with the 6K Photo icon to make the easy to identify.
Once you’ve found the clip you want, either tap the 6K Photo Icon on-screen or the Up navigation key.
If you have a long clip with fleeting moments of action you may like to use the slide bar at the top to quickly scroll to an interesting bit of footage. Alternatively, there’s a playback option (button Fn1) that you can use to play and pause the movie.
Once you’ve found the area you’re interested in, tap the Frame View Icon to see a scrollable stack of frames, just swipe right and left to locate the best shots.
When you find an image you like, tap the Menu/Set button or 6K Icon to save the image. Images are saved as jpegs.
it’s possible to save all the frames from 5 second sections of your 6K movie. To do this:
Tap the Menu button and scroll down to Playback (the 6th tab), then scroll to the second page of options and select 6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving.
Then swipe on the screen until you find the clip that you want to extract stills from.
Now use the same on-screen movie navigation controls as you used before to find the first frame of the 5 seconds that you want to pull the stills from and tap the 6K Photo icon to save it and the image from the next 5 seconds.
Post Focus
Post focus means controlling your focus point afterwards. This might sound like a scifi concept, but it’s quite simple if you know what is really happening. The Panasonic S1R performs a burst of shots ( same picture quality and system as the fore-mentioned 6K/4K photo recording) while automatically shifting the focus to different areas. After the recording, you can select your desired focus point from the list of 30(6K) or 60(4K) per second captures. It works best with scenes with little to no movement, as having someone move around would of course add another degree of shifting focus points to the mix.
In the same way, focus stacking can be achieved. Focus stacking is a method of making an images that is sharp across the frame. By recording the same scene multiple times with different focus points and later on combining all these images, you can get an image that is sharp across the frame. This is a technique often used in macro photography where your depth of field is very shallow (only a small part, where focus lies, is sharp) because of the nature of shooting at close distances. But it can also be used for other types of photography like landscapes.
It’s recommended to use a very fast SD card in order to achieve these high frame rates by the way.
You’ll need to set your drive mode dial to this setting:
Now press the shutter button halfway so the Lumix can detect the possible focus areas, and then fully press the shooter to record the scene in burst mode (which is actually video as I mentioned earlier).
For post focus:
Select your series of images you just captured, there is an icon that reassures you this is a batch of images to avoid any confusion:
Once selected, all you need to do is use the touch screen to select the focus point you desire. And now touch this icon to save:
The Focus stacking function can be performed in-camera. This methods also starts with selecting the series of images you just captured. Then you press the FN1 button and you’ll be in the focus stacking menu. There are two types of merging, Auto and range. Auto automatically selects the best images to merge into a more sharp composite image, and Range allows you to select a specified focus range with your finger on the touch screen. When you have done this, touch the icon on the bottom right of the screen and the Lumix S1r will save the resulting composite image with the EXIF data from the closest focussed image.
Self Timer
The self timer function is self explanatory. If you actually want to use this function, you’ll need to set the drive mode to:
In this menu, you can select what type of self timer you’d like to use: a 10 second delay and one shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2 second intervals or a 2 second delay, all after pressing the shutter.
MENU → Video Menu→ page 1 of 7 (also called Video Image Quality 1)
Exposure Mode
Switch your Panasonic S1R to P, A, S or M. for full control over shutter speed, Iso and aperture.
Photo Style
You can select a colour effect here.
Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.
As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Metering Mode
You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the S1r. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.
Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
Multiple: This is the method in which the Panasonic S1R measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Highlight weighted: Optimise exposure of the subject for highlighted areas of the frae Address measure the whole frame evenly.
ISO sensitivity (video)
Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 100 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.
Flicker Decrease
The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in your movies. 1/50,/1/60,1/100 or 1/120 second are available.
i. Dynamic
This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.
This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the Panasonic S1R will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful.
Shading Comp.
All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images.
Diffraction Compensation
When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic S1R will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon. You should use it if you shoot jpeg.
MENU →Video Menu→ page 2 of 7 (also called Video Image Quality 2)
Filter Settings
The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your Panasonic Lumix S1R up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.
If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.
And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
These are all the image effects available:
Expressive
High Key
Monochrome
Silky Monochrome
Cross Process
Bleach Bypass
Fantasy
Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
Retro
Low Key
Dynamic Monochrome
Impressive Art
Toy Effect
Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
Star Filter
Old Days
Sepia
Rough Monochrome
High Dynamic
Toy Pop
Soft Focus
One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M
Sets auto exposure settings for video in these modes.
CreativeVideo combined set
As with photography, aperture and shutter control dramatically change the way video looks.
A film-maker aiming for a particular look will select an f-stop giving the required depth of field, or a shutter speed portraying sharp, clean movement, or maybe a soft motion-blur effect. The Hybrid camera allows such control during video mode, but there are limitations. Because the native frame rate of video is 25fps, the slowest shutter speed available is 1/25th sec.
The rule of thumb for choosing shutter speed is based on the ‘shutter angle’ used in cinemas for projecting film. Until very recently, this was 180 degrees; it essentially means each frame is flashed twice on screen, which is one reason why film looks as it does in cinemas. If you are keen for a ‘cinematic’ look, not only should you shoot at 24fps, but also keep your shutter at 1/48th sec – on a DSLR/DSLM, the closest to this is 1/50thsec.
You can use this ‘doubling rule’ when shooting at 25 or 50fps, but if you want to try a faster shutter for sharper movement capture, simply experiment! What works best for you? Just be aware that to achieve a bright enough exposure when sticking to a minimum 1/50th sec shutter speed, you may need to select a higher ISO or, better still, use very fast lenses.
MENU → Video Menu → page 3 of 7 (Image Format settings)
Rec Quality
MP4:
4K, 60p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 150Mbps, LPCM
4K, 30p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 1O0Mbps, LPCM
4K, 24p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 1O0Mbps, LPCM
FHD, 60p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 28Mbps, AAC
FHD, 30p 420/8bit/LongGOP, 20Mbps, AAC
High Speed Video
180/30p FHD
120/30p FHD
60/30p 4K
48/23,98p 4K
Rec File Format
MP4 or AVHCD.
Luminance Level
Select the luminance range to match the use of video.
MENU → Video Menu → page 4 of 7 (focus settings)
AF Custom Setting (Video)
You can customise the operation settings of Auto Focus for stills here. These presets apply only when you’re in AFF or AFC.
There are 4 Sets (or presets) to choose from:
Set 1: This is a basic general purpose setting.
Set 2: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in only one direction at a constant speed.
Set 3: This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in random directions and obstacles are likely to appear in the image.
Set 4: This is a setting suited for scenes where the speed of the subject changes significantly.
There are three areas in which these presets can tweaked according to your preferences:
AF Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to movement of your subject.
AF Area Sensitivity: increase or decrease how sensitive the autofocus readjustment reacts to your subject moving out of the selected AF area.
Moving Object prediction: For still subjects, you can prevent defocusing caused by a sudden movement of the subject.
Continuous AF
Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting and the Continuous AF setting in this menu.
AFS/AFF/AFC:
On: The S1r automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording.
Off: The camera maintains the focus position at the start of recording.
MF
You can use manual focus.
Focus Peaking
Turn on Focus Peaking when in Manual Focus. Focus Peaking helps you figure out where fine focus lies thanks to a type of coloured grain or noise in those areas.
1-Area AF moving speed
This changes the speed of the autofocus point selection so that it’s easier to move your single autofocus point across the frame.
MENU → Video Menu → page 5 of 7 (audio settings)
Sound Rec Level Disp.
Select if you want to display the microphone level on the recording screen.
Sound Rec Level Adj.
Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (-12 dB to +6 dB).
Sound Rec Level Limiter
The Panasonic Lumix S1R adjusts the sound input level automatically, minimising sound distortion (clipping noise) when the volume is too high.
Wind Noise Canceller
This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining sound quality. You can choose either High, Standard or Off. This function works only with the built-in microphone.
Mic Socket
Selects which input is used for the mic socket.
Special Mic.
Only available only when you use an external stereo shotgun microphone like the Panasonic DMW-MS2. You have a few options on how to use a microphone like this:
Stereo: Allows stereo recording of sound over a wide area.
Lens Auto: Allows recording within the range that is set automatically according to the angle of view of the lens.
Shotgun: Allows recording from one direction by shutting out background and surrounding noise.
S.Shotgun: Allows recording within the range even narrower than that of SHOTGUN.
Manual: Allows recording within the range you set manually.
XLR mic adapter setting
For use withe the Panasonic DMW-XLR1 XLR Microphone Adapter.
Sound Output
You can record motion pictures while hearing the sounds that are being recorded by connecting a commercially available headphones to this unit.
You can switch the sound output:
Realtime: Actual sound without time lag. It can be different to the audio recorded in the movie.
Rec Sound: Sound that is being recorded in motion pictures. The audio may be output slower than the actual audio. If you use the HDMI output during recording, the setting is fixed to this.
MENU → Video Menu → page 6 of 7 (Monitor and display settings)
HDMI Rec Output
Sets the picture quality for the HDMI output. Bit Mode, Info Display and 4K down convert are available.
MENU → Video Menu → page 7 of 7 (other video settings)
Image stabiliser
Image sensor stabilisation can permanently on or off for video, as well as a type of electronic stabilisation. Boost IS will give you the maximum stabilisation and the cost of some image quality.
Image Area of Video
You can choose between the full sensor surface, an APS-C size sensor space when using an APS-C sensor. It’s also possible to close a pixel by pixel surface.
MENU → Custom Menu → Page 1 of 9 (image quality settings)
Photo style settings
It’s now possible to show or hide certain photo styles according to your own preferences. There are now also up to ten custom photo styles that you can tweak according to your own preferences or even start from scratch.
You can now also and ISO sensitivity and white balance into a custom profile in the “My Photo Style Settings” tab. So you can build a custom look that includes these settings.
ISO Increments
Choose the increments of exposure changes between 1/3 EV or 1 EV.
Extended ISO
ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum of ISO 100. Base ISO of the sensor is 200, so this extended ISO basically halves this in software, with a slight decrease in quality.
Exposure Offset Adjust.
Adjust what the Panasonic S1R determines to be a good exposure by plus or minus 1 EV. This can be changed for all the metering modes being Multi Metering, Center Weighted, Spot and Highlight Weighted.
Color Space
Select either sRGB or Adobe RGB here. Adobe RGB has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB, so it might be worth looking into this color space if you print to paper a lot. But remember that you’ll also need a monitor capable of reproducing the larger color range too. And this can often lead to problems when converting to sRGB or editing your images in external applications. Because of all this, I have it set to sRGB.
Exposure Comp. Reset
An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the camera is turned off.
MENU → Custom Menu → Page 2 of 9 (focus and shutter settings page 2)
Focus/Shutter priority
Set whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during Auto Focus. Setting it to Focus priority means you won’t be able to take an image if focus is not acquired. Release will.
Focus Switching for Vert / Hor
Memorises separate positions for horizontal and vertical orientations (two vertical orientations, left and right, are available).
AF/AE Lock Hold
When ON is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.
AF+MF
When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to AFS or set AF Lock using AF/AE LOCK), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.
MF Assist
Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen) on the Panasonic S1R.
MF Guide
Sets whether MF Assist (enlarged screen) will appear in a windowed screen display or in a full screen display as well as your focussing distance (in meter or feet).
Focus ring Lock
Locks the focus ring so you won’t accidentally change focus during shooting.
Show/Hide AF mode
Allows you to select whether you’ll see the AF mode selected on your screen or EVF. If you find that you do not use certain focus modes, it’s possible here to hide them on screen making it easier for you to navigate this particular menu.
MENU → Custom Menu → Page 3 of 9 (focus and shutter settings page 2)
Pinpoint AF Setting
The screen will be zoomed in when the shutter is pressed halfway, selectable in full screen or in a window.
AF-point Scope Setting
The methods for displaying the magnification window. View magnification full screen or picture in picture.
Shutter AF
Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Half Press Release
The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway when this is ON.
Quick AF
As long as the camera is held steady, the Panasonic S1R will automatically adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed. You’ll get better AF performance at the expense of battery life.
Eye Sensor AF
The Panasonic S1R wil automatically start autofocus when the eye sensor is activated.
Loop Movement Focus Frame
When setting the AF area position or the MF Assist display position, you can now loop the position from one edge to the other edge of the screen.
AFC start point
Selects whether you want to see a visual representation of you selected AF area on screen.
MENU → Custom Menu → Page 4 of 9 (operation settings page 1)
Q.MENU
In Custom operations, you can customise the Q Menu according to your liking.
You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.
Press Q.MENU to display the Quick Menu.
Press down to select the custom tool and then press MENU/SET.
Press left/right arrow to select the menu item in the top row and then press MENU/SET.
Press left/right to select the empty space in the bottom row and then press MENU/SET. (You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to the bottom row)
Press return to switch to the recording screen.
Touch Settings
Enables/disables the Touch operation.
Touch Screen: All touch operations are turned on.
Touch Tab: Operations of tabs are enabled.
Touch AF: Operation to bring the subject you touch into focus AF or adjust the focus and brightness AF+AE are enabled.
Touch Pad AF: Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the viewfinder is in use.
Lock lever Setting
Selects the functionality of the lock lever. You can control which functionality will be locked when you use the lock lever on the camera body. Cursor, Joystick, touch screen, dial and DISP button are selectable.
Fn Button Set
You can assign various features, such as recording functions, to specific buttons and icons as well as the function lever.
Press up/down to select the function button you want to assign a function to and then press MENU/SET.
Press up/down to select the function you want to assign and then press [MENU/SET].
FN Lever Setting
You are also free to assign any function to the FN lever using the same method as Fn Button set.
WB/ISO/Expo button
Select the functionality of these buttons.
Iso Displayed settings
Customise the Iso settings on the display.
Exposure comp Display. setting
An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the Panasonic S1R is turned off.
MENU → Custom Menu → Page 5 of 9 (operation settings page 2)
Dial Set.
Assign Dial (F/SS): Assigns the operations of the aperture value and shutter speed in Manual Exposure Mode.
Rotation (F/SS): Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed.
Control Dial Assignment: It sets the item to be assigned to the control dial while the recording screen is displayed.
Exposure Comp.: Assigns the Exposure Compensation to the front dial or rear dial so that you can directly adjust it.
Dial Operation Switch Setup: Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials when you press the function button to which Dial Operation Switch is assigned.
Joystick Setting
The joystick provides the same functions as the cursor buttons MENU/SET button.
Illuminate button
Sets the functionality of the illuminated buttons.
ON1: activate illuminated buttons constantly.
ON2: button is illuminated only when the backlight button of the Status-LCD is pressed.
OFF: feature disabled.
Video Rec. Button
Enables/disables the motion picture button.
MENU → Custom Menu → Page 6 of 9 (monitor and display settings page 2)
Auto Review
Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.
Constant Preview
You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording screen in Manual Exposure Mode. Some camera makers call this Live View.
Level gauge
Enable the level gauge functionality.
Photo grid line
Enables a grid as a composition guide for your photography.
Framing outline
Sets a frame for videography.
Center marker
The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].
AF Area Display
Selects whether you want to see a visual representation of you selected AF area on screen.
MENU → Custom Menu → Page 7 of 9 (monitor and display settings page 2)
Live View Boost
Boosts the performance of the Live View Display.
Monochrome Live View
You can display the recording screen in black and white. Recorded images will not be affected.
Night Mode
This displays the monitor and viewfinder screens in red. It reduces the difficulty in seeing the surroundings caused by brightly-lit screens at night or in any low-light environment.
LVF/Monitor Disp. Set
You can select separate screen display styles for the viewfinder and the monitor.
Expo.Meter
Display the exposure meter.
Set to ON to display the Exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.
Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display information for screen by pressing DISP.
If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
Focal Length
select whether or not to display focal length information.
Photo/video Preview
Selects the functionality of the Photo/Video Preview.
Photos/Videos remaining
Show how many photos or how many minutes of video remain on your SD card.
MENU → Custom Menu → Page 8 of 9 (monitor and display settings page 3)
Show/Hide monitor layout
Show the monitor layout or not.
Blinking Highlights
When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back, white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.
Zebra Pattern
Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern. You can select a brightness value between 50% and 105%. In Zebra 2, you can select OFF. If you select 100% or 105%, only the areas that are already white saturated are displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be processed as a zebra pattern will be.
HLG view assist.
Assist with the exposure of HLG images.
Sheer Overlay
Allows you to display a previously taken image with opacity so that you can line-up another shot.
I.S. status scope
You can activate a type of scope with a level meter and a green indicator that shows you how stable you are. This can be useful even on a tripod to see how stable your rig is for long exposures.
MENU → Custom Menu → Page 9 of 9 (lens and other settings)
Lens Focus resume
Resume the focus point of the lens when the Panasonic S1R is switched off or recording is resumed.
Focus Ring Control
Determines the speed of the focus ring between linear and non-linear. You can basically setup the focus ring in any way you wish according to your video style.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 1 of 6 (Card/File settings)
Card Format
Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.
Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance.
Double Slot Function
Set the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is performed.
Relay Rec: Relays recording to the other card slot even after the first card runs out of free space during recording. Records same images to the two cards.
Backup Rec: Records same images to the two cards.
Allocation Rec: Allows you to specify the card slot to be used for recording for different image formats like Jpeg on one and RAW on the other.
Folder/File Settings
Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.
File Number Reset
Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.
Copyright Information
Add copyright information to the EXIF data of each photo. This can include copyright as well as artist information.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 2 of 6 (Monitor/Display settings page 1)
Power Save Mode
These settings will determine the way the camera handles inactivity on your part to save battery life.
Sleep Mode: The Panasonic S1R is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi): The camera is automatically turned off if it is not connected to a Wi-Fi network and has not been used for 15 minutes (
Auto LVF/ Monitor Off: The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the Panasonic S1R has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
Power Save LVF Shooting: If you display the monitor using the viewfinder/monitor automatic switching function, the camera will turn off automatically after being left idle.
Monitor Frame Rate
This sets the monitor frame rate to either 120fps or 60fps. 120fps will run smoother at the cost of battery life.
LVF Frame Rate
This sets the viewfinder frame rate, to either 60 or 120fps. Again, at 120 fps you’ll see movement smoother at the cost of battery life.
Monitor Settings
Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the Monitor/viewfinder can be adjusted.
Monitor Backlight
These settings will affect how and when brightness of the monitor is adjusted.
Auto: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the Lumix S1r.
Mode 1: Makes the monitor brighter than normal.
Mode 2: Set the monitor to the standard brightness.
Mode 3: Makes the monitor brighter than standard.
Remaining Battery Level
This setting enables either a percentage display or a battery with bar display to show remaining power in your battery.
Status LCD
You can set the LCD Backlight to High, Low or Off.
Eye Sensor
Sensitivity will This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.
LVF/Monitor Switch will This will set the method for switching between the monitor and viewfinder.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 3 of 6 (Monitor/Display settings page 2)
Level Gauge Assist
Adjust: Hold the Panasonic S1R in a horizontal position, and press MENU/SET. The level gauge will be adjusted.
Level Gauge Value Reset: Restores the default level gauge setting.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 4 of 6 (input and output settings)
Beep
This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound. Remember this will be off if you’re in Silent Mode!
Headphone volume
If you’re using a headphone, you can adjust the volume here.
Wi-Fi
It’s possible to control your Panasonic S1R with a smartphone or a tablet, display pictures on TV, print Wirelessly, Send images to a PC or use Web Services from Panasonic all via WiFi.
To use the Wi-Fi function on the Panasonic S1R, a wireless access point is needed off course.
By default, Wi-Fi is assigned to the Fn6 button when the camera is in Recording Mode, while it is assigned to Fn1 when the Lumix is in Playback Mode. You can assign it to any button you want.
When you want to connect to WiFi, simply press this button.
Wi-Fi Setup
Priority of Remote Device: Sets either the S1R or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during remote recording.
Wi-Fi Password: You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a smartphone.
LUMIX CLUB: Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.
PC Connection: You can set the workgroup. To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is required.
Device Name: You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.
Wi-Fi Function Lock: To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect saved personal information, protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.
Network Address: Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.
Approved Regulations: Displays the certification number for radio regulations.
Bluetooth
You can also connect to your Smartphone, Tablet or TV if your device has the Bluetooth functionality. A function called pairing is needed in order to establish a connection. You’ll find it in this menu, remember to also turn Bluetooth on if you want to do so.
USB
Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable.
Select on Connection: Select this setting to select the USB communication system when connecting to another device.
PC Storage: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
PC Tether: Select this setting to control the Panasonic S1R from a PC installed with supported software.
Pictbridge PTP: Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.
Battery information
This menu item will tell you how much juice and lifespan is left in your battery is.
Battery Use Priority
Sets which battery should be used first, either grip or camera.
TV Connection
Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible TV and monitor connected with this unit using the HDMI cable. It’s possible to set it to Auto or 4K, 1080p, 1080i, etc…
MENU → Setup Menu → page 5 of 6 (General settings)
Save to Custom mode
Save a range of settings to a custom mode.
Load Custom Mode
load one of the custom modes previously saved.
Custom Mode Settings
A full overview of the Panasonic S1R custom operations modes.
Save/Restore Camera Setting
Save the camera’s setup information to the card. Since saved setup information can be imported to thePanasonic S1R, you can apply the same setup to more than one camera.
Reset
The following settings are reset to the default:
Recording settings.
Setup settings Wi-Fi Setup and Bluetooth settings.
Setup/custom settings (except for Wi-Fi Setup, Bluetooth, Face Recog. and Profile Setup).
MENU → Setup Menu → page 6 of 6 (General Camera Setup)
Clock Set
You have already probably set time and date when you first turned on the Panasonic S1R, but you can also change this here.
Time Zone
Sets the times for the region where you live (HOME) and your travel destination (DESTINATION). Time and date will be altered to reflect the local time and date at your travel destination.
Pixel Refresh
This setting will perform optimisation of the imaging device (sensor) as well as the processor. Use this function when you start seeing hot or dead pixels in your images.
Sensor Cleaning
Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging device is performed.
Language
Set the language displayed on the screen.
Firmware Version
This enables the firmware versions of the S1R and lens to be checked before an upgrade for instance.
Online Manual
Provides a link to the online manual of the Panasonic Lumix S1r.
Approved Regulations
It’s mandatory for any electronics company to supply a list of approved regulations which is adheres too. These might be different per region.
MENU → My Menu (that little man)
My Menu Setting
You can register frequently-used menus and display them in My Menu. You can register up to 23 menus for quick access.
Add: Specifies the menu to be displayed in My Menu to register it.
Sorting: Rearranges the menus displayed in My Menu. Select the menu you want to move and set the destination.
Delete: Deletes registered menus from the displayed menu list.
Display from my menu: Sets the type of the menu screen to be displayed.
Quick access with the Q Menu (Fn 2)
The most commonly used settings can be accessed through what is called the Q Menu. This is the FN2 button that you’ll find right next to the screen, above the trash bucket button.
The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display style thePanasonic S1R is in.
Photo Style
This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview when you load them into an app like Lightroom.. You can select a colour effect here.
Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
Cinelike D: Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
Cinelike V: Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed to create film-like images.
As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Motion Pic. Set
You can change bitrate and frame-rate for video here, as well as select the appropriate movie container.
Picture Setting
You can quickly change picture size and picture quality here for your Jpeg’s.
These are the aspect ratios available:
3:2: native sensor ratio
4:3: the ratio used in the Panasonic micro-four-thirds cameras.
16:9: for a wider looking view
1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
65:42: super wide crop for a panorama effect
2:1
Quality wise, you can choose between Small (S), Medium (M) and Large (L) files sizes. Obviously, Large will have the best quality Jpeg’s, at the expense of larger files. If you only shoot Jpeg (and not RAW) set it to Large. If you shoot both (Jpeg+RAW, see next screen), you could set it to small or medium since you’ll always work with the RAW in post processing. This way, you’ll still have a Jpeg for sharing quickly online or as a reference whilst still saving some space.
Quality
Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the Panasonic S1R which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.
Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.
AFS/AFF
AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.
The AFC function below AFS/AFF continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.
Some more info on these modes for clarification:
AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
AF Mode
This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected. There are 6 different methods available, each suited for different scenarios.
Face/Eye Detection
A person’s face, eyes, and body (the entire body or the upper half of the body) are automatically detected.
When the Panasonic S1R detects a person’s face or body, an AF area is displayed over the detected person.
Yellow: This is the AF area for the person to be brought into focus. The camera automatically selects the person.
White: These are the AF areas for people other than the person to be brought into focus. This type of AF area is displayed when more than one person is detected.
When a person’s face or eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought into focus, if the eyes are inside the yellow frame.
The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people. To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus, align an AF area with the desired person or eye. You can do so easily by touching a person indicated with an AF area.
Tracking
The Panasonic S1R keeps adjusting the focus and exposure automatically to the specified moving object. Perform either of the following operations to lock the subject to be tracked:
Use a button: aim the AF tracking frame D over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.
Use the touch screen: touch the subject on the screen.
If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear.
The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked and green while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Press the Menu button to cancel the lock.
225 Area
Widest setting with all AF points used. Up to 225 AF areas can be focused. This is effective when your subject is not in the center of the screen.
Custom Multi
From among 225 AF areas, you can freely set the optimum shape of the AF area for the subject.
1-Area
The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the screen.
Pinpoint
You can achieve a more precise focus on a point that is smaller than 1-Area. If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the focus by enlarging it.
Burst Shot Setting
You can choose your bust shot setting here for continuous drive mode.
Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button. You can apply different Burst Mode settings to Burst Shot 1 and and Burst Shot 2 Setting in these menus.
You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), SH pre (which actually goes back a few seconds in time and saves these images too). These SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Version 2 is always faster that version 1.
Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.
Metering Mode
You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the Panasonic S1R. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.
Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Highlight weighted: priority is given to the highlights of your focus point subject.
Exposure Comp
If you feel like your Lumix S1r is over- or underexposing your images (or you want to purposely underexpose), you can dial in what is called exposure compensation here. A range of plus minus 5 is available here to correct the auto exposure of the camera.
ISO sensitivity
Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.
Conclusion
So this was a quick run-though of all the Panasonic S1r Menu items, with pointers, tips and tricks along the way. This information should get you familiarised with this fantastic mirrorless camera. If you would like any clarification or extra information on any functionality here, let me know through the comment section below. Happy shooting!
Panasonic Lumix LX100 II settings, tips and tricks
Introduction
Welcome to my Panasonic Lumix LX100 II advanced manual with tips and tricks. This guide starts from your Menu settings and goes through all aspects of this interesting camera. I know it is a lot of information, but you’ll get the hang of it soon, I promise.
The Panasonic LX100 II is the successor to the LX100 that Panasonic released in 2014. The new model shows many similarities, but is equipped with a new sensor with a higher resolution, a touchscreen, a larger handle and more control buttons. The LX100 II also gets a larger buffer, allowing up to 33 raw photographs to be taken at a rate of 11 frames per second. When using continuous autofocus, the speed is 5.5bps.
ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, and giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way.
Diving into the MENU system
When you switch on your Panasonic Lumix LX100 II you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future. After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages. We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)
MENU → Camera Icon → page 1 of 4 (also called the Rec menu)
Picture Size
Picture Size sets the number of pixels for Jpeg (nor RAW). The higher the numbers of pixels, the more detail your pictures will have.
When the aspect ratio is set to 4:3, you use all the 17 MP of the sensor for a maximum image size of 4736×3552 pixels.
When the aspect ratio is 16:9, you only use a wide crop of the sensor for a maximum image size of 5152×2904 pixels.
When the aspect ratio is 3:2 you use a part of the sensor and have an 4928×3288 image size.
When the aspect ratio is 1:1, you’ll partly use the sensor for an 3888 x 3888 image size.
The Panasonic LX100 Mark 2 also has a digital teleconverter option, allowing you to zoom in by a factor of times 2 or times 4. This can be a handy feature if you don’t shoot RAW (see next item for more info). Thanks to in-body digital processing, the resulting Jpegs actually retain a larger image size than what you’d expect of de facto cropping the sensor by a factor 2 or 4. I would however only recommend using this feature if you’re a die hard jpeg shooter, since using RAW files and developing your images in Lightroom or another app will almost always get you better results.
Quality
Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the Lumix LX100 II which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.
Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.
AFS/AFF/AFC
AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.
The AFC function continuously changes focus according to the movement of your subject.
Some more info on these modes for clarification:
AFS will find focus and stay focused at that distance until you take a photo or release the shutter button. This is handy if you want to focus and then recompose your shot for instance.
AFF will do the same unless it detects subject movement, at which time it will temporarily switch to AFC operation in order to re-focus.
AFC won’t start to seek focus until you half-press the shutter, and will continually evaluate subject movement and change focus as needed.
With AFS you can can lock focus on a particular point, then swing the camera to get the right framing; with AFC, it will not lock focus, but will keep re-focusing. That’s why Pinpoint focusing can’t be used with AFC.
Photo Style
This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview. You can select a colour effect here.
Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Filter Settings
The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your Lumix GLX100 II up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.
If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.
And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
These are all the image effects available:
Expressive
High Key
Monochrome
Silky Monochrome
Cross Process
Bleach Bypass
Fantasy
Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
Retro
Low Key
Dynamic Monochrome
Impressive Art
Toy Effect
Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
Star Filter
Old Days
Sepia
Rough Monochrome
High Dynamic
Toy Pop
Soft Focus
One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
Color Space
Select either sRGB or Adobe RGB here. Adobe RGB has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB, so it might be worth looking into this color space if you print to paper a lot. But remember that you’ll also need a monitor capable of reproducing the larger color range too. And this can often lead to problems when converting to sRGB or editing your images in external applications. Because of all this, I have it set to sRGB.
Metering Mode
You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.
Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Highlight Shadow
This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video). So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:
Standard: no adjustments is set.
Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
Custom: make your own preset.
This is how to adjust the parameters for Custom presets:
Rotate the front/rear dial to adjust the brightness of bright/dark portions.A – Bright portion
B – Dark portion
The rear dial is for adjusting dark areas, and the front dial is for adjusting bright areas.
To register a preferred setting, press ▲, and select the destination where the custom setting will be registered to [Custom1]/[Custom2]/[Custom3].
Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.
Press [MENU/SET].
The screen display can be switched by pressing [DISP.] on the brightness adjustment screen.
Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with / / / back to the default setting.
When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709] or [V-Log L], setting is fixed to [ ] (Standard).
MENU → Camera Icon → page 2 of 4 (also called the Rec menu)
i. Dynamic
This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.
This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the camera will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful if you are a jpeg shooter.
There is also an impact on RAW images, because the exposure will be underexposed.
i. Resolution
Another jpeg only functionality, i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop). But if you shoot jpeg only, you should set it to Low at least, since most of the time RAW files would be sharpened in post processing too.
Flash
You’ll find all the flash functions in this menu for the hotshoe flash you want to use.
Using a flash takes some skill, but you have a couple of tweaks available for you if you want to make the most of your photography.
Firing Mode
TTL: The camera automatically sets the flash output. This system meters the light coming through the lens, this includes both ambient and flash light. It calculates the best exposure according to these measurements. Preferred for most users.
Manual: Set the luminosity ratio of the flash manually. 1/1 means full power, and you can decrease the power to an output that best suits your scenery. It’s not the easiest way to use a flash, but you’ll gain a lot of knowledge in how to balance your flash and ambient light this way.
Flash Mode
like your smartphone camera, you can tell the flash to always be on, turn it off or use a ‘pro’ feature called slow sync. In Slow Sync, the Lumix LX100 II will attempt to balance the ambient light with the light of the flash, even in near darkness by slowing down the shutter speed.
These three options are available for the built-in flash. If you’re using a hotshoe flash, or a controller for off camera flashes, you’ll have a few more modes available:
Flash Synchro
1st: the flash will sync with the first movement of the shutter (when it opens). This is the normal mode used for normal photography.
2nd:The flash fires right before the second operation of an exposure, namely the closing of the shutter.
Second curtain sync is often uses for creative effect, where you’d see the light source appear behind the subject.
Flash Adjust
You can adjust the output power of the flash here in 1/3EV steps in TTL metering mode. In essence, this will give you more or less flash power than when set to zero. If you, for instance , feel that there is always too much flash light in your photos, you could dial it down a little here.
Auto Exposure Comp.
Normally, when you use the compensation dial on the camera body, you’ll also increase or decrease the flash output power. You can turn this OFF here, so the compensation dial will only affect your exposure (brighter or darker) and not flash power.
Wireless Flash Settings
If you want up your game in regards to flash photography, you’ll quickly turn to wireless flashes. These will enable you to use the flash power in a creative way, adjusting power and angle of light by positioning your off-camera flashes differently. Panasonic make a few wireless enabled flashes like the DMW-FL200L, DMW-FL360L or DMW-FL580L, but you can also invest in a few third party brands like Godox. An entire book could be written (and probably has been) on this subject. But for nowWe’ll stick with what is in the menu system.
Wireless: set to ON if you want to use a wireless flash.
Wireless Channel: Select the channel you have set for the wireless flashes.
Wireless Setup: You’ll have three groups of flashes available (A, B and C) as well as your on-camera hotshoe controller flash.. Each flash group can be set to TTL (metering through the lens), Auto, Manual or OFF. You can also dial in flash adjust +-3 EV per group here.
Wireless FP
FP is most commonly known as high speed sync. This system uses a series of high speed flash burst in sync with the shutter in order to achieve flash at high shutter speeds. This is useful in situations where you’d normally be overpowered by sunlight and/or you want to shoot at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field effect.
You can enable or disable this function for wireless flashes here.
Red-Eye Removal
If you use a flash when using Red-Eye Reduction, the camera will automatically detect red-eye and corrects the picture.
ISO Auto upper limit
Sets the upper a limit of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.
Min. Shtr Speed
A very important setting if you feel that the Panasonic LX100 II is producing blurry images for your shooting style. Birds in flight, for instance, will need a faster shutter speed than many other types of photography.
Since most of the time, you’ll need to raise ISO to gain faster shutter speeds, Panasonic (and many other camera producers) have made this option available. You can set it to Auto, or choose a minimum shutter speed up to 1/32000. The latter is a bit high, but as I mentioned, if you shoot action sports or for certain types of nature photography, a minimum shutter speed of 1/1000 or 1/2000 should be set. At these speeds, you can begin to “freeze” action.
Long Shtr NR
The camera will automatically apply noise reduction to long exposures. This applies to both Jpeg and RAW files. A black frame is taken after your initial shot to measure the noise present. Since many environmental factors (like temperature and location) have an effect on the amount of noise that you’ll see, this is the best way to determine what is noise in your frame. This data is then subtracted from your image for a noise-free (more-or-less) result.
Diffraction Compensation
When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic LX100 II will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon. You should use it if you shoot jpeg.
MENU → Camera Icon → page 3 of 4 (also called the Rec menu)
Image Stabilizer
The Panasonic Lumix LX100 II has a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the camera is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S.), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.
It’s also possible to use the in-body sensor stabilisation with older, manual primes that don’t relay EXIF information (like most importantly focal length in this case). You’ll need to manually set the focal length in the Focal length Set function to get an optimal performance.
I.zoom
You can use the camera’s intelligent resolution technology to increase the zoom ratio up to 2x higher than the original zoom ratio with limited deterioration of picture quality.
Digital Zoom
Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times for jpeg’s. I would not recommend either of these functions, as it is better to shoot RAW in this case and crop in processing for the best possible quality.
Burst Rate
You can choose your bust shot setting here for continuous drive mode.
Burst shooting means that you’ll shoot continuously when you press the shutter button.
You’ll see SH (for super high burst rates), This SH modes are only available with the electronic shutter. Then we have High, Medium and Low which work with the Mechanical shutter too. The actual burst rate will be higher if you shoot Jpeg only.
4K Photo
4K photo mode is designed to help you to capture fleeting moments by letting you shoot at an incredible 30fps. Continuous autofocus mode is automatically activated and it draws on 4K video technology to shoot 8 MP images at this fast frame rate. You’re basically recording video where you can extract the frames in-camera.
There are three 4K Photo Modes: 4K Burst, 4K Burst (S/S) and 4K Pre-Burst. These modes determine at how and when the footage will be recorded.
In 4K Burst mode the Lumix LX100 II shoots 4K footage for as long as you hold down the shutter release button.
In 4K Burst (S/S), S/S stands for Start/Stop and recording is started and ended with a press of the shutter release.
4K Pre-Burst mode is useful for short bursts of action because it only records for 2 seconds. However, the camera starts scanning the moment it’s active and it records the 30 images from the 1 second prior to you pressing the shutter button as well as the 30 from the 1 second after you pressed it.
Extracting 8Mp stills from the LX100 II’s 4K Photo Mode footage is pretty easy as follows:
Press the play button to located the files. Clips recorded in 4K Photo Mode are marked with the 4K Photo icon to make the easy to identify. Once you’ve found the clip you want, either tap the 6K Photo Icon on-screen or the Up navigation key.
If you have a long clip with fleeting moments of action you may like to use the slide bar at the top to quickly scroll to an interesting bit of footage. Alternatively, there’s a playback option (button Fn1) that you can use to play and pause the movie.
Once you’ve found the area you’re interested in, tap the Frame View Icon to see a scrollable stack of frames, just swipe right and left to locate the best shots.
When you find an image you like, tap the Menu/Set button or 4K Icon to save the image. Images are saved as jpegs.
it’s possible to save all the frames from 5 second sections of your 4K movie. To do this:
Tap the Menu button and scroll down to Playback (the 6th tab), then scroll to the second page of options and select 4K PHOTO Bulk Saving.
Then swipe on the screen until you find the clip that you want to extract stills from.
Now use the same on-screen movie navigation controls as you used before to find the first frame of the 5 seconds that you want to pull the stills from and tap the 6K Photo icon to save it and the image from the next 5 seconds.
Self Timer
In this menu, you can select what type of self timer you’d like to use: a 10 second delay and one shot, 10 seconds with 3 shots with 2 second intervals or a 2 second delay, all after pressing the shutter.
Time Lapse Shot
You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a time-lapse movie
Switch to Time Lapse Shot if it is not selected.
change start time and shooting interval according to your preferences.
press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
Stop Motion Animation
You can take a sequential number of images with relatively long delays in between to achieve a stop motion/animation.
Switch to Stop Motion Animation
Change auto shooting and shooting interval according to your preferences
press te shutter half way to exit the menu.
press the shutter to start your time-lapse.
move the subject per frame
press the folder menu to end the recording
MENU → Camera Icon → page 4 of 4 (also called the Rec menu)
Panorama Settings
You can change settings for the Panorama shot mode on your mode dial here.
Direction: sets the recording direction to either horizontal or vertical.
Picture Size: set to either Standard or Wide.
Silent Mode
Disables operational sounds and output of light at once for completely silent stealth mode shooting with the Panasonic LX100 II.
Shutter Type
You can use either the mechanical or electronic shutter, or 50/50, or let the Panasonic LX100 II decide what is most appropriate. The electronic shutter has a maximum speed of 1/32000 sec, the mechanical shutter can go up to 1/8000 second and if you use the Electronic first curtain shutter, you can only go up to 1/2000 second.
AUTO: Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording condition and shutter speed.
MSHTR: Takes pictures in Mechanical Shutter Mode.
EFC: Takes pictures in Electronic Front Curtain Mode.
ESHTR: Takes pictures in Electronic Shutter Mode.
Remember that in artificial light or when using a flash, you best use the mechanical shutter only to avoid artefacts.
Bracket
The Bracket function allows you to take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting like exposure or aperture by pressing the shutter button.
Possible bracket types:
Exposure Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images with different exposures. You can select the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure range (from 1/3 EV to 1 EV stops difference).
Aperture Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix will sequentially take multiple images at different apertures. Either select all apertures or a number of shots (3-5) within a selected range.
Focus Bracket:Press the shutter button and the Panasonic LX100 II will sequentially take multiple images with different focus positions. You can select the distance between focus positions, the number of exposures and the sequence from far to near or the other way around.
White Balance Bracket: Press the shutter button and the Lumix LX100 II will take three pictures with different white balance settings automatically
White Balance Bracket (color temperature): Press the shutter button once to take three pictures with different White Balance Color Temperature values automatically. You can also set the correction range by touching the up/down slider on the screen.
HDR
You can combine 3 image with different levels of exposure into a single picture a high dynamic range. This way, you can minimise the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example, the contrast between the background and the subject is large.
Two setting are available:
Dynamic range: either select Auto where the camera will decide what range of exposure is suitable, or manually select plus/minus 1,2 or 3 EV.
Auto Align: Automatically aligns the resulting images to adjust for movement or not.
Multi Exp.
I multiple exposure is basically laying 2 (or more) images on top of each other. This is different to a HDR or composite shot in the sense that these images should be totally different from each other. It’s a technique the comes from the darkroom photography area where 2 negatives where placed on top of each other to create a totally new image with the two images combined.
How to do this:
Press up/down to select start and then press Menu/Set.
Decide on the composition and take the first picture. After this first image, press the shutter halfway down to take the next image.
Shoot a third or fourth exposure. all these images will add up to make a multiple exposure.
Press the down arrow to exit or press the shutter button fully down.
You multiple exposure is finished, and you can view it on the screen.
MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 1 of 3 (also called Motion Picture Menu)
These are all movie related settings, and menu of them are the same as the stills related menu options. YOu can however (obviously) set them up differently for video.
Rec Format
You can either choose to record in AVCHD or MP4 format. The higher the Bit rate value is, the higher the picture quality becomes. Since the camera employs the VBR recording method, the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, the recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded. Different frame rates and bitrates are selectable per format in the Rec Quality setting.
Rec Quality
The Panasonic LX100 II is capable of smooth, high quality video recording in 4K (3840 x 2160, at 100mbps/25 fps in MP4). 4K Photo mode allows photographers to capture spur of the moment shots by extracting individual frames from 4K video to create a 3840 x 2160 8-megapixel equivalent JPEG image.
AFS/AFF/AFC
AFS is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Single and AFF is an abbreviation of Auto Focus Flexible. In AFS, the focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway and in AFF focus is continuously readjusted according to the movement of the subject. See AFF as a function between Single AF and Continuous AF.
On: TheLumix LX100 II automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording.
Off: The camera maintains the focus position at the start of recording.
Continuous AF
Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting and the Continuous AF setting in this menu.
Photo Style
You can select a colour effect here.
Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Filter Settings
The filter Settings go a step further than merely a photo style. These include artistic effects like Low Key, Sepia, Cross Process and retro stylings. You can turn them ON or OFF here, select the effect you want to use and change the settings by using the touch screen. You can also set your Lumix LX100 II up to shoot one with and one without an image effect simultaneously.
If you’re wondering how you get to Creative Control mode, you need to set the mode dial to the paint palette.
And simply press up and down to select the image effects. You can also display the selection screen by touching the Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
These are all the image effects available:
Expressive
High Key
Monochrome
Silky Monochrome
Cross Process
Bleach Bypass
Fantasy
Sunshine: you can select the position and size of the light source here.
Retro
Low Key
Dynamic Monochrome
Impressive Art
Toy Effect
Miniature Effect: you can select the portion of your image that is in focus here (and where the blur effect won’t happen)
Star Filter
Old Days
Sepia
Rough Monochrome
High Dynamic
Toy Pop
Soft Focus
One Point Color: you can select the color to leave in here by using a color picker.
Metering Mode
You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.
Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
Multiple: This is the method in which the Lumix LX100 II measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Highlight Shadow
This allows you to lighten the shadows and darkens the highlights in your image (or video). So this is a method of creating balance in your image if you feel like the highlights are too strong or the shadows too dark. You have 4 presets available, and you can also make 3 custom presets yourself:
Standard: no adjustments is set.
Raise the contrast: Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
Lower the contrast: Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
Brighten dark areas: Dark areas are brightened.
Custom: make your own preset.
For more info, see the equivalent setting for photos above.
MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 2 of 3 (also called Motion Picture Menu)
i.Dynamic
This setting will change contrast and exposure when there is a big difference from the darkest area to the brightest are in your image. What really happens is that the camera adjusts the exposure in order to capture more details in the highlights. You can choose between High, Standard, Low or Off.
This naturally causes an under-exposure in the shadow areas. But inside the jpeg engine, the camera will compensate for this by boosting shadows. The downside here is that this will obviously lead to more noise in the boosted regions, but because this is done with data directly coming from the sensor, it can be quite useful.
i.Resolution
i-Resolution is a form of sharpening. High, Standard, Low and Off are selectable, and you should see these like the threshold for sharpening in an application like Lightroom. Many photographers discard these intelligent functions, and if you shoot RAW only, it’s not that important for you (except i Dynamic which can change your exposure plus or minus 1/3 stop).
ISO Auto upper limit
Set the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when it is set to AUTO.
Shading Comp.
All lenses have a lens profile that registers both distortion and shading in the corners at all apertures. These lens profiles can be applied in-camera to counter unwanted vignetting in your images.
Diffraction Compensation
When you stop down your lens to a smaller aperture (normally from f/11 to f/22), a phenomenon called diffraction causes a loss in sharpness. It happens because light begins to disperse when passing through a small opening. When diffraction compensation is set to ON, the Panasonic LX100 II will add sharpening to your image to try and counter this phenomenon.
Stabilizer
The Panasonic LX100 II has a stabilised sensor. The sensor inside the camera is suspended on a magnetic field and can compensate for movement like the minute shakes of your hands or any other kind of movement. There are also many lenses available with an optical image stabilisation unit, that physically move glass elements around inside the lens to do the same. Both systems have their pros and cons, and it is generally accepted that a stabilised sensor works better for wide angle lenses (below 40mm) whilst optical lens stabilisation is more efficient for the tele range. It is also possible to use both systems at the same time (called Dual I.S.), where you’ll take advantage of the best of both worlds.
I.zoom
You can use the camera’s intelligent resolution technology to increase the zoom ratio up to 2x higher than the original zoom ratio with limited deterioration of video quality.
Digital Zoom
Digital zoom takes this a step further, allowing you to zoom in up to 4 times for videos.
Picture Mode in Rec.
You can record still pictures while recording a movie on the Panasonic LX100 II. During movie recording, press the shutter button fully to record a still picture when turned On. Aspect will always be 16:9.
There are 2 settings available:
Video Priority
Pictures will be recorded with a picture size determined by the Rec Quality setting for motion pictures.
Only JPEG images are recorded when Quality is set to Raw (still pictures will be recorded in jpeg)
Up to 80 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture. (Up to 20 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
Photo Priority
Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality.
The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still picture will be recorded in the motion picture during that period, and audio is not recorded.
Up to 20 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture. (Up to 10 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording).
MENU → Film Camera Icon → page 3 of 3 (also called Motion Picture Menu)
Sound Rec Level Disp.
Select if you want to display the microphone level on the recording screen.
Sound Rec Level Adj.
Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (-12 dB to +6 dB).
Wind Noise Canceller
This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining sound quality. You can choose either High, Standard or Off. This function works only with the built-in microphone.
MENU → Custom Tool (Custom Menu)
You’ll find all customisable settings of the Panasonic LX100 II in this Menu. We’ll first look at the Exposure settings, continued by Focus/release and so on.
Exposure Menu page 1 of 7 (Exposure and Shutter button behaviour settings)
ISO Increments
Choose the increments of exposure changes between 1/3 EV or 1 EV.
Extended ISO
ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum of ISO 100. Base ISO of the sensor is 200, so this extended ISO basically halves this in software, with a slight decrease in quality.
Exposure Comp. Reset
An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the camera is turned off.
AF/AE Lock
Lock focus and exposure with AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.
AF/AE Lock Hold
When ON is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release AF/AE LOCK. To clear the lock, press AF/AE LOCK again.
Shutter AF
Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Half Press Release
The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway when this is ON.
Quick AF
As long as the camera is held steady, the camera will automatically adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed. You’ll get better AF performance at the expense of battery life.
Focus Menu page 2 of 7 (more Focus/Release Shutter settings)
Eye Sensor AF
The Panasonic LX100 II will automatically start autofocus when the eye sensor is activated.
Pinpoint AF Setting
The screen will be zoomed in when the shutter is pressed halfway, selectable in full screen or in a window.
AF-point Scope Setting
The methods for displaying the magnification window. View magnification full screen or picture in picture.
AF Assist lamp
AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half-way making it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light conditions. Range is about 1 meter.
Direct focus area
When the camera is in MF mode, the image will be magnified automatically by rotating the focus ring. These lenses do not support this function. It is possible to magnify the image on LX100 II, Push the menu/set button after pushing AF Mode.
The MF Assist function is also available when it is set to ON in Direct Focus Area] function.
Focus/Release Priority
Set whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during Auto Focus. Setting it to Focus priority means you won’t be able to take an image if focus is not acquired. Release will.
Focus Switching for Vert / Hor
Memorises separate positions for horizontal and vertical orientations (two vertical orientations, left and right, are available).
Loop Movement Focus Frame
When setting the AF area position or the MF Assist display position, you can now loop the position from one edge to the other edge of the screen.
AF Area Display
Selects whether you want to see a visual representation of you selected AF area on screen.
Focus Menu page 3 of 7 (more Focus/Release Shutter settings)
AF+MF
When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to AFS or set AF Lock using AF/AE LOCK), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.
MF Assist
Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen) on the Panasonic LX100 II .
MF Assist Display
Sets whether MF Assist (enlarged screen) will appear in a windowed screen display or in a full screen display.
Fn Button Set
You can assign various features, such as recording functions, to specific buttons and icons as well as the function lever.
Press up/down to select the function button you want to assign a function to and then press MENU/SET.
Press up/down to select the function you want to assign and then press [MENU/SET].
Q.MENU
In Custom operations, you can customise the Q Menu according to your liking.
You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.
Press Q.MENU to display the Quick Menu.
Press down to select the custom tool and then press MENU/SET.
Press left/right arrow to select the menu item in the top row and then press MENU/SET.
Press left/right to select the empty space in the bottom row and then press MENU/SET. (You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top row to the bottom row)
Press return to switch to the recording screen.
iA Button Switch
Change the function of the iA button.
Control Ring
Change the function of the control ring.
Operation Lock Settings
Sets the control functions on the Panasonic S to be disabled with the function button Operation Lock. Cursor, Joystick and Touch screen can be turned off.
Operation Menu page 4 of 7 (dial and buttons operation settings)
Video Button
Enables/disables the motion picture button.
Touch Settings
Enables/disables the Touch operation.
Touch Screen: All touch operations are turned on.
Touch Tab: Operations of tabs are enabled.
Touch AF: Operation to bring the subject you touch into focus AF or adjust the focus and brightness AF+AE are enabled.
Touch Pad AF: Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the viewfinder is in use.
Dial Guide
Explains the functionality of the dials whilst browsing the menu system.
Zoom Lever
Change the functionality of the zoom lever
Auto Review
Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.
Monochrome Live View
You can display the recording screen in black and white. Recorded images will not be affected.
Constant Preview
You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording screen in Manual Exposure Mode. Some camera makers call this Live View.
Live view boost
The screen will appear brighter than the captured image so you can check the composition in low-light environment, like at night.
Monitor/ Display Menu page 5 of 7 (settings for the display)
Peaking
In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when focus is being adjusted manually. Great focussing aide for manual focussing. Can be set to High or Low.
Histogram
Display the histogram. A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black to white) and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis. It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.
Guide Line
This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture.
Center Marker
The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].
Highlight
When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back, white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.
Zebra Pattern
Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern. You can select a brightness value between 50% and 105%. In Zebra 2, you can select OFF. If you select 100% or 105%, only the areas that are already white saturated are displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be processed as a zebra pattern will be.
Expo.Meter
Display the exposure meter.
Set to ON to display the Exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.
Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display information for screen by pressing DISP.
If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
MF Guide
When you set the focus manually, an MF guide that allows you to check the direction to achieve focus is displayed.
Monitor/ Display Menu page 6 of 7 (monitor and lens behaviour settings)
LVF/Monitor Disp. Set
You can select separate screen display styles for the viewfinder and the monitor.
Monitor Info. Disp.
Display the recording information screen.
Viewfinder style: Scales down images slightly so that you can better review the composition of the images.
Monitor style: Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see their details.
Rec Area
This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording and still picture recording. Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for still picture recording or video.
Remaining Disp.
Displays the remaining number of images that can be recorded on the screen.
Lens Position resume
Sets whether to resume the lens position when resume zooming or not.
Lens Retraction
Sets whether to retract the zoom lens when turning the camera off or not.
Self Timer Auto
Set whether to cancel the self-timer when the unit is turned off.
Face Recog.
Face Recognition is a function on the Panasonic LX100 II which finds a face resembling a registered face and priorities focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the back or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.
On will automatically recognise faces, but you can also register up to six faces yourself.
In this Menu, select an empty frame (or overwrite one).
Take an picture of the face you want to register.
Register this face. Note that you can register up to 3 images per face for more accurate results.
Monitor/ Display Menu page 7 of 7 (monitor and lens behaviour settings)
Profile Setup
If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in advance, you can record their name and age in months and years in the images.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 1 of 4 (General Camera Setup)
Online Manual
Display the URL or QR code to go to the online manual.
Utilize Custom Set feature
The camera lets you record 3 different groups of settings, each of which can be recalled instantly using the Utilize Custom Set Feature option.
Cust. Set Mem.
Up to 5 sets of current camera settings can be registered using C1, C2, C3-1, C3-2 or C3-3. The first three are directly accessible via the Mode Dial.
Saving a custom camera is quite simple, set the mode dial to C1, C2 or C3, change the cameras settings to your preferences, go in the Menu to this setting and press MENU/SET on the screen.
Clock Set
You have already probably set time and date when you first turned on the Panasonic LX100 II, but you can also change this here.
World Time
Sets the times for the region where you live (HOME) and your travel destination (DESTINATION). Time and date will be altered to reflect the local time and date at your travel destination.
Travel Date
If you set Travel Setup, elapsed days of your trip i.e. which day of the trip based on its departure and return dates will be recorded The travel date is automatically canceled if the current date is after the return date.
If you set Location, the name of the travel destination that you enter will be recorded.
Wi-Fi
It’s possible to control your Panasonic LX100 II with a smartphone or a tablet, display pictures on TV, print Wirelessly, Send images to a PC or use Web Services from Panasonic all via WiFi.
To use the Wi-Fi function on this camera, a wireless access point is needed off course.
By default, Wi-Fi is assigned to the Fn6 button when the camera is in Recording Mode, while it is assigned to Fn1 when the camera is in Playback Mode. You can assign it to any button you want.
When you want to connect to WiFi, simply press this button.
Wi-Fi Setup
Priority of Remote Device: Sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during remote recording.
Wi-Fi Password: You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a smartphone.
LUMIX CLUB: Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.
PC Connection: You can set the workgroup. To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is required.
Device Name: You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.
Wi-Fi Function Lock: To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect saved personal information, protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.
Network Address: Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.
Approved Regulations: Displays the certification number for radio regulations.
Bluetooth
You can also connect to your Smartphone, Tablet or TV if your device has the Bluetooth functionality. A function called pairing is needed in order to establish a connection. You’ll find it in this menu, remember to also turn Bluetooth on if you want to do so.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 2 of 4 (General Camera Setup)
Wireless Connection Lamp
This enables/disables the wireless connection lamp.
Beep
This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound. Remember this will be off if you’re in Silent Mode!
Economy
These settings will determine the way the camera handles inactivity on your part to save battery life.
Sleep Mode: The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi): The camera is automatically turned off if it is not connected to a Wi-Fi network and has not been used for 15 minutes (
Auto LVF/ Monitor Off: The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for the time selected on the setting.
Power Save LVF Shooting: If you display the monitor using the viewfinder/monitor automatic switching function, the camera will turn off automatically after being left idle.
Monitor Display Speed
This sets the monitor frame rate to either 30fps or 60fps. 60fps will run smoother at the cost of battery life.
LVF Display Speed
This sets the viewfinder frame rate, to either 30 or 60fps. Again, at 60fps you’ll see movement smoother at the cost of battery life.
Monitor Display
Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the Monitor/viewfinder can be adjusted.
Monitor Luminance
These settings will affect how and when brightness of the monitor is adjusted.
Auto: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is around the camera.
Mode 1: Makes the monitor brighter than normal.
Mode 2: Set the monitor to the standard brightness.
Mode 3: Makes the monitor brighter than standard.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 3 of 4 (General Camera Setup)
USB Mode
Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable.
Select on Connection: Select this setting to select the USB communication system when connecting to another device.
PC Storage: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
PC Tether: Select this setting to control the camera from a PC installed with supported software.
Pictbridge PTP: Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.
TV Connection
Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible TV and monitor connected with this unit using the HDMI cable. It’s possible to set it to Auto or 4K, 1080p, 1080i, etc…
Language
Set the language displayed on the screen.
Version Disp
This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked before an upgrade for instance.
Folder/File Settings
Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.
No.Reset
Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.
Reset
The following settings are reset to the default:
Recording settings.
Setup settings Wi-Fi Setup and Bluetooth settings.
Setup/custom settings (except for Wi-Fi Setup, Bluetooth, Face Recog. and Profile Setup).
Reset Network Settings
The following network settings are reset to the default:
Wi-Fi Setup (Excluding LUMIX CLUB).
Registered device information in Bluetooth and values in Wi-Fi network settings.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 4 of 4 (General Camera Setup)
Level Gauge Assist
Adjust: Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press MENU/SET. The level gauge will be adjusted.
Level Gauge Value Reset: Restores the default level gauge setting.
Demo Mode
A demonstation mode for display in store purposes
Format
Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.
Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary data in advance.
MENU → My Menu (that little man)
My Menu Setting
You can register frequently-used menus and display them in My Menu. You can register up to 23 menus for quick access.
Add: Specifies the menu to be displayed in My Menu to register it.
Sorting: Rearranges the menus displayed in My Menu. Select the menu you want to move and set the destination.
Delete: Deletes registered menus from the displayed menu list.
Display from my menu: Sets the type of the menu screen to be displayed.
MENU → Playback Menu → Page 1 of 3
Slide Show
ou can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronization with music, and you can do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.
You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion pictures, etc.
You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [Effect] or [Setup] on the slide show menu screen.
Playback Mode
Playback in Normal Play, Picture Only or Video Only can be selected.
Protect
You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake.
Rating
You can set five different rating levels for images to do the following:
Delete all the pictures not set as ratings.
Checking the rating level on the file detail display of an operating system, such as Windows 10.
Title Edit
You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be stamped in prints using Text Stamp.
Face Rec Edit
You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.
RAW Processing
You can process the pictures taken in RAW format. The processed pictures will be saved in JPEG format.
White Balance: Allows you to select a White Balance preset and adjust it. If you select an item you can process the image with the setting at the time of recording.
Brightness correction: Allows you to correct the brightness within the range between – 2 EV and +2 EV.
Photo Style: Allows you to select a photo style effect.
i.Dynamic: Allows you to select an i.Dynamic setting.
Contrast: Allows you to adjust the contrast.
Highlight: Allows you to adjust the brightness of bright portions.
Shadow: Allows you to adjust the brightness of dark portions.
Saturation and Color Tone: Allows you to adjust the saturation. (When Monochrome or L.Monochrome is selected in Photo Style, you can adjust the color tone.)
Filter Effect: Allows you to select a filter effect. (Only when Monochrome or L.Monochrome is selected in Photo Style)
Noise Reduction: Allows you to adjust the noise reduction setting.
i.Resolution: Allows you to select an i.Resolution setting.
Sharpness: Allows you to adjust the resolution effect.
4K PHOTO Bulk Saving
You can save pictures of a 4K burst file that were extracted from any 5 second period at once.
MENU → Playback Menu → Page 2 of 3
Light composition
Select multiple frames from 6K/4K burst files that you wish to combine. Parts of the image that are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame to combine the frames into one picture.
Clear Retouch
Remove unwanted objects and such right from the camera menu. The erasure operation can only be performed by touching. Clear Retouch automatically enables the touch operation.
Text Stamp
You can stamp recording information like names, dates, places on recorded images.
Resize
To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail etc., picture size (number of pixels) is reduced.
Cropping
You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.
Rotate
Rotate pictures manually in 90 degree steps.
Video Divide
Recorded motion picture and 6K/4K burst files can be divided in two. It is recommended for when you want to divide a part you need with a part you do not need.
MENU → Playback Menu → Page 3 of 3
Time Lapse Video
This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with Time Lapse Shot.
Stop Motion Video
A Motion picture is created from group pictures taken with Stop Motion Animation.
Rotate Disp.
This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the camera vertically.
Picture Sort
You can set the order in which the camera displays images during playback.Either via file name or date/time.
Delete Confirmation
This sets which option, Yes or No, will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen for deleting a picture is displayed.
Quick access with the Q Menu (Fn 2)
The most commonly used settings can be accessed through what is called the Q Menu. This is the FN2 button that you’ll find right next to the screen, above the trash bucket button.
The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display style the camera is in.
Photo Style
This applies only to Jpeg images, and the RAW preview when you load them into an app like Lightroom.. You can select a colour effect here.
Standard: standard Panasonic colour and contrast rendering.
Vivid: Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
Natural: Soft effect with low contrast.
Monochrome: Monochrome (black and white)effect with no color shades.
L.Monochrome: Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
Scenery: An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
Portrait: An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
Custom 1-4: Make your own presets for easy recall when needed.
As mentioned earlier, it’s possible to create your own Photo Style or customise the preset styles. This is basically a way of hacking into the Jpeg engine and adjusting it to your own style and preferences. There are 6 areas that you can alter.
Contrast: add or decrease the difference between the brightness and the darkness in the picture.
Sharpness: add a degree of sharpness or make your images softer.
Noise Reduction: add noise reduction for high ISO shooting.
Saturation: add more vividness to the colours. Or remove some.
Color Tone: add a blue, orange, red or green filter to your image.
Motion Pic. Set
You can change bitrate and frame-rate for video here, as well as select the appropriate movie container.
Picture Setting
You can quickly change picture size and picture quality here for your Jpeg’s.
These are the aspect ratios available:
4:3: native sensor ratio
3:2: the ratio used in full frame cameras
16:9: for a wider looking view
1:1: Square aspect ratio, mostly used for social sharing
Quality wise, you can choose between Small (S), Medium (M) and Large (L) files sizes. Obviously, Large will have the best quality Jpeg’s, at the expense of larger files. If you only shoot Jpeg (and not RAW) set it to Large. If you shoot both (Jpeg+RAW, see next screen), you could set it to small or medium since you’ll always work with the RAW in post processing. This way, you’ll still have a Jpeg for sharing quickly online or as a reference whilst still saving some space.
Quality
Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.
Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.
Quality
Probably the most important setting is Quality. You can select either Jpeg, where the RAW data from the sensor is processed by an in-camera algorithm to produce a viewable image, or save your images in this RAW format. RAW retains all the data of the sensor, and is meant to be edited afterwards in a desktop application like Lightroom or Luminar. Saving as RAW means that you have much more creative freedom afterwards to push shadows or pull highlights, sharpen and enhance your image in any way you please. A Jpeg retains only a fraction of this information, according to the algorithm inside the camera which might or might not suit your style and/or needs.
Hence, my recommendation is always to shoot RAW or RAW Jpeg. This does mean larger files, but SD cards are inexpensive compared to your beautiful new Lumix. But some photographers prefer to shoot in Jpeg only because they are for instance not interested in post-processing images. In this case, I would set the Jpeg to the highest quality setting.
AF Mode
This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be selected. There are 6 different methods available, each suited for different scenarios.
Face/Eye Detection
A person’s face, eyes, and body (the entire body or the upper half of the body) are automatically detected.
When the camera detects a person’s face or body, an AF area is displayed over the detected person.
Yellow: This is the AF area for the person to be brought into focus. The camera automatically selects the person.
White: These are the AF areas for people other than the person to be brought into focus. This type of AF area is displayed when more than one person is detected.
When a person’s face or eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought into focus, if the eyes are inside the yellow frame.
The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people. To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus, align an AF area with the desired person or eye. You can do so easily by touching a person indicated with an AF area.
Tracking
The camera keeps adjusting the focus and exposure automatically to the specified moving object. Perform either of the following operations to lock the subject to be tracked:
Use a button: aim the AF tracking frame D over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.
Use the touch screen: touch the subject on the screen.
If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear.
The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked and green while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Press the Menu button to cancel the lock.
49 Area
Widest setting with all AF points used. Up to 49 AF areas can be focused. This is effective when your subject is not in the center of the screen.
Custom Multi
From among 49 AF areas, you can freely set the optimum shape of the AF area for the subject.
1-Area
The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the screen.
Pinpoint
You can achieve a more precise focus on a point that is smaller than 1-Area. If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the focus by enlarging it.
Metering Mode
You can change how the light is metered here, and hence how a correct exposure is calculated by the camera. If you feel that the camera takes over- or underexposed images according to your personal preferences, it might be worth changing the metering mode.
Implementation of this is quite basic in this camera, you have a total of only 3 methods to choose from:
Multiple: This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen automatically.
Center weighted: This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
Spot: This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering target.
Exposure Comp
If you feel like your Panasonic LX100 II is over- or underexposing your images (or you want to purposely underexpose), you can dial in what is called exposure compensation here. A range of plus minus 5 is available here to correct the auto exposure of the camera.
ISO sensitivity
Sets the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when you use Auto ISO or i ISO. Lower Limit should be set to 200 and upper limit to 3200, this is the range where you’ll get usable images without too much noise.
Conclusion
I hope you’ve enjoyed the last couple of hours reading through the Panasonic LX100 II menu system as much as I’ve enjoyed writing about it. This is more than just a basic point-and-shoot compact camera, and is packed with interesting customisations and features. Make the most out of your purchase and improve your photography by learning even more about the Panasonic Lumix LX100 II here with pointers, tips and tricks along the way. This information should get you familiarised with this fantastic mirrorless video camera. If you would like any clarification or extra information on any functionality here, let me know through the comment section below. Happy shooting!
The Nikon Z7 uses a new 45.6 megapixel Full-frame sensor as incorporates many of the features and improvements brought in the last years by competitors like Fuji and Olympus. These mirrorless improvements mainly focus on enhanced speed, with now on sensor phase detection AF points and an entirely new processor.
These will definitely make the Nikon Z7 a more useable camera in terms of speed and functionality compared to older models. There are a few changes in the menu system when compared to previous Nikon cameras. We’ll have a page-by-page look at the menus in this post. If you’re looking for a particular feature, I would suggest that you use the search function in your preferred browser, as this post is quite long.
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback.
Note the hints at the bottom of the monitor that tell you which keys have to be used.
Hack: The main advantage of this menu is the option to delete by shooting date.
Playback Folder
If there are several folders on your memory card you can choose here from which folders images will be displayed in playback mode:
Pictures in all folders created with the camera will be visible during playback. Folders can be renamed using the Storage folder > Rename option in the photo shooting menu.
Pictures in all folders of the Nikon Z7 will be visible during playback.
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during playback.
Hack: Ignore. I would not exchange memory cards between cameras without formatting them to reduce the risk of write errors (=loss of pictures!).
Playback Display Options
You can add Focus point info to the playback display here as well as add additional photo info like Exposure Info, Highlights, RGB Histogram, Shooting Data…
Choose the information available in the playback photo information display. Highlight options and press the right arrow to select or deselect; items selected for display during full-frame playback are indicated by v icons. To return to the playback menu, press OK.
Image Review
If you turn this on, each new image will appear automatically on the monitor just after shooting.
On: Pictures appear in the currently-selected display (monitor or viewfinder) as they are taken.
On (monitor only): Pictures are displayed after shooting only when the monitor is used to frame shots. Pictures are not displayed in the viewfinder during shooting.
Off: Pictures can only be viewed by pressing the Play button.
Hack: I prefer to switch off this option because the regular flickering of the monitor is annoying if you leave the camera close to the eye.
After Delete
This menu defines which image will be displayed after you delete one:
Show next (default): The next newer one.
Show previous: The next older one.
Continue as before: The next picture will be displayed if you have scrolled forward before deleting the picture and the previous picture will be displayed if you have scrolled backward before.
Hack: I prefer the last option because I delete images both while browsing forward or backward and then it is nice if the display adapts to the direction you are using.
After Burst, Show
The After burst, show option in the playback menu controls whether the photo displayed at the end of a burst of shots is the first or last in the burst. It takes effect only when Image review is off.
Rotate All
If you switch on this option photos taken in upright format will be rotated during preview.
Slide Show
View a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder. Hidden images are not displayed.
Options:
Start: Start slide show.
Image type: Choose type of image displayed from Still images and movies, Still images only, and Movies only.
Frame interval: Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
Skip back/skip ahead: Press left to return to previous frame, right to skip to next frame.
View additional photo info: Press up or down to change or hide photo info displayed (still images only).
Pause: Press OK to pause the slide show. To restart, highlight Restart and press OK.
Adjust volume: Press magnifier during movie playback to increase volume, mag+flash to decrease.
Exit to playback menu: Press Menu to end the slide show and return to the playback menu.
Exit to playback mode: Press Play to end the slide show and exit to playback mode.
Exit to shooting mode: Press shutter-release button halfway to return to shooting mode.
MENU → Playback Menu → page 2
Rating
Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion. Ratings can also be viewed in View NX-i and Capture NX-D. Rating is not available with protected images.
Procedure:
Select an image: Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail playback.
Display playback options. Press the info button to display playback options.
Select Rating: Highlight Rating and press right.
Choose a rating.Press left or right to choose a rating of from zero to five stars, or select trash can to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion. Press OK to complete the operation.
Hack: If Rating is selected for Custom Setting f1 (Custom control assignment) > Fn2 button, pictures can be rated by keeping the Fn2 button pressed and pressing left or right.
MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 1
Reset Photo Shooting Menu
This menu resets all entries in the shooting menu back to the default values defined by Nikon, the only exception is the entry Storage Folder.
Hack: This menu may be useful if you are new to the Z7 and have played a lot with the settings in this menu.
Storage Folder
This menu defines the folder on the memory card in which new images are stored and allows to create new folders:
Select folder by number: You choose a three digit number and the Z7 will create a folder with this number at the beginning of its name if it does not exist yet. The following five characters „Z7“ cannot be altered.
When you see a folder symbol next to the selected number a folder exists already.
Select folder from list: You choose a folder from a list of existing ones – without the possibility to create new ones.
File Naming
You can replace the three letters „DSC“ which are the default beginning of file names with your own individual combination.
an underscore _ before or after these three letters, depending on which color space you use.
a sequential four digit number.
Choose Image Area
The Nikon Z7 offers a choice of the following image areas:
FX (36 × 24): Images are recorded in FX format with an angle of view equivalent to a lens on a 35 mm format camera.
DX (24 × 16): Images are recorded in DX format. To calculate the approximate focal length of the lens in 35 mm format, multiply by 1.5.
5 : 4 (30 × 24): Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 : 4.
1 : 1 (24×24): Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.
16:9 (36×20): Pictures are recorded with a 16:9 image ratio.
Image Quality
The Nikon Z7 supports the following image quality options:
NEF (RAW): RAW data from the image sensor are saved without additional processing. Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted after shooting.
NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine/NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal/NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic/NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality JPEG image.
JPEG fine/JPEG fine: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).
JPEG normal/JPEG normal: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).
JPEG basic/JPEG basic: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).
TIFF (RGB): Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color). TIFF is supported by a wide variety of imaging applications.
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from Large, Medium, or Small (note that image size varies depending on the option selected for Image area.
FX (36×24; FX format)
Large: 8256 × 5504
Medium: 6192 × 4128
Small: 4128 × 2752
DX (24×16; DX format)
Large 5408 × 3600
Medium 4048 × 2696
Small 2704 × 1800
5 : 4 (30×24)
Large 6880 × 5504
Medium 5152 × 4120
Small 3440 × 2752
1 : 1 (24×24)
Large 5504 × 5504
Medium 4128 × 4128
Small 2752 × 2752
16 : 9 (36×20)
Large 8256 × 4640
Medium 6192 × 3480
Small 4128 × 2320
NEF (RAW) Recording
Choose a compression type and bit depth for NEF (RAW) photos. You can change compression type and bit depth.
NEF (RAW) Compression
Lossless compressed: NEF images are compressed using a reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40% with no effect on image quality.
Compressed: NEF images are compressed using a non-reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about 35–55% with almost no effect on image quality.
Uncompressed: NEF images are not compressed.
NEF (RAW) Bit Depth
12-bit: NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 12 bits.
14-bit: NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits, producing files larger than those with a bit depth of 12 bits but increasing the color data recorded.
Hack: 14 bit uncompressed of course gives the ultimate image quality, but Losless Compressed is so good that is should be used in order to conserve card space. If you’re a portrait or fine art photographer, you should always shoot 14 bit in order to have the maximum color data preserved in your files.
ISO sensitively settings
If the Nikon Z7 decides that it can’t properly expose the image at that ISO given your current aperture and shutter speed, it automatically adjusts ISO as necessary. Turn on the Auto ISO Sensitivity option. The camera will now override your ISO choice when it thinks a proper exposure is not possible with the settings you’ve specified.
If On is selected, the camera will automatically adjust ISO sensitivity when optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the value selected for ISO sensitivity. The options listed below are available for fine-tuning auto ISO sensitivity control.
Maximum sensitivity: Choose an upper limit for ISO sensitivity to prevent it being raised too high.
Maximum sensitivity with c: Choose the upper ISO sensitivity limit for photos taken using an optional flash unit.
Minimum shutter speed: Choose the shutter speed below which auto ISO sensitivity control will kick in to prevent underexposure in modes P and A. Options range from 1/4000 s to 30 s.
MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 2
White Balance
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source. Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If the desired results cannot be achieved with auto white balance, choose an option from the list below or use preset white balance.
Auto
White balance is adjusted automatically for optimal results with most light sources. For best results, use type G, E , D or Z lens. If optional flash fires, results are adjusted appropriately. Color temperature can be viewed in the playback info display after shooting.
Options:
Keep white (reduce warm colors; 3500–8000 K)
Normal (3500–8000 K)
Keep warm lighting colors(3500–8000 K)
Natural light auto
White balance is adjusted for natural light, producing colors closer to those seen by the naked eye. (4500–8000 K)
Direct sunlight
Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight. (5200K)
Cloudy
Use in daylight under overcast skies. (6000 K)
Shade
Use in daylight with subjects in the shade. (8000 K)
Incandescent
Use under incandescent lighting. (3000K)
Fluorescent
Sodium-vapor lamps (2700 K): Sodium-vapor lighting (found in sports venues).
High temp. mercury-vapor (7200 K): High color temperature light sources (e.g. mercury-vapor lamps).
Flash
Use with optional flash units. (5400K)
Choose color temp.
Choose color temperature from list of values. (2500–10,000 K)
Preset manual
Use subject, light source, or existing photograph as reference for white balance
Set Picture Control
Here you can change settings for the internal processing of picture data from the image sensor into final JPG files.
It’s necessary to start with an existing configuration or set of settings that Nikon has predefined for a certain look of the final image. You can choose between:
Auto: Your Nikon Z7 automatically detects the type of scene.
Standard: Nikon‘s default for a neutral picture as the standard for most shooting situations.
Neutral: A processing with slightly less sharpening, contrast improvement and saturation; for those who do these steps on their own later on.
Vivid: Higher color saturation, sharpening and contrast.
Monochrome: Converts into black and white.
Portrait: Very similar to „neutral“, slightly less sharpening, contrast and color saturation than „standard“.
Landscape: Higher contrast than „standard“.
You can modify any of these preset configurations by placing a yellow selection mark in it and use the selector to the right.
The „Quick adjust“ increases or decreases all settings in the direction of the intended picture style and is available for all configurations except „neutral“.
Alternatively you can select and change all detail settings individually:
Sharpening: Increases contrasts at edges which improves the perceived sharpness.
Contrast: Increases or decreases the contrast between light and dark areas.
Brightness: Lightening or Darkening of the whole picture.
Saturation: Changes color saturation for more intense or fainter colors.
Hue: Changes the overall color tone in a slightly complicated manner.
And also two which are available only for the configuration „monochrome“:
Filter effects: Simulates the effect of color filters as they are used in black and white photography to adjust contrast.
Toning: Allows you to choose another dominating color tone than black and white.
Additionally you can create your own configurations by copying, modifying and renaming an existing one.
To do so you need the next menu option Manage Picture Control.
When you change a configuration in the Picture Control and do a Reset
your last chosen configuration will stay selected but any changes in it will be reset.
Hack: An important menu with visible impact on your photos! Only those who shoot in RAW format only and create JPG files on their own in the computer can ignore it.
The „best“ settings are a matter of your personal preferences, in this menu everyone has to find his or her best settings by experience.
On the other hand all of these settings can also be changed afterwards in image processing on the computer, you really have to get them right in the camera if you want to have the best possible results straight out of your Nikon Z7.
The configuration „neutral“ is very similar to „standard“ with slightly less contrast and saturation, the difference is really small.
The sharpening chosen by Nikon is rather weak, I prefer a higher value of 5 or 6.
When looking at your images in the proper magnification (100% zoom on the computer monitor) you will see clearer edges.
„Vivid“ has visibly more intense color and more contrast. That can improve your image but also be too much of a good thing if you have already high contrast (e.g. direct sunlight) and make your picture look unnatural.
I would not set contrast and brightness here and switch on the Active D-Lighting.
Regarding the setting „hue“: Ignore this setting, it is only a slight shift in color for which I do not see any practical relevance.
Result: All the above has brought me to the following settings that I use myself:
One own configuration, created with the next menu option Manage Picture Control, called „standard+sharper“ which is a copy of the configuration „standard“ with sharpening increased to 6.
Another configuration called „sharp+vivid“ which is the same as before plus a saturation increased by two steps.
I use the first one most of the time and switch to the second one occasionally.
Last but not least: Do not overestimate the importance of this menu, most important is still a good subject, light, exposure and
white balance for cooler or wamer color rendition. After all that the „Picture Control“ is for the final touch.
Manage Picture Control
This menu allows you to copy existing Picture Control configurations (see previous menu) and save them with personal adjustments under a new name.
To create your own configuration choose the entry „Save/edit“, pick an existing configuration and press OK. Then you can assign one of nine places in the list of possible customized entries, edit it and choose your own name.
you do not really need an own configuration and can ignore this menu. With the user settings also personal adjustments to a Picture Control will be saved.
If you do change the Picture Control settings regularly it is best to put the most commonly used settings into your own configurations.
Reset will put all Picture Control configurations back to their default settings and you need an own configuration if you do not want to tweak Picture Control each time with your setting details.
Save/edit: Create a new custom Picture Control based on an existing preset or custom Picture Control, or edit existing custom Picture Controls.
Rename: Rename custom Picture Controls.
Delete: Delete custom Picture Controls.
Load/save: Use the following options to copy custom Picture Controls to and from the memory card. Once copied to the memory card, Picture Controls can be used with other cameras or compatible software. (Copy to camera, Delete from card or Copy to card.)
Color Space
You can either choose sRGB or Adobe RGB.
sRGB (default): This is the worldwide standard with 256 levels of brightness for each of the basic colors red, green, blue, for displaying images on computer monitors.
Adobe RGB: A color space developed by Adobe for broader color range of printed images.
As for sRGB all colors will be stored with shares of red, green and blue with 256 levels of gradation, the difference is that the maximum saturations are higher.
The color space is relevant only for creation of JPG-files, not for the RAW format.
Active D-Lighting
„Active D-Lighting“ (ADL) is Nikon‘s name for an additional step in the internal image processing that mainly lightens dark areas of the picture.
It is relevant only for JPG files, not for RAW format.
You can set this to Auto, Extra High, High, Normal, Low or Off.
ADL can also darken too bright areas but lightening dark ones is more frequent and the improvements are more visible there.
You can choose an automatic adjustment that the Nikon Z7 will set stronger or weaker depending on your subject‘s contrast or four steps from low to extra high.
Hack: Turn this ON, set it to Normal, it really helps improve your images!
Long Exposure NR
If this menu option is switched on the Z7 will use an extra step in internal image processing for noise reduction if the exposure time is longer than 1 second.
Hack: switch it Off, it’s better to use advanced image noise reduction on your Mac or PC.
High ISO NR
You can choose if an additional noise reduction shall be applied in the internal image processing for shots with high ISO sensitivity. High, Natural, Low or Off are selectable.
Hack: Turn high ISO NR off, it’s better to use the superior noise reduction of your desktop image editor of choice.
Vignette Control
Vignetting is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph. Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G, E, D and F lenses (PC lenses excluded). So yes it works on adapted lenses with the FTZ adapter too. Its effects vary from lens to lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose from High, Normal, Low, and Off.
Hack: Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, TIFF and JPEG images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral brightness, while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings may not produce the desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor. Vignette control does not apply to movies or multiple exposures.
MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 3
Diffraction Compensation
With digital cameras, if you select a small aperture to increase depth of field when shooting cityscapes or landscapes, it may cause a loss of sharpness across the image due to diffraction. .
Thanks to the new and faster EXPEED 6 processor inside the Nikon Z7, there is a new diffraction compensation function. This helps capture landscapes and cityscapes crisply even when small apertures are used(from f/11 onwards).
Auto Distortion Control
Select On to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting with long lenses (note that the edges of the area visible in the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph, and that the time needed to process photographs before recording begins may increase).
Flicker Reduction Shooting
Reduce banding or (in photos taken in continuous release modes) uneven exposure or coloration caused by the flicker of such light sources as fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps during viewfinder photography.
Hack: Take a test shot and view the results before taking additional photographs. Flicker reduction can detect flicker at 100 and 120 Hz (associated respectively with AC power supplies of 50 and 60 Hz). Flicker may not be detected or the desired results may not be achieved with dark backgrounds, bright light sources, or decorative lighting displays and other non-standard lighting. Depending on the light source, there may be a slight delay before the shutter is released. During burst shooting, the frame rate may slow or become erratic; in addition, the desired results may not be achieved if the frequency of the power supply changes during shooting.
Flicker detection will not take effect at shutter speeds slower than 1/100 s (including Bulb and Time) or when Mup is selected for release mode or exposure delay mode is on.
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The following options are available:
Matrix: Produces natural results in most situations. Camera meters wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and, with type G, E, D or F lenses , distance information (3D color matrix metering III; with other CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering III, which does not include 3D distance information).
Center-weighted: Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area. Classic meter for portraits; recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
Spot: Camera meters circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter (approximately 1.5% of frame). Circle is centered on current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects . Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is much brighter or darker.
Highlight-weighted: Camera assigns greatest weight to highlights. Use to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when photographing spotlit performers on-stage.
Hack: Specifying the focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu allows the camera to use color matrix metering when matrix is selected and improves the accuracy of center-weighted and spot metering.
Flash Control
Choose the flash control mode for optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe and adjust settings for off-camera flash photography.
Flash Control Mode
When an SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 is mounted on the camera, the flash control mode, flash level, and other flash settings can be adjusted using the Flash control > Flash control mode item in the photo shooting menu (in the case of the SB-5000, these settings can also be adjusted using the controls on the flash unit). The options available vary with the flash used, while the options displayed under Flash control mode vary with the mode selected. Settings for other flash units can only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
TTL: i-TTL mode. In the cases of the SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300, flash compensation can be adjusted using the W (M) button.
Auto external flash: In this mode, output is adjusted automatically according to the amount of light reflected by the subject; flash compensation is also available. Auto external flash supports “auto aperture” (qA) and “non-TTL auto” (A) modes; non-TTL auto is selected automatically if a non-CPU lens is attached without specifying the focal length and maximum aperture using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu. See the flash unit manual for details.
Distance-priority manual: Choose the distance to the subject; flash output will be adjusted automatically. Flash compensation is also available.
Manual: Choose the flash level manually.
Repeating flash: The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect. Choose the flash level (Output), the maximum number of times the unit fires (Times), and the number of times the flash fires per second (Frequency, measured in Hertz). The options available for Times vary depending on the options selected for Output and Frequency; see the documentation provided with the flash unit for details.
Wireless Flash Options
Adjust settings for simultaneous wireless control of multiple remote flash units. This option is available only when an SB-5000 or SB-500 flash unit or a WR-R10 wireless remote controller is mounted on the camera.
Optical AWL: The remote flash units are controlled using low-intensity flashes emitted by the master flash. Available only with an SB-5000 or SB-500 mounted on the camera accessory shoe.
Optical/radio AWL: This option is for flash photography using both optically- and radio-controlled flash units. Choose this option when using both a WR-R10 and an SB-500 mounted on the camera accessory shoe. Remote flash control is automatically set to Group flash.
Radio AWL: The remote flash units are controlled by radio signals emitted by a WR-R10 attached to the camera. Available only with the WR-R10 and remote flash units that support radio AWL.
Off: Remote flash photography disabled.
Remote Flash Control
Choose from the following remote flash photography options:
Group flash: hoose a separate flash control mode and flash level for each group of remote flash units. If Optical AWL or Optical/radio AWL is selected for Wireless flash options you can choose the channel used by the master flash to communicate with the remote flash units.
Quick wireless control: Choose for control of overall flash output. Use Quick wireless control options to adjust the balance between groups A and B and set the output for group C manually (the master flash does not fire). You can also adjust flash compensation for groups A and B and, if Optical AWL or Optical/radio AWL is selected for Wireless flash options choose the channel used by the master flash to communicate with the remote flash units
Remote repeating: The flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect. Choose the flash level (Output), the maximum number of times the flash units fire (Times), the number of times the units fire per second (Frequency), and, if Optical AWL or Optical/radio AWL is selected for Wireless flash options, the channel used by the master flash to communicate with the remote flash units. Note that the number of times the flash units fire in total may vary depending on the options selected for Output and Frequency; see the documentation provided with the flash unit for details.
Radio Remote Flash Info
View the flash units currently controlled using radio AWL.
Flash Mode
Some of the flash modes are set on the camera, rather than on the flash. To set most of these modes on a Nikon Z7, you keep the flash button depressed and rotate the main (rear) command wheel to cycle through the modes. The modes appear in the flash frame in the top LCD panel on the camera.
To set Auto FP on a Nikon Z7, you need to go into this menu.
Fill Flash
The flash fires with every shot. In modes P and A, shutter speed will automatically be set to values between 1/200 s (or 1/8000 s with Auto FP High-Speed Sync) and 1/60 s.
Red-eye Reduction Mode
When this mode is activated (indicated by an eye-symbol appearing on both the camera’s top LCD and the flash’s rear LCD), the flash fires three flashes at reduced output just before the picture is taken. This makes the iris of humans and animals contract which reduces the area where the red eye effect can be seen. It also introduces a shutter delay to allow the subject’s irises time to react.
The red-effect only occurs when you use the flash as key light pointing forwards and directly into the subjects eyes.
Slow-sync Flash + red-eye
As for Red-eye reduction except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use when you want to include background lighting in portraits. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake.
Slow-sync Flash
The default shutter speed when using flash is 1/60 second (you can change this default on a Z7 with custom setting #24). The flash will use a faster shutter speed if the ambient light requires it, but will not normally go below 1/60 second in the modes where camera controls the shutter speed.
When slow-sync flash is activated (on a Z7, you set this by pressing the flash button and turning the main command wheel until the word “SLOW” appears on the camera’s top LCD), shutter speeds as low as 30 seconds may be used to obtain the correct exposure for both the main subject in the foreground lit by the flash, and the background, in low-light situations or at night.
For slow shutter speeds, you may need to use a tripod to avoid camera shake.
In the Night Portrait scene mode, slow-sync flash is automatically activated.
Rear curtain Sync
Normally the flash fires at the same time the shutter curtain opens (i.e. front curtain sync). When rear curtain is activated (indicated by the word “REAR” on the camera’s top LCD), the flash fires just before the shutter curtain closes.
Rear curtain sync may be selected when one is shooting fast-moving subjects at slow shutter speeds. With front curtain sync, unnatural-looking pictures can occur because the blurred movement appears to be in front of the subject frozen by the flash. Rear curtain sync creates a picture in which the blur of a moving subject (for example, the taillights of a speeding car) appears behind the frozen subject.
Rear curtain sync automatically enables slow-sync mode, since the only time you should want to use rear sync, is when you also set a slow shutter speed to capture blurred movement.
Using rear curtain sync with shutter speeds faster than 1/30 second is not recommended. Rear curtain sync introduces a delay between the pre-flash and the main flash lasting the length of the exposure. This delay gives most people just enough time to react to the pre-flash. Using rear sync for portraits is a sure way to make your subjects blink or squint.
Rear curtain sync can not be combined with AWL, or with the FP or RPT modes.
A word on Auto FP
(Focal Plane) is a sync mode that let you synchronise flash with higher shutter speeds than the camera’s normal maximum flash synchronisation shutter speed (often called “x-sync speed”).
To use this mode on a Nikon Z7, you need to have a CLS-compatible flash unit connected to the camera’s hot-shoe, and you must enable Auto FP on the camera. Without having Auto FP enabled, the camera will not let you set the shutter speed higher than the x-sync speed when you use a CLS-compatible flash. With Auto FP enabled, you can use any shutter speed.
In FP mode the flash will not fire once, but many times at an extremely rapid rate (typically 50 KHz) which begins with the opening of front curtain of your camera’s focal plane shutter and ends with closing of rear curtain. This permits the correct exposure to be obtained as the travelling slit of a dual curtain shutter passes over the sensor at high-speed.
Note that using FP reduces the maximum power of the flash. The only way to have FP is to illuminate the focal plane curtain, which, depending on the shutter speed, may cover a very large percentage of the focal plane. This means that the higher the shutter speed is above the shutter’s x-sync speed, the smaller the area of film that gets illuminated by each flash.
The table below shows approximately how much the maximum power expressed as guide number GN is reduced when an SB-900 is used in FP mode on a Nikon Z7. It has full power (GN 34, ISO 100/meter) at the X-sync speed (1/200 second), is reduced by -1 EV (half power) at 1/250 second, and then by another -1 EV for each doubling of shutter speed. At 1/4000 second it is reduced by -5 EV, or 1/32 of full power.
Shutter Speed
GN
Power
1/200
34
0 EV
1/1
1/250
22
-1 EV
1/2
1/500
16
-2 EV
1/4
1/1000
11
-3 EV
1/8
1/2000
8
-4 EV
1/16
1/4000
6
-5 EV
1/32
Using FP will reduce the effective GN of the flash when you exceed the x-sync speed. However, it has no effect at speeds lower than the x-sync. It does no harm to have Auto FP permanently enabled.
On a Nikon Speedlight, the FP mode can be activated in the following flash modes: TTL, TTL BL, AA, M and GN. On the Nissin Di866 the FP mode only works in TTL mode.
Note: The FP mode is mainly useful when you want to use large apertures when doing fill flash in bright daylight. The FP mode does not help you freeze motion. Normal flash photography is very good at freezing motion, since a burst of electronic flash is so incredibly brief. When the dominant light on a scene is a very short flash of light it is almost as if you used a very high shutter speed in the thousandths of a second. However when you use FP mode flash, the flash unit pulses the light output over a longer period of time in order to simulate a light being lit for the entire time the shutter travels across the focal plane. Since the flash burst is no longer very short, it becomes more difficult to freeze motion, even with high shutter speeds. And because the FP mode makes you lose so much of the power of the flash, it is not very useful when you want the flash to be the dominant light. For high speed flash photography, you instead use manual mode, and adjust the power ratio to make sure that the flash burst is short enough to “freeze” movement.
High Speed Sync Without Auto FP mode
The Nikon Z7 will sync with most flash units at any shutter speed (i.e. up to 1/4000 second). This is because these models use a CCD sensor that works as an electronic shutter at high shutter speed. A conventional mechanical shutter is only used at shutter speeds below 1/125 second.
For some reason, Nikon has put in a program limitation that will not let you set faster shutter speed than 1/500 second in these models if you mount a flash unit in the camera’s hot-shoe. You can get around this limitation by taping over the two metal contacts on the back of the Speedlight.
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation can be used to adjust the level of the master and remote flash units by from −3 to +1 EV in steps of 1/3 EV. To choose a value for flash compensation, press the magnifying button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel.
When the master flash or a remote flash is set to TTL or Auto and flash compensation to a value other than ±0.0, an icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder and the current value for flash compensation can be viewed by pressing mag. Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
Focus Mode
AF-S (single AF):
Designed for shooting stationary subjects, this mode locks focus when you depress the shutter button halfway. (Think S for still, stationary.) In AF-S mode, the camera insists on achieving focus before it releases the shutter.
If this behavior annoys you, open the Custom Setting menu, choose Autofocus, and then choose AF-S Priority Selection. If you change the setting to Release, the picture is then recorded when you fully depress the shutter button even if focus isn’t yet achieved.
AF-C (continuous AF):
Geared to capturing moving targets, AF-C mode adjusts focus as needed as long as the shutter button is pressed halfway. (Think C for continuous motion.) Remember that a focus-adjustment occurs only if the subject moves closer to or farther from the camera.
If the subject is moving but only shifts a short distance in a horizontal direction, no adjustment is needed because the focusing distance remains the same.
AF-F
The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject movement or changes in composition. Focus locks when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. This option is only available in movie mode.
MF (manual Focus)
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus. Photographs can be taken at any time, even when the image is not in focus.
Hack: To decide which shutter-release option is right for you, consider whether you’d rather have any shot, even if it’s out of focus, or capture only those that are in focus. I prefer the latter, so I set both AF-S and AF-C modes to Focus. Why waste battery power, memory card space, and inevitable time deleting out-of-focus pictures? Yes, if you’re shooting rapid action, you may miss a few shots waiting for the focus to occur — but if they’re going to be lousy shots, who cares? Sports shooters who fire off hundreds of shots while covering an event, though, may want to unlock shutter release for both AF-C and AF-S modes. Again, you may wind up with lots of wasted shots, but you increase the odds that you’ll capture that split-second “highlight reel” moment.
MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 4
AF Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.
Pinpoint AF: Use for pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Single AF is chosen for Focus mode. Focusing may be slower than with single-point AF.
Single-point AF: Select the focus point; the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects. the ability to limit point selection to every other point allows you to quickly use the joystick, or touchscreen, to position the AF point.
Dynamic-area AF: The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points, letting you concentrate on composition in shots of moving subjects. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Continuous AF is chosen for Focus mode.
Wide-area AF (S) and (L): As for Single-point AF except that wider focus points are used. The focus points for Wide-area AF (L) are wider than those for Wide-area AF (S).
Auto-area AF: The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus area. At default settings, the camera gives priority to portrait subjects; if a portrait subject is detected, the selected subject will be indicated by a yellow border (if multiple faces are detected, you can choose your subject using the multi selector). Subject tracking can be activated by pressing the OK button.
A word on Subject tracking:
When Auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode, pressing OK enables focus tracking. The focus point will change to a targeting reticule; position the reticule over the target and either press OK again or press the AF-ON button to start tracking. The focus point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame (in the case of portrait subjects, focus will track the subject’s face). To end tracking, press OK a third time. To exit subject-tracking mode, press the magnifier/question button.
A word on Quick Focus-Point Selection:
or quicker focus-point selection, choose Every other point for Custom Setting a5 (Focus points used) to use only a quarter of the available focus points (the number of points available for Wide-area AF (L) does not change). If you prefer to use the sub-selector for focus-point selection, you can choose Select center focus point for Custom Setting f2 (Custom control assignment) > Sub-selector center to allow the center of the sub-selector to be used to quickly select the center focus point.
The Touch Shutter: Touch controls can be used to focus and release the shutter. Touch the display to focus and lift your finger to release the shutter.
Tap the icon shown in the illustration to choose the operation performed by tapping the display in shooting mode. Choose from the following options:
Touch: Touch the display to position the focus point and focus (autofocus only; the touch shutter cannot be used to focus in manual focus mode). Focus locks while your finger remains on the display; lift your finger to release the shutter. Available only in photo mode.
Touch AF: As above, except that lifting your finger from the display does not release the shutter. If auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode, the camera will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame; to switch to a different subject, tap it in the display.
Off: Touch shutter disabled.
Vibration Reduction
The Nikon Z 7 is equipped with in-camera vibration reduction (VR), other manufacturers call this sensor stabilisation. The VR unit provides compensation for movement along five axes. The effects of vibration reduction are equivalent to a shutter speed up to approximately 5.0 stops. This function can also be used effectively with NIKKOR F lenses, including those not equipped with a VR function, with the Mount Adapter FTZ . To use the Vibration reduction function of a non-CPU lens, set the focal length in “Non-CPU lens data” in the SETUP MENU (see later).
There is an ON (normal) and SPT (Sport) preset.
Vibration reduction may be unavailable with some lenses. When using vibration reduction, wait for the image in the display to stabilize before shooting. With some lenses, the image in the display may also jiggle after the shutter is released; this is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
Sport or On is recommended for panning shots. In Sport, Normal, and On modes, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake).
To prevent unintended results, select Off when the camera is mounted on a tripod unless the tripod head is unsecured or the camera is mounted on a monopod, in which case Normal, Sport, or On is recommended.
Auto Bracketing
Vary exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Bracketing can be used in situations in which getting the right settings is difficult and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject. The following options are available:
Auto bracketing set: Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing is in effect. Choose AE & flash bracketing to perform both exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE bracketing to bracket only exposure, Flash bracketing to perform only flash-level bracketing, WB bracketing to perform white-balance bracketing, or ADL bracketing to perform bracketing using Active D-Lighting.
Number of shots: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
Increment: Choose the amount the selected settings vary with each shot (ADL bracketing excluded).
Amount: Choose how Active D-Lighting varies with each shot (ADL bracketing only).
Multiple Exposure
Record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph.
Multiple exposure mode
On (series): Take a series of multiple exposures. Select Off to resume normal shooting.
On (single photo): Take one multiple exposure.
Off: Exit without creating additional multiple exposures.
Number of shotsChoose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph.Overlay mode
Add: The exposures are overlaid without modification; gain is not adjusted.
Average: Before the exposures are overlaid, the gain for each is divided by the total number of exposures taken (gain for each exposure is set to 1/2 for 2 exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures, etc).
Lighten: The camera compares the pixels in each exposure and uses only the brightest.
HDR (High Dynamic Range)
Used with high contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR) preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at different exposures.
HDR mode:
On (series): Take a series of HDR photographs. Select Off to resume normal shooting.
On (single photo): Take one HDR photograph.
Off: Exit without taking additional HDR photographs.
Exposure differential: Choose the difference in exposure between the two shots that are combined to make an HDR photograph. Choose larger values for high-contrast subjects, or select Auto to let the camera adjust the exposure differential according to the scene.
Smoothing: Choose how much to smooth the boundaries between the shots that make up each HDR photograph.
Interval Timer Shooting
Take photographs at the selected interval until the specified number of shots has been recorded. Select a release mode other than self-timer (E) when using the interval timer.
Start: Start interval timer shooting, either after 3 s (Now selected for Choose start day/time) or at a selected date and time (Choose day/time). Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken.
Choose start day/time: Choose a start option. To start shooting immediately, select Now. To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select Choose day/time.
Interval: Choose the interval (hours, minutes, and seconds) between shots.
Intervals×shots/interval: Choose the number of intervals and the number of shots per interval.
Exposure smoothing: Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match previous shot in exposure modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval between shots.
Silent photography: Select On to silence the shutter during shooting.
Interval priority: Choose whether the camera gives priority to exposure time or interval timing in exposure modes P and A. Select On to ensure photos are taken at the chosen interval, Off to ensure that photos are correctly exposed. If On is selected, be sure the Minimum shutter speed chosen for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu is faster than the interval. You should also focus using manual focus or, if you are using autofocus, choose Release for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection) or Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection) according to whether AF-C or AF-S is selected.
Starting storage folder: Highlight either of the following options and press 2 to select or deselect: New folder: A new folder is created for each new sequence or Reset file numbering: File numbering is reset to 0001 whenever a new folder is created.
Time-Lapse Movie
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to create a silent time-lapse movie.
Start: Start time-lapse recording. Shooting starts after about 3 s and continues at the selected interval for the selected shooting time.
Interval: Choose the interval between shots in minutes and seconds.
Shooting time: Choose the shooting time (hours and minutes).
Exposure smoothing: Selecting On smooths abrupt changes in exposure in exposure modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval between shots.
Silent photography: Select On to silence the shutter during shooting.
Image area: Choose an image area for time-lapse recording. The options are those for the Image area item in the movie shooting menu.
Frame size/frame rate: Choose the frame size and rate for the final movie. The options are those for the Frame size/frame rate item in the movie shooting menu.
Interval priority: Choose whether the camera gives priority to exposure time or interval timing in exposure modes P and A. Select On to ensure frames are taken at the chosen interval, Off to ensure that frames are correctly exposed. If On is selected, be sure the Minimum shutter speed chosen for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu is faster than the interval. You should also focus using manual focus or, if you are using autofocus, choose Release for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection,) or Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection) according to whether AF-C or AF-S is selected.
Focus Shift Shooting
During focus shift, the camera automatically varies focus over a series of photographs. This feature can be used to take photos that will later be combined using focus stacking. Before using focus shift, rotate the focus mode selector to AF and choose a release mode other than timer.
Start: Start shooting. Shooting will take the selected number of shots, changing the focus distance by the selected amount with each shot.
No. of shots: Choose the number of shots (maximum 300).
Focus step width: Choose the amount the focus distance changes with each shot.
Interval until next shot: Choose the interval between shots. Select 00 to take photos at approximately 5 fps (release modes S, Cl, Ch, and Mup) or 3 fps (release modes Q and Qc). To ensure the correct exposure when using a flash, choose an interval long enough for the flash to charge.
Exposure smoothing: Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match previous shot in exposure modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval between shots.
Peaking Stack Image: During Focus Shift Photography, combine the peaking information from each frame into a single image to display during playback.
Silent photography: Select On to silence the shutter during shooting.
Starting storage folder: Highlight either of the following options and press 2 to select or deselect: New folder: A new folder is created for each new sequence. or Reset file numbering: File numbering is reset to 0001 whenever a new folder is created.
MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 5
Silent Photography
Select On to reduce vibrations caused by the shutter when shooting landscapes and other static subjects. Use of a tripod is recommended. The flash and long exposure noise reduction are disabled, as are the electronic front-curtain shutter and beep speaker, regardless of the options selected for Custom Setting d5 (Shutter type) and for Beep options in the setup menu. In continuous release modes, the frame advance rate will change.
Enabling silent photography changes the frame advance rates for continuous release modes and disables some features, including the flash, beep speaker, long exposure noise reduction, and the electronic front-curtain shutter.
Although the noise of the mechanical shutter is muted, other sounds may still be audible, for example during autofocus or if the Menu or Play button is pressed when an option other than Off is selected for Vibration reduction. During silent photography, flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the display and in the final picture under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or with subjects that are in motion, particularly if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves horizontally at high speed through the frame. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots may also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear in some areas of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source.
MENU → Movie Shooting Menu → page 1
Reset Movie Shooting Menu
In case of trouble or unexpected behaviour, highlight Yes and press OK to restore movie shooting menu options to their default values.
File Naming
Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the image files in which movies are stored. The default prefix is “DSC”.
Choose Image Area
Choose the image area for movies.
Hack: Auto DX Crop: If On is selected, movies shot using a DX lens will automatically be recorded using the DX (DX-based movie format) image area.
Frame Size/Frame Rate
Choose the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate.
4K UHD (max 29 minutes 59 seconds recording time)
2160 30p: 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 30p 144 Mbps
2160 25p: 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 25p 144 Mbps
2160 24p: 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 24p 144 Mbps
HD (max 29 minutes 59 seconds recording time)
1080 120p: 1920 x 1080 120p; 144 Mbps
1080 100p: 1920 x 1080 100p; 144 Mbps
1080 60p: 1920 x 1080 60p; 56 Mbps
1080 50p: 1920 x 1080 50p; 56 Mbps
1080 25p: 1920 x 1080 25p; 28 Mbps
1080 24p: 1920 x 1080 24p; 28 Mbps
Slow-Mo (max 3 minute recording time)
1080 30p x 4: 1920 x 1080; 30p x 4 (slow-mo) 36 Mbps
1080 25p x 4: 1920 x 1080; 25p x 4 (slow-mo) 36 Mbps
1080 24p x 4: 1920 x 1080; 24p x 5 (slow-mo) 29 Mbps
Movie Quality
You can choose from High quality and Normal.
Movie File Type
Choose the file format for movies from MOV and MP4.
Hack: MP4 is superior!
ISO Sensitivity Settings
You can adjust the following ISO sensitivity settings:
Maximum sensitivity: Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control from values between ISO 200 and Hi 2. Auto ISO sensitivity control is used in modes P, S, and A and when On is selected for Auto ISO control (mode M) in mode M.
Auto ISO control (mode M): Select On to enable auto ISO sensitivity control in mode M, Off to use the value selected for ISO sensitivity (mode M).
ISO sensitivity (mode M): Choose the ISO sensitivity for mode M from values between ISO 64 and Hi 2. Auto ISO sensitivity control is used in other modes.
Hack: At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing and noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may increase. This can be prevented by choosing a lower value for the ISO Maximum sensitivity.
White Balance
Choose the white balance for movies (same choices as for the Photo Settings)
MENU → Movie Shooting Menu → page 2
Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control for movies. You’ll also find the Creative Picture Control settings here. You can find presets like Dream, Morning, Pop, Sunday, Sober, Dramatic, Silence, Bleached, Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red, Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary and Carbon. These can off course be edited too.
Manage Picture Control
You can create custom Picture Controls here. (again same procedure as for photos)
Active D-Lighting
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating movies with natural contrast. Select Same as photo settings to use the option currently selected for photos.
Options are Auto, Extra High, High, Normal, Low or Off.
High ISO NR
Reduce “noise” (what Nikon calls randomly-spaced bright pixels) in movies recorded at high ISO sensitivities
Vignette Control
reduce shading or lens vignetting automatically using this function.
Diffraction Compensation
Same as for stills, the Nikon Z7 can automatically reduce the loss of sharpness due to diffraction when lenses are used with an aperture above f/11.
Auto Distortion Control
Select On as required to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting with long lenses (note that Off may not be available with some lenses).
Flicker Reduction
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting movies under fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting. Choose Auto to allow the camera to automatically choose the correct frequency, or manually match the frequency to that of the local AC power supply.
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in which case you should try choosing a smaller aperture (higher f-number). To prevent flicker, select mode M and choose a shutter speed adapted to the frequency of the local power supply: 1/125 s, 1/60 s, or 1/30 s for 60 Hz; 1/100 s, 1/50 s, or 1/25 s for 50 Hz.
MENU → Movie Shooting Menu → page 3
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The same options as in the Photo Menu are available.
Matrix metering: The camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and distance for results close to those seen by the naked eye.
Center-weighted metering: The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to an area in the center of the frame, the size of which can be chosen using Custom Setting b3 (Center-weighted area). This is the classic meter for portraits and is also recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
Spot metering: The camera meters a ⌀4 mm circle (equivalent to approximately 1.5% of the frame) centered on the current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if auto-area AF is in effect, the camera will instead meter the center focus point). Spot metering ensures that the subject will be correctly exposed, even when the background is much brighter or darker.
Highlight-weighted metering: The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights. Use this option to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when photographing spotlit performers on-stage.
Focus Mode
At default settings, the focus mode can also be selected by holding the Fn2 button and rotating the main command dial.
AF-S: For stationary subjects. Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in green; focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point will flash red. At default settings, the shutter can only be released if the camera is able to focus (focus priority).
AF-C: For moving subjects. The camera focuses continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if the subject moves, the camera will predict the final distance to the subject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings, the shutter can be released whether or not the subject is in focus (release priority).
AF-F: The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject movement or changes in composition. Focus locks when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. This option is only available in movie mode.
Manual focus: The shutter can be released whether or not the subject is in focus.
AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode controls how the camera selects the focus-point for autofocus.
AF-area mode can also be selected by holding the Fn2 button and rotating the sub-command dial.
Pinpoint AF: Use for pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Single AF is chosen for Focus mode. Focusing may be slower than with single-point AF.
Single-point AF: The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. Use with stationary subjects.
Dynamic-area AF: The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points, letting you concentrate on composition in shots of moving subjects. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Continuous AF is chosen for Focus mode.
Wide-area AF (S or L): As for Single-point AF except that wider focus points are used. The focus points for Wide-area AF (L) are wider than those for Wide-area AF (S).
Auto-area AF: The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus area. At default settings, the camera gives priority to portrait subjects; if a portrait subject is detected, the selected subject will be indicated by a yellow border (if multiple faces are detected, you can choose your subject using the multi selector). Subject tracking can be activated by pressing the OK button.
Hack: For quicker focus-point selection, choose Every other point for Custom Setting a5 (Focus points used) to use only a quarter of the available focus points (the number of points available for Wide-area AF (L) does not change). If you prefer to use the sub-selector for focus-point selection, you can choose Select center focus point for Custom Setting f2 (Custom control assignment) > Sub-selector center to allow the center of the sub-selector to be used to quickly select the center focus point.
Subject Tracking: When Auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode, pressing OK enables focus tracking. The focus point will change to a targeting reticule; position the reticule over the target and either press OK again or press the AF-ON button to start tracking. The focus point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame (in the case of portrait subjects, focus will track the subject’s face). To end tracking, press J a third time. To exit subject-tracking mode, press the mag/question button.
Vibration Reduction
Identical to the Photo Menu again. Only needed when your lens does not have a VR switch. If your lens does have a VR switch, turning it of will turn off both lens and sensor stabilisation.
Electronic VR
Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction in movie mode.
Microphone Sensitivity
Turn the built-in or external microphones on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust sensitivity automatically, Microphone off to turn sound recording off; to select microphone sensitivity manually, select Manual sensitivity and choose a sensitivity.
Attenuator
Select Enable to reduce microphone gain and prevent audio distortion when recording movies in loud environments.
Frequency Response
If Wide range is selected, the built-in and external microphones will respond to a wide range of frequencies, from music to the bustling hum of a city street. Choose Vocal range to bring out human voices.
MENU → Movie Shooting Menu → page 4
Wind Noise Reduction
Select On to enable the low-cut filter for the built-in microphone (optional stereo microphones are unaffected), reducing noise produced by wind blowing over the microphone (note that other sounds may also be affected). Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo microphones that support this feature can be enabled or disabled using microphone controls.
Headphone Volume
Adjust the headphone volume here.
Time Code
The Nikon Z7 is quite a capable video cam. It’s possible to write time code to the movie files for alignment in software later.
Record Timecodes
On: Time codes are recorded and appear in the display.
On (with HDMI output): Time codes will be included with footage saved to Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, or SUMO-series Monitor recorders connected via an HDMI cable.
Off: Time codes are not recorded.
Count-Up Method:
Record run: Time codes are incremented only while recording is in progress.
Free run: Time codes are incremented continuously, including while the camera is off.
Timecode origin:
Reset: Reset the time code to 00:00:00.00.
Enter manually: Enter the hour, minute, second, and frame number manually.
Current time: Set the time code to the current time as provided by the camera clock.
Drop Frame:
Select On to compensate for discrepancies between the frame count and the actual recording time at frame rates of 30 and 60 fps.
MENU → Custom Setting Menu → page 1
Reset Custom Settings
Resets all Custom settings to the factory settings.
Autofocus Settings
a1 AF-C Priority Selection
When AF-C is selected for photography, this option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).
Release: Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed.
Focus: Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus.
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when AF-C is selected for autofocus mode. The camera will continue to adjust focus until the shutter is released.
a2 AF-S Priority Selection
When AF-S is selected for photography, this option controls whether photographs can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus priority) or whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority).
Release: Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed.
Focus: Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator is displayed.
Regardless of the option selected, if the in-focus indicator is displayed when AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus lock continues until the shutter is released.
a3 Focus Tracking with Lock-on
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to changes in the distance to the subject when AF-C is selected during viewfinder photography.
Choose from values between 5 (Delayed)and 1 (Quick). The higher the value, the slower the response and the less likely you are to lose focus on your original subject. The lower the value, the quicker the response and the easier it is to shift focus to objects crossing your field of view. Note that 2 and 1 (Quick) are equivalent to 3 when auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
a4 Auto-Area AF Face Detection
Choose whether the camera detects and focuses on faces when Auto Area is selected for AF-area mode. Since firmware version 2, this also includes Eye detection.You now how the option to turn both face and eye detection on, only face detection on, or both off. Eye detection does not work during movie mode. Turn both on for portraits. You need to set the camera to AF-S or AF-C as Focus Mode if you want to use Eye AF as well as Auto Area AF for AF-area Mode.
a5 Focus Points Used
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-point selection.
All: Every focus point available in the current AF-area mode can be selected.
1/2: The number of available focus points is reduced by three quarters (the number of focus points available in Wide-area AF (L) mode does not change). Use for quick focus-point selection.
a6 Store Points by Orientation
Choose whether separate focus points can be selected for “wide” (landscape) orientation, for “tall” (portrait) orientation with the camera rotated 90° clockwise, and for “tall” orientation with the camera rotated 90° counterclockwise.
Select NO to use the same focus point and AF-area mode regardless of camera orientation.
Choose YES to enable separate focus-point selection, or Focus point and AF-area mode to enable separate selection of both the focus point and the AF-area mode.
a7 AF Activation
Choose whether the shutter-release button can be used to focus (Shutter/AF-ON) or if focus can only be adjusted using the AF-ON button or other controls to which AF-ON has been assigned (AF-ON only).
a8 Limit AF-area mode Selection
Choose the options that can be selected by rotating the sub-command dial when AF-area mode is assigned to the i menu or a camera control. Highlight the desired modes and press right to select or deselect. Press OK to save changes when settings are complete.
a9 Focus Point Wrap-Around
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of the viewfinder to another.
Wrap: Focus-point selection “wraps around” from top to bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left to right, so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted (1) selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display 2).-
No wrap: The focus-point display is bounded by the outermost focus points so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected has no effect.
a10 Focus Point Options
Choose from the following focus point display options:
Manual focus mode: Choose On to display the active focus point in manual focus mode, Off to display the focus point only during focus point selection.
Dynamic-area AF assist: If On is selected, both the selected focus point and the surrounding focus points will be displayed in dynamic-area AF mode. Choose Off to display only the selected focus point.
a11 Low Light AF
Autofocus is achievable with the Nikon Z7 down to -4EV provided low-light autofocus is activated. only works in Single AF!!!
Choose On for more accurate focus under low-light conditions when AF-S is selected for focus mode, but note that camera may require more time to focus. This option takes effect only in photo mode when a setting other than Auto is chosen with the mode dial. While low-light AF is in effect, “Low-light” will appear in the display and the display refresh rate may drop.
Hack: This slows down autofocus for general photography, so it should be disabled except for focussing in really low light.
a12 Built-In AF-Assist Illuminator
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor.
On: The illuminator lights as required (AF-S focus mode only).
Off: The illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation. The camera may not be able to focus when lighting is poor.
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 1–3 m (3 ft 4 in.–9 ft 10 in.); when using the illuminator, remove the lens hood. Do not obstruct the AF-assist illuminator while it is lit.
a13 Manual Focus Ring In AF Mode
Choose whether the lens focus ring can be used for manual focus in autofocus mode.
Enable: Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens focus ring while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (autofocus with manual override). To refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from the shutter-release button and then press it halfway again.
Disable: The lens focus ring cannot be used for manual focus while autofocus mode is selected.
Metering/Exposure Settings
b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl
Select the increments used for adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, ISO sensitivity, bracketing, and exposure and flash compensation.
b2 Easy exposure compensation
This option controls whether the plus/minus button is needed to set exposure compensation. If On (Auto reset) or On is selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure display will flash even when exposure compensation is set to ±0.
On (Auto reset): In modes P, S, and A, exposure compensation can be set by rotating the command dial not currently used for shutter speed or aperture (easy exposure compensation is not available in mode M). The setting selected using the command dial is reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires.
On: As above, except that the exposure compensation value selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires.
Off: Exposure compensation is set by pressing the plus/minus button and rotating the main command dial.
b3 Center-weighted area
Choose the size of the area given the most weight in center-weighted metering.
b4 Fine-Tune optimal exposure
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the camera. Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each metering method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV.
Remember that the exposure compensation icon is not displayed when exposure fine-tuning is in effect. The only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-tuning menu.
Timers/AE Lock Settings
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L
Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release button is pressed.
On (half press): Pressing the shutter-release button halfway locks exposure.
On (burst mode): Exposure only locks while the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.
Off: Pressing the shutter-release button does not lock exposure.
c2 Self-timer
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of shots taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.
Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
Number of shots: Press up and down to choose the number of shots taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
Interval between shots: Choose the interval between shots when the Number of shots is more than 1.
c3 Power off delay
Choose how long the monitor remains on when no operations are performed during playback (Playback; defaults to 10 seconds) and image review (Image review; defaults to 4 seconds), when menus (Menus; defaults to 1 minute) or information (Information display; defaults to 10 s) are displayed, or during live view and movie recording (Live view; defaults to 10 minutes). Choose a shorter monitor-off delay for longer battery life.
Shooting/display Settings
d1 CL mode shooting speed
Choose the frame advance rate for low-speed continuous release mode.
d2 Max. continuous release
he maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous release modes can be set to any value between 1 and 200. Note that regardless of the option selected, there is no limit to the number of photos that can be taken in a single burst when a shutter speed of 4 s or slower is selected in mode S or M.
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d2, shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills.
d3 Sync. Release mode options
Choose whether the shutters on the remote cameras are synchronized with the shutter on the master camera when using an optional wireless remote controller in synchronized release mode.
d4 Exposure delay mode
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, shutter release can be delayed by from about 0.2 to 3 seconds after the shutter is engaged.
d5 Shutter type (used to be Electronic front-curtain shutter in pre version 2 firmware)
You have the choice of Auto, Mechanical shutter, and Electronic front-curtain shutter. If Auto is selected, the camera will automatically choose a shutter type according to shutter speed.
The fastest shutter speed and maximum ISO sensitivity available with the electronic front-curtain shutter are 1/2000 s and ISO 25600, respectively.
d6 Limit selectable image area
Choose the options available when image-area selection is assigned to the i menu or to the command dials and a camera control. Highlight the desired options and press the right arrow to select or deselect. Press OK to save changes when settings are complete.
d7 File number sequence
When a picture is taken, the camera names the file by adding one to the last file number used. This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera.
On: When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.
Off: File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder is created automatically if a picture is taken when the current folder contains 5000 pictures.
Reset: Same as for On, except that the next picture taken is assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder. If the folder is empty, file numbering is reset to 0001.
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 5000 pictures or a picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release button will be disabled and no further pictures can be taken (in addition, movie recording may be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of files needed to record a movie of the maximum length would result in the folder containing over 5000 files or a file with a number over 9999). Choose Reset for Custom Setting d7 (File number sequence) and then either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.
d8 Apply settings to live view
Choose On to preview how changes to such settings as white balance, Picture Controls, and exposure compensation affect color and brightness in photo mode, or select Off to adjust brightness and hue for ease of viewing (regardless of the option selected, the effects of the aforementioned settings are always visible in movie mode).
d9 Framing grid display
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for reference when composing photos.
d10 Peaking highlights
When focus peaking is enabled in manual focus mode, objects that are in focus are indicated by colored outlines in the display. Choose the peaking level and outline color.
Peaking level: Choose from 3 (high sensitivity), 2 (standard), 1 (low sensitivity), and Off; the higher the value, the greater the depth that will be shown as being in focus.
Peaking highlight color: Choose the highlight color.
d11 View all in continuous mode
Choose whether image review is available during burst shooting. If Off is selected, not only the monitor but also the monitor backlight will turn off during exposures.
Bracketing/Flash Settings
e1 Flash Sync Speed
This option controls flash sync speed.
1/250 s (Auto FP): Auto FP high-speed sync is enabled with compatible flash units and the maximum sync speed for other flash units is set to 1/200 s. When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1/200 s in mode P or A, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1/200 s, and shutter speeds as fast as 1/8000 s can be selected by the camera (modes Pand A) or by the user (modes S and M).
1/250 s–1/60 s: Flash sync speed set to selected value.
Hack: Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit: To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or manual exposure modes, select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed (30 s or %). An X (flash sync indicator) will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel together with the flash sync speed.
Hack: Auto FP High-Speed Sync: Auto FP high-speed sync allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright sunlight. The information display flash mode indicator shows “FP” when auto FP high-speed sync is active.
e2 Flash Shutter Speed
Choose the slowest shutter speed available when front- or rear-curtain sync or red-eye reduction is used in mode P or A (regardless of the setting chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in modes S and M or at flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction with slow sync).
e3 Exposure comp. for flash
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure compensation is used.
Entire frame: Both flash level and exposure compensation are adjusted to modify exposure over the entire frame.
Background only: Exposure compensation applies to background only.
e4 Auto ISO sensitivity control (with flash)
Choose the reference used to set exposure when a flash is used with auto ISO sensitivity control.
Subject and background: The camera takes both the main subject and background lighting into account when adjusting ISO sensitivity.
Subject only: ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the main subject is correctly exposed.
e 5 Modeling Flash
If On is selected when the camera is used with an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting system, pressing the button to which Preview has been assigned using Custom Setting f2 (Custom control assignment) emits a modeling flash that can be used to preview the effects of flash lighting. No modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected.
e6 Auto bracketing (mode M)
This option determines which settings are affected when AE & flash bracketing or AE bracketing is selected for the Auto bracketing set option in the photo shooting menu in manual exposure mode.
Flash/speed: Camera varies shutter speed (AE bracketing) or shutter speed and flash level (AE & flash bracketing).
Flash/speed/aperture: Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (AE bracketing) or shutter speed, aperture, and flash level (AE & flash bracketing).
Flash/aperture: Camera varies aperture (AE bracketing) or aperture and flash level (AE & flash bracketing).
Flash only:Camera varies flash level only (AE & flash bracketing).
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or qA (auto aperture) flash control. If a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used, ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot when auto ISO sensitivity control is on.
e7 Bracketing order
At the default setting of MTR > under > over, exposure, flash, and white balance bracketing are performed in the following order: the unmodified shot is taken first, followed by the shot with the lowest value, followed by the shot with the highest value. If Under > MTR > over (plus to minus) is selected, shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value. This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.
Controls Settings
f1 Customize i menu
Customise the appearance of the i Menu. What’s included and what not.
Split-Screen Display Zoom: When assigned to the i menu, Split-screen display zoom can be used to split the display into two boxes showing separate areas of the frame side-by-side at a high zoom ratio. The positions of the magnified areas are shown in the navigation window, making it easier to check focus at two different locations when photographing a building or other wide object situated at right angles to the camera.
f2 Custom control assignment
Choose the functions assigned to camera controls, whether used individually or in combination with the command dials.
f3 OK button
Customise the functionality if the OK button.
Shooting mode: Choose from the options below. Regardless of the option selected, the OK button can be used for focus tracking when auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
Select center focus point: Pressing OK selects the center focus point.
Zoom on/off: Press OK to zoom the display in on the area around the current focus point (to choose the zoom ratio, highlight Zoom on/off and press right).
None: Pressing J during shooting has no effect.
Playback mode: Choose from the options below. Regardless of the option selected, pressing OK when a movie is displayed full frame starts movie playback.
Thumbnail on/off: Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail playback.
View histograms: In both full-frame and thumbnail playback, a histogram is displayed while the OK button is pressed.
Zoom on/off: Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback and playback zoom (to choose the zoom ratio, highlight Zoom on/off and press right). The zoom display is centered on the active focus point.
Choose folder: A folder-selection dialog will be displayed; highlight a folder and press OK to view the pictures in the selected folder.
f4 Shutter Spd & aperture lock
Selecting On for Shutter speed lock locks shutter speed at the value currently selected in mode S or M. Selecting On for Aperture lock locks aperture at the value currently selected in mode A or M. Shutter speed and aperture lock are not available in mode P.
f5 Customize command dials
This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command dials.
Reverse rotation: Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dials for selected operations. Highlight options and press right to select or deselect, and then press OK to save changes and exit.
Change main/sub: Choose the roles played by the command dials for exposure and focus operations.
Exposure setting: If On is selected, the main command dial will control aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed. If On (Mode A) is selected, the main command dial will be used to set aperture in mode A only.
Autofocus setting: This option applies to the control assigned Focus mode/AF-area mode using Custom Setting f2 (Custom control assignment). If On is selected, the focus mode can be chosen by keeping the control pressed and rotating the sub-command dial, AF-area mode by keeping the AF-mode button pressed and rotating the main command dial.
Menus and playback: Select Off to use the multi selector for menus and playback. If On or On (image review excluded) is selected, the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback and to highlight thumbnails and menu items. The sub-command dial is used in full-frame playback to skip forward or back according to the option selected for Sub-dial frame advance and in thumbnail playback to page up or down. While menus are displayed, rotating the sub-command dial right displays the sub-menu for the highlighted option, while rotating it left displays the previous menu. To make a selection, press 2 or J. Select On (image review excluded) to prevent the command dials from being used for playback during image review.
Sub-dial frame advance: When On or On (image review excluded) is selected for Menus and playback, the sub-command dial can be rotated during full-frame playback to select a folder, to skip forward or back 10 or 50 frames at a time, or to skip to the next or previous protected picture, the next or previous photo, the next or previous movie, or the next or previous picture with a selected rating (to choose the rating, highlight Rating and press right).
f6 Release Button to use dial
Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released. This setting applies to the plus/minus, ISO, and timer buttons and also to controls to which the following roles have been assigned using Custom Settings f2 or g2 (Custom control assignment): Choose image area, Image quality/size, White balance, Set Picture Control, Active D-Lighting, Metering, Flash mode/compensation, Focus mode/AF-area mode, Auto bracketing, Multiple exposure, HDR (high dynamic range), Exposure delay mode, Shutter spd & aperture lock, Peaking highlights, Choose non-CPU lens number, and Microphone sensitivity.
f7 Reverse indicators
If (-0+) is selected, the exposure indicators in the control panel, viewfinder, and information display are displayed with negative values on the left and positive values on the right. Select (-0+) to display positive values on the left and negative values on the right.
Movie Settings
g1 Customize i Menu
Choose the functions assigned to camera controls, whether used individually or in combination with the command dials, when you press i.
g2 Custom control assignment
Assign the custom controls for operation when in movie mode. Power aperture is available only in modes A and M. The display may flicker while aperture is adjusted.
g3 OK button
Choose the role assigned to the J button in movie mode. Regardless of the option selected, the OK button can be used for focus tracking when auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
Select center focus point: Pressing OK selects the center focus point.
Zoom on/off: Press OK to zoom the display in on the area around the current focus point (to choose the zoom ratio, highlight Zoom on/off and press right).
Record movies: Press OK to start and stop movie recording.
None: Pressing OK has no effect.
g4 AF Speed
Change the speed of the autofocus for movie mode. o choose when the selected option applies, highlight When to apply and press right. Choose from Always (the selected option applies whenever the camera is in movie mode) and Only while recording (the selected option applies only while recording is in progress; at other times, the focus speed is “+5”, or in other words as fast possible).
g5 AF tracking sensitivity
Choose how quickly focus responds when your subject leaves the focus point or something passes between the subject and the camera in movie mode. Choose from values between 7 (Low) and 1 (High). The higher the value, the slower the response and the less likely you are to lose focus on your original subject when something passes between the subject and the camera. The lower the value, the quicker the camera is to respond to the subject leaving the focus area by shifting focus to a new subject in the same area.
g6 Highlight display
Choose whether shading is used to indicate highlights (bright areas of the frame) and select the level of brightness needed to trigger the highlight display.
Display pattern: To enable the highlight display, select Pattern 1 or Pattern 2.
Highlight display threshold: Choose the brightness needed to trigger the movie highlight display. The lower the value, the greater the range of brightnesses that will be shown as highlights. If 255 is selected, the highlight display will show only areas that are potentially overexposed.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 1
Format Memory Card
To begin formatting, choose a memory card slot and select Yes. Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card in the selected slot. Before formatting, be sure to make backup copies as required.
Save User Settings
Frequently-used combinations of settings can be assigned to the U1, U2, and U3 positions on the mode dial.
Follow the steps below to save settings:
Select a mode: Rotate the mode dial to the desired mode.
Adjust settings: Choose a focus point and make the desired adjustments to flexible program (mode P), shutter speed (modes S and M), exposure and flash compensation, aperture (modes A and M), and settings in the photo shooting, movie shooting, and Custom Settings menus.
Select Save user settings: Highlight Save user settings in the setup menu and press 2.
Select a position: Highlight Save to U1, Save to U2, or Save to U3 and press 2.
Save user settings: Highlight Save settings and press J to assign the settings selected in Steps 1 and 2 to the mode dial position selected in Step 4.
Reset User Settings
Reset settings for U1, U2, and U3 to default values.
Language
Choose a language for camera menus and messages.
Time Zone And Date
Change time zones, set the camera clock, synchronize the clock with the clock on a smart device, choose the date display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.
Time zone: Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the new time zone.
Date and time: Set the camera clock.
Date format: Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed.
Daylight saving time: Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will automatically be advanced or set back one hour. The default setting is Off.
Monitor Brightness
Press the up or down arrow to adjust monitor brightness. Choose higher values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
Note that monitor brightness can only be adjusted when the monitor is the active display; it cannot be adjusted in the “viewfinder only” monitor mode or when your eye is to the viewfinder.
Monitor Color Balance
Use the multi selector as shown below to adjust monitor color balance with reference to a sample image. The sample image is the last photograph taken or, in playback mode, the last photograph displayed; to choose a different image, press the mag/question button and select an image from a thumbnail list (to view the highlighted image full frame, press and hold magnify). If the memory card contains no photographs, an empty frame with a gray border will be displayed in place of the sample image. Press OK to exit when adjustments are complete.
Note that monitor color balance can only be adjusted when the monitor is the active display; it cannot be adjusted in the “viewfinder only” monitor mode or when your eye is to the viewfinder. Monitor color balance applies only to the shooting, playback, and menu displays; pictures taken with the camera are not affected.
Viewfinder Brightness
Adjust viewfinder brightness. If Auto is selected, viewfinder brightness will be adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions; to adjust brightness manually, select Manual and press up or down (choose higher values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness). Note that viewfinder brightness can only be adjusted when the viewfinder is the active display; it cannot be adjusted when the viewfinder is off or in the “monitor only” monitor mode.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 2
Viewfinder Color Balance
Use the multi selector to adjust viewfinder color balance as described in Monitor Color Balance.
Control Panel Brightness
The control pannel is located on the top of the camera housing. You can change the brightness of this monochrome LED pannel. If Auto is selected, control panel brightness will be adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions; to adjust brightness manually, select Manual and press up or down. Selecting Off turns the control panel off.
Hack: Set to Auto, this will dim the panel in low light.
Limit Monitor Mode Selection
Choose the monitor modes that can be selected using the monitor mode button. Highlight the desired options and press right to select or deselect. Press OK to save changes when settings are complete.
Information Display
If Auto (AUTO) is selected, the color of the lettering in the information display will automatically change from black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background. To always use the same color lettering, select Manual and choose Dark on light (B; black lettering) or Light on dark (W; white lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color.
AF fine-tune
Fine-tune focus for up to 20 lens types. Use only as required; AF tuning is not recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal focus. Auto fine-tuning is available in live view. We recommend that you perform fine-tuning at a focus distance you use frequently; if you perform focus-tuning at a short focus distance, for example, you may find it less effective at longer distances.
AF fine-tune (On/Off): Choose On to turn AF tuning on, Off to turn it off.
Saved value: Tune AF for the current lens. Press 1 to move focal point away from camera or 3 to move focal point toward camera; choose from values between +20 and –20. The camera can store values for up to 30 lens types. Only one value can be stored for each type of lens.
Default: Choose the AF tuning value used when no previously saved value exists for the current lens.
List saved values: List previously saved AF tuning values. To delete a lens from the list, highlight the desired lens and press O. To change a lens identifier (for example, to choose an identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value can be used with only one lens of each type), highlight the desired lens and press the trash icon. A menu will be displayed; press up or down to choose an identifier and press OK to save changes and exit.
Non CPU Lens Data
Record the focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses, allowing them to be used with functions normally reserved for CPU lenses.
Lens number: Choose a number to identify the lens.
Focal length (mm): Enter the focal length.
Maximum aperture: Enter the maximum aperture.
Clean Image Sensor
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or the body cap is removed may adhere to the image sensor and affect your photographs. The Clean image sensor option vibrates the sensor to remove dust.
Hack: Set to Automatic Cleaning. You’ll notice that mirrorless cameras like the Nikon Z7 collect a lot of dust on the sensor due to the fact that there is no mirror. This makes life easier and will reduce the amount of wet sensor cleaning you’ll have to do.
Image Dust Off ref Photo
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D (for more information, refer to Capture NX-D online help). Image Dust Off cannot be used with small or medium-sized NEF (RAW) images.
An FX lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended when recording Image Dust Off reference data. When using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
Frame a featureless white object in the display: With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the display and then press the shutter-release button halfway. In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
Acquire dust off reference data:Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is pressed. If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data and a message will be displayed. Choose another reference object and repeat the process from Step 1.
Image Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed cannot be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean sensor and then startonly if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs.
Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures. Reference images cannot be viewed using computer imaging software. A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 3
Image Comment
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or Capture NX-D. The comment is also visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display. The following options are available:
Input comment: Input a comment as described in “Text Entry”. Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
Attach comment: Select this option to attach the comment to all subsequent photographs. Attach comment can be turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2. After choosing the desired setting, press OK to exit.
Copyright Information
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken. Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in the photo information display and can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or in Capture NX-D. The following options are available:
Artist: Enter a photographer name as described in “Text Entry”. Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described in “Text Entry”. Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters long.
Attach copyright information: Select this option to attach copyright information to all subsequent photographs. Attach copyright information can be turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2. After choosing the desired setting, press J to exit.
Beep Options
Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when:
The self-timer is in operation
Time-lapse recording ends
The camera focuses in photo mode (AF-S selected for focus mode; Focus selected for Custom Setting a2, AF-S priority selection; and Off selected for Silent photography)
The touch screen is used for keyboard entry
The Beep options menu contains the following items:
Beep on/off: Turn the beep speaker on or off, or select Off (touch controls only) to disable the beep during keyboard entry while enabling it for other purposes.
Volume: Adjust beep volume.
Pitch: Choose the pitch of the beep from High and Low.
Touch Controls
Adjust monitor touch control settings.
Enable/Disable Touch Controls: Select Disable to prevent accidental use of touch-screen controls, or Playback only to enable touch-screen controls in playback mode only.
Full-Frame Playback Flicks: Choose the gesture used to display the next image in full-frame playback: a flick from right to left or a flick from left to right.
HDMI
Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices. The camera can record video directly to connected HDMI recorders. Some recorders will even start and stop recording in response to camera controls. Use the HDMI option in the setup menu to adjust settings for HDMI output.
Output Resolution: Choose the format for images output to the HDMI device. If Auto is selected, the camera will automatically select the appropriate format.
Advanced: Adjust the settings below.
Output range: Auto is recommended in most situations. If the camera is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal output range for the HDMI device, you can choose Limited range for devices with an RGB video signal input range of 16 to 235 or Full range for devices with an RGB video signal input range of 0 to 255. Choose Limited range if you notice a loss of detail in shadows, Full range if shadows are “washed out” or too bright.
External recording control: Enabling external recording control allows camera controls to be used to start and stop recording when the camera is connected via HDMI to a third-party recorder that supports the Atomos Open Protocol (Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, or SUMO-series Monitor recorders). An icon will be displayed in the camera monitor: A is displayed in movie live view, while B is displayed during movie recording. During recording, check the recorder and recorder display to ensure that footage is being saved to the device (note that the footage output to the device may be disrupted while external recording control is in effect). The camera display will turn off automatically when the standby timer expires, ending HDMI output; when recording movies to an external device, select Standby timer for Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay) and choose No limit or a time longer than the anticipated recording time. See the manual provided with the recorder for more information on device features and operation.
Output data depth: Choose from 8 bit and 10 bit.
N-Log setting: Select On (cannot record to card) to preserve details in highlights and shadows and avoid over-saturated colors when recording movies. Choose this option (available only when 10 bit is selected for Output data depth) when recording footage that will later be color-corrected. The footage will be recorded directly to the external device and cannot be saved to the camera memory card. The ISO sensitivity settings > Maximum sensitivity and ISO sensitivity (Mode M) options in the movie shooting menu can be set to values of from ISO 1600 to 25600 and ISO 800 to 25600, respectively.
View assist: Choose On for a live preview of video footage recorded with On (cannot record to card) selected for N-Log setting. The colors in the preview will differ from those of the final movie, but this has no effect on the footage actually recorded.
HDMI Output:
HDMI output is not available at movie frame sizes of 1920 × 1080 120p, 1920 × 1080 100p, or 1920 × 1080 slow-mo or when the camera is connected to a device running SnapBridge or Camera Control Pro 2.
10-Bit Output Data Depth:
10 bit can be used only with compatible recorders. Regardless of the display mode selected, the camera monitor will turn on and the viewfinder will remain blank. No photos can be taken; during movie recording, the following additional restrictions apply when 3840 × 2160 is selected for frame size:
Movies are not recorded to memory cards inserted in the camera.
Icons and characters in the monitor will display at low resolution.
Selecting the DX image area reduces the angle of view to about 90%.
Zoom
Movies filmed at a frame size of 3840 × 2160 are displayed at a size of 1920 × 1080 when zoomed in.
Location Data
Adjust settings for use when the camera is connected to a device that provides location data, namely a GPS receiver or a smart device running the SnapBridge app (for more information on SnapBridge, see the app’s online help).
Standby timer: If Enable is selected when a GPS receiver is connected, the exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the period specified Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay) > Standby timer, reducing the drain on the battery.
Position: View the location data supplied by the GPS receiver or smart device (the items displayed vary with the source).
Set clock from satellite: Select Yes to synchronize the camera clock with the time reported by the GPS device.
Wireless Remote (WR) Options
Adjust settings for optional WR-R10 wireless remote controllers and for optional radio-controlled flash units that support Advanced Wireless Lighting.
LED Lamp:
Enable or disable the status LEDs on a WR-R10 wireless remote controller mounted on the camera. For more information, see the documentation supplied with the wireless remote controller.
Link Mode:
Choose a link mode for WR-R10 wireless remote controllers mounted on other cameras or radio-controlled flash units that support Advanced Wireless Lighting. Be sure that the same mode is selected for the other devices.
Pairing: To pair the camera with a WR-R10, mount the WR-R10 on the camera and press the pairing button.
PIN: Connect using a four-digit PIN code. Press 4 or 2to highlight digits and press 1 or 3 to change, then press J to enter and display the selected PIN.
Regardless of the option selected for Link mode, signals from paired wireless remote controllers will always be received by the WR-R10. Users of the WR-1 wireless remote controller will need to select pairing as the WR-1 link mode.
Assign remote (WR) Fn Button
Choose the role played by the Fn button on optional wireless remote controllers equipped with an Fn button.
Airplane Mode
Select Enable to disable the wireless features of Eye-Fi cards and Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connections to smart devices. Connections to other devices using a wireless transmitter can only be disabled by removing the transmitter from the camera.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 4
Connect To Smart Device
Adjust settings for connection to smart devices.
Start: Follow on-screen instructions to connect to the smart device.
Password protection: Choose a password for smart device connections and turn password protection on or off.
Use SnapBridge to control the camera remotely from a smart device and download pictures from the camera. SnapBridge is available free-of-charge from the Apple App Store and on Google Play.
Connect To PC
If On is selected, new photos will automatically be uploaded to the PC.
Connecting via USB:
If the supplied USB cable is used to connect the camera to a computer running ViewNX-i, you can copy pictures to the computer, where they can be viewed, edited, and organized.
Installing ViewNX-i:
Download the ViewNX-i installer from the following website and follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation (existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as earlier versions may not support the camera). An Internet connection is required. For system requirements and other information, see the Nikon website for your region.
Copying Pictures to the Computer
For detailed instructions, see the online help for ViewNX-i.
Connect the USB cable.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown.
USB Hubs: Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard. Use a Reliable Power Source.
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged.
Connecting Cables: Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
Turn the camera on.
The Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX-i will start (if a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select Nikon Transfer 2).
Windows 7: If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as described below.
Under Import pictures and videos, click Change program. A program selection dialog will be displayed; select Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.
Double-click .
Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 may display an AutoPlay prompt when the camera is connected. Tap or click the dialog and then tap or click Nikon Transfer 2 to select Nikon Transfer 2.
macOS/OS X: If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, confirm that the camera is connected and then launch Image Capture (an application that comes with macOS or OS X) and select Nikon Transfer 2 as the application that opens when the camera is detected.
Wireless Networks (Wi-Fi)
The following methods can be used to connect to a computer via Wi-Fi. For more information.
Built-in Wi-Fi
Use the Connect to PC option in the camera setup menu to connect to computers either directly or via a wireless router.
Connection via a wireless route or a direct wireless connection.
Wireless Transmitter (WT-7)
Adjust settings for optional WT-7 wireless remote controllers and for optional radio-controlled flash units that support Advanced Wireless Lighting.
When the camera is connected to an optional WT-7 wireless transmitter, the Wireless transmitter (WT-7) option in the setup menu can be used for connection to computers or ftp servers.
Use the WT-7 for connection to Ethernet networks and for more reliable connections to wireless networks. With Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately), the camera can be controlled remotely and pictures saved directly to the computer as they are taken.
Conformity Marking
View a selection of the standards with which the camera complies.
Battery Info
View information on the battery currently inserted in the camera.
Charge: The current battery level expressed as a percentage.
No. of shots: The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since the battery was last charged. Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset white balance.
Battery age: A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates that battery performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the battery has reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced. Note that fresh batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in charging life; the battery age display will however return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
Slot Empty Release Lock
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode). If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.
Save/Load Settings
Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory card (if the card is full, an error will be displayed). Use this option to share settings among Nikon Z7 cameras.
Reset All Settings
Reset all settings except Language and Time zone and date to their default values. Copyright information and other user-generated entries are also reset. We recommend that you save settings using the Save/load settings option in the setup menu before performing a reset.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 5
Firmware Version
View the current camera firmware version of your Nikon Z7 and attached lens.
MENU → Retouch Menu → page 1
NEF (RAW) Processing
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs. If you displayed the retouch menu by pressing the G button, you can use this option to copy multiple images.
Select NEF (RAW) processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch menu and press 2.
Choose how images are selected.
Choose from the following options:
Select image(s): Select one or more images manually.
Select date: Create JPEG copies of all the NEF (RAW) images taken on selected dates.
Select all images: Create JPEG copies of all the NEF (RAW) images on the memory card (proceed to Step 4).
Select photographs.
If you chose Select image(s) in Step 2, a picture selection dialog will be displayed listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera. Highlight images using the multi selector and press the W (Q) button to select or deselect; selected images are indicated by a Licon. To view the highlighted image full screen, press and hold the X button. Press J to proceed to Step 4 when your selection is complete.
If you chose Select date in Step 2, a list of dates will be displayed. Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to select or deselect. Press J to select all NEF (RAW) pictures taken on the chosen dates and proceed to Step 4.
Choose settings for the JPEG copies.
Adjust the settings listed below, or select Original to use the setting in effect when the photograph was taken (the original settings are listed below the preview). Note that exposure compensation can only be set to values between −2 and +2 EV.
1
Image quality
2
Image size
3
White balance
4
Exposure compensation
5
Set Picture Control
6
High ISO NR
7
Color space
8
Vignette control
9
Active D-Lighting
10
Diffraction compensation
Copy the photographs.
Highlight EXE and press J to create a JPEG copy of the selected photograph (if multiple photos are selected, a confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J to create JPEG copies of the selected photos). To exit without copying the photographs, press the G button.
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy as described below.
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy as described below.
To reduce size of the crop: Press mag/question button.
To increase size of the crop: Press magnifier.
To change the crop aspect ratio: Rotate the main command dial.
To position the crop: Use the multi selector. Keep the multi selector pressed to move the crop rapidly to the desired position.
To create a cropped copy: Press OK to save the current crop as a separate file. The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and appears at upper left in the crop display.
Resize
Create small copies of selected photographs.
Select Resize: Highlight Resize in the N tab and press 2.
Choose a size: Highlight Choose size and press 2. Highlight the desired size and press J.
Choose pictures: Highlight Select image(s) and press 2.
Highlight pictures and press W (Q) to select or deselect (to view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button). Selected pictures are marked by a 8 icon. Press J when the selection is complete. Note that photographs taken at an image-area setting of 5 : 4 (30×24), 1 : 1 (24×24), or 16 : 9 (36×20) cannot be resized.
Save the resized copies: A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Highlight Yesand press J to save the resized copies.
D-Lighting
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photos.
Press left or right to choose the amount of correction performed. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to save the retouched copy.
Red-Eye Correction
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and is available only with photographs taken using the flash. The photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and press OK to create a copy. Note that red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.
Straighten
Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2 to rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments of approximately 0.25 degrees, 4 to rotate it counterclockwise (the effect can be previewed in the edit display; note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy). Press OK to save the retouched copy.
Distortion Control
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select Manual to reduce distortion manually. Note that Auto is not available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see “Auto Distortion Control”. Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pincushion distortion (the effect can be previewed in the edit display; note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to save the retouched copy. Note that distortion control may heavily crop or distort the edges of copies created from photographs taken with DX lenses at image areas other than DX (24×16).
Perspective Control
Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from the base of a tall object. Use the multi selector to adjust perspective (note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more of the edges being cropped out). The results can be previewed in the edit display. Press OK to save the retouched copy.
MENU → Retouch Menu → page 2
Image Overlay
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size. To create a NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW) and an image size of Large (the overlay will be saved as a large NEF/RAW image even if Small or Medium is selected).
Select Image overlay: Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press 2. Image overlay options will be displayed, with Image 1highlighted; press J to display a picture selection dialog listing only large NEF (RAW) images created with this camera (small and medium NEF/RAW images cannot be selected).
Select the first image: Use the multi selector to highlight the first photograph in the overlay. To view the highlighted photograph full frame, press and hold the mag button. Press OK to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display.
Select the second image: The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight Image 2 and press OK, then select the second photo as described in Step 2.
Adjust gain: Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to select the gain from values between 0.1 and 2.0. Repeat for the second image. The default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it. The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.
Preview the overlay: To preview the composition, press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in the Preview column, then press up or down to highlight Overlay and press OK (note that colors and brightness in the preview may differ from the final image). To save the overlay without displaying a preview, select Save. To return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press mag/question button.
Save the overlay: Press OK while the preview is displayed to save the overlay. After an overlay is created, the resulting image will be displayed full-frame.
Trim Movie
Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed.
Choose Start/End Point
Follow the steps below to create trimmed copies of movies.
Display a movie full frame.
Pause the movie on the new opening frame.
Play the movie back as described in “Viewing Movies”, pressing OK to start and resume playback and down to pause, and pressing left or right or rotating the main or sub-command dial to locate the desired frame. Your approximate position in the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar. Pause playback when you reach the new opening frame.
Movie progress bar: Select Choose start/end point.
Press the i button to display the i menu, then highlight Choose start/end point and press OK.
Select Start point: To create a copy that begins from the current frame, highlight Start point and press OK. The frames before the current frame will be removed when you save the copy.
Start point: Confirm the new start point.
If the desired frame is not currently displayed, press 4or 2 to advance or rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back, rotate the main command dial; to skip to the first or last frame, rotate the sub-command dial).
Choose the end point: Press the center of the sub-selector to switch from the start point (w) to the end point (x) selection tool and then select the closing frame as described in Step 5. The frames after the selected frame will be removed when you save the copy in Step 9.
Sub-selector, End point, Create the copy.
Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1.
Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight Preview and press OK (to interrupt the preview and return to the save options menu, press 1). To abandon the current copy and select a new start point or end point as described above, highlight Cancel and press J; to save the copy, proceed.
Save the copy.
Highlight Save as new file and press J to save the copy to a new file. To replace the original movie file with the edited copy, highlight Overwrite existing file and press OK.
MENU → My Menu
The MY MENU option can be used to create and edit a customized list of options from the playback, photo shooting, movie shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus for quick access (up to 20 items). If desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu.
Add Items
Add items to My Menu
Remove Items
Remove Items from my menu.
Rank Items
change the ranking of your added items.
Choose Tab
Choose a tab for your added item.
The i Menu
The most used functions in the main Menu can also be easily accessed by pressing the “I” on the back plate of the camera. This will bring you too the i Menu. This menu is completely customisable for both Photo and Movie mode (Controls Settings f1 – Customize i menu). We’ll have a quick look at the functionality added to this Menu as factory settings.
Set Picture control
Here you can change settings for the internal processing of picture data from the image sensor into final JPG files.
It’s necessary to start with an existing configuration or set of settings that Nikon has predefined for a certain look of the final image. You can choose between:
Auto: Your Nikon Z7 automatically detects the type of scene.
Standard: Nikon‘s default for a neutral picture as the standard for most shooting situations.
Neutral: A processing with slightly less sharpening, contrast improvement and saturation; for those who do these steps on their own later on.
Vivid: Higher color saturation, sharpening and contrast.
Monochrome: Converts into black and white.
Portrait: Very similar to „neutral“, slightly less sharpening, contrast and color saturation than „standard“.
Landscape: Higher contrast than „standard“.
You can also choose between a range of picture presets like Dream, Morning, Pop, Sunday, Sober, Dramatic, Silence, Bleached, Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red, Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary and Carbon.
Image Quality
NEF (RAW): RAW data from the image sensor are saved without additional processing. Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted after shooting.
NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine/NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal/NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic/NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality JPEG image.
JPEG fine/JPEG fine: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).
JPEG normal/JPEG normal: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).
JPEG basic/JPEG basic: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).
TIFF (RGB): Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color). TIFF is supported by a wide variety of imaging applications.
Flash Control
Choose the flash control mode for optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe and adjust settings for off-camera flash photography. See the flash control settings in the menu for more info.
WiFi connection
Turn On/Off the WiFi connection.
Release Mode
Single frame: The camera takes one photograph each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
Continuous low speed: While shutter-release button is held down, camera takes photographs at frame rate selected for Custom Setting d1 (CL mode shooting speed)
Continuous high speed: While shutter-release button is held down, camera takes photographs at frame rate given in “Power Source and Frame Rate” Use for active subjects.
Continuous high speed plus: only with jpeg.
Self-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer.
AF Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.
Pinpoint AF: Use for pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Single AF is chosen for Focus mode. Focusing may be slower than with single-point AF.
Single-point AF: Select the focus point; the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects. the ability to limit point selection to every other point allows you to quickly use the joystick, or touchscreen, to position the AF point.
Dynamic-area AF: The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points, letting you concentrate on composition in shots of moving subjects. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Continuous AF is chosen for Focus mode.
Wide-area AF (S) and (L): As for Single-point AF except that wider focus points are used. The focus points for Wide-area AF (L) are wider than those for Wide-area AF (S).
Auto-area AF: The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus area. At default settings, the camera gives priority to portrait subjects; if a portrait subject is detected, the selected subject will be indicated by a yellow border (if multiple faces are detected, you can choose your subject using the multi selector). Subject tracking can be activated by pressing the OK button.
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from Large, Medium, or Small (note that image size varies depending on the option selected for Image area.
White Balance
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source. Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If the desired results cannot be achieved with auto white balance, choose an option from the list below or use preset white balance.
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The following options are available:
Matrix metering: The camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and distance for results close to those seen by the naked eye.
Center-weighted metering: The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to an area in the center of the frame, the size of which can be chosen using Custom Setting b3 (Center-weighted area). This is the classic meter for portraits and is also recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
Spot metering: The camera meters a ⌀4 mm circle (equivalent to approximately 1.5% of the frame) centered on the current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if auto-area AF is in effect, the camera will instead meter the center focus point). Spot metering ensures that the subject will be correctly exposed, even when the background is much brighter or darker.
Highlight-weighted metering: The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights. Use this option to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when photographing spotlit performers on-stage.
Face Tracking
Turn on face tracking, or automatic face detection and autofocus tracking.
Vibration Reduction
The Nikon Z 7 is equipped with in-camera vibration reduction (VR), other manufacturers call this sensor stabilisation. The VR unit provides compensation for movement along five axes. The effects of vibration reduction are equivalent to a shutter speed up to approximately 5.0 stops. This function can also be used effectively with NIKKOR F lenses, including those not equipped with a VR function, with the Mount Adapter FTZ . ).
There is an ON (normal) and SPT (Sport) preset.
Focus Mode
AF-S: For stationary subjects. Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in green; focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point will flash red. At default settings, the shutter can only be released if the camera is able to focus (focus priority).
AF-C: For moving subjects. The camera focuses continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if the subject moves, the camera will predict the final distance to the subject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings, the shutter can be released whether or not the subject is in focus (release priority).
AF-F: The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject movement or changes in composition. Focus locks when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. This option is only available in movie mode.
Manual focus: The shutter can be released whether or not the subject is in focus.
Frequently asked questions
You’ll find a list of frequently asked questions and responses here
Can HDR be done using RAW files?
When shooting in HDR mode (set within the camera’s Photo Shooting Menu) you MUST have the camera’s image quality set to something other than NEF. You will not be able to access HDR Shooting without doing so
You can however, within the HDR shooting mode, select the option to “Save the individual images” taken as a NEF file. It will automatically save each of the individual shots used to create the HDR image. They will default to being saved as large-size NEF files regardless of the options selected for image quality and size in the photo shooting menu.
The Z6 and Z7 does not have a built-in sync port. The optional AS-15 Hot Shoe to PC sync cord adapter can be used to add this functionality. The Z6 and Z7 both support Nikon’s Creative Lighting system with both Optical and Radio Advanced Wireless Lighting (AWL).
The Z-series cameras record in 4:2:2 10-bit HDMI output. At the highest quality setting 3840 x 2160 (4k UHD) – at either 24, 25 or 30p – the bit rate is 144 Mbps.
Soon! The MB-N10 Multi-Power Battery Pack that is currently in development will hold two EN-EL15b, effectively increasing the number of shots possible and/or movie recording time by approximately 1.8×. It will provide the same level of dust and drip resistance as the Z 7 and Z 6, and will support USB charging using the EH-7P Charging AC Adapter. Information regarding the release of this product will be announced at a later date.
It’s not necessary to use the touch screen if you prefer more traditional controls – touch control can be disabled in both the Z6 and Z7. If you like the convenience of touch control playback but don’t like shooting with the touch screen you can also easily enable touch controls for playback only.
You can create customer picture controls that can be saved for use in any exposure mode on the camera. You can modify current Picture Controls on the camera to your liking and save them as customer Picture Controls as well. You would use the Rename option in this case.
In addition, you can save these Controls to a memory card and import them to another camera.
Can the Nikon Z7 do tethering?
If you are connecting your camera via the USB cable to a computer, you must use Camera Control Pro 2 in order to do a direct tether. If you would like to connect wirelessly, you can use the Wireless Transmitter Utility and connect directly via the camera and computer wifi.
Nikon Z7 overheating
Overheating problems with the Nikon Z7 seem to be limited to long usage of the camera in video mode around the 30 minute mark.
Quick how-to Nikon Z7 settings
How to set-up back button focussing
Back button focussing is a focussing and composition method where you disconnect the autofocus engine from the standard shutter button half-press. This enables you to engage the autofocus system only with the AF-ON button on the backplate.
Now your autofocus and shutter are disconnected, enabling you to acquire autofocus independently from the shutter button action. This method is often used to recompose your shot after autofocus is acquired, the so-called focus and recompose method.
This is very easy the set up with the Nikon Z7:
Go to a7 in the autofocus menu and set AF activation to AF-ON only. This way, only the AF ON button will engage the autofocus engine.
Conclusion
There is always a learning curve with every new camera you purchase. Luckily, Nikon decided to keep the hierarchy and the logic of their DSLR series cameras in the new Nikon Z7. This makes art easier to navigate at least for photographers experienced with those cameras. The Nikon Z7 is fairly new so I’ll add more tips and tricks to this post as I get more and more familiar with it. If you have any comments or questions, or just want to write about your experience with the Z7, feel free to post them in the comment section below.
The Nikon Z6 uses a new 24 megapixel Full-frame sensor as incorporates many of the features and improvements brought in the last years by competitors like Olympus, Fuji and Sony. These mirrorless improvements mainly focus on enhanced speed, with now on sensor phase detection AF points and an entirely new processor.
These will definitely make the Nikon Z6 a more useable camera in terms of speed and functionality compared to older models. There are a few changes in the menu system when compared to previous Nikon cameras. We’ll have a page-by-page look at the menus in this post. If you’re looking for a particular feature, I would suggest that you use the search function in your preferred browser, as this post is quite long.
choose pictures to be deleted in a thumbnail preview
delete pictures by shooting date.
Note the hints at the bottom of the monitor that tell you which keys have to be used.
Hack: The main advantage of this menu is the option to delete by shooting date.
Playback Folder
If there are several folders on your memory card you can choose here from which folders images will be displayed in playback mode:
only from the one that is currently used for new pictures (as defined in the shooting menu Storage Folder)
from all folders the Z6 has created (default)
from all folders on the memory card – possibly including pictures from other sources.
Hack: Ignore. I would not exchange memory cards between cameras without formatting them to reduce the risk of write errors (=loss of pictures!).
That makes the last option unattractive and I do not see a practical use in using several Storage Folders and consequently the other two choices.
Playback Display Options
You can add Focus point info to the playback display here as well as add additional photo info like Exposure Info, Highlights, RGB Histogram, Shooting Data…
Image Review
If turn this on, each new image will appear automatically on the monitor just after shooting.
Hack: I prefer to switch off this option because the regular flickering of the monitor is annoying if you leave the camera close to the eye.
After Delete
This menu defines which image will be displayed after you delete one:
Show next (default): The next newer one
Show previous: The next older one
Continue as before: The next picture will be displayed if you have scrolled forward before deleting the picture and the previous picture will be displayed if you have scrolled backward before.
Hack: I prefer the last option because I delete images both while browsing forward or backward and then it is nice if the display adapts to the direction you are using.
After Burst, Show
The After burst, show option in the playback menu controls whether the photo displayed at the end of a burst of shots is the first or last in the burst. It takes effect only when Image review is off.
Rotate All
If you switch on this option photos taken in upright format will be rotated during preview.
Slide Show
View a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder. Hidden images are not displayed.
Options:
Start: Start slide show.
Image type: Choose type of image displayed from Still images and movies, Still images only, and Movies only.
Frame interval: Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
Skip back/skip ahead: Press left to return to previous frame, right to skip to next frame.
View additional photo info: Press up or down to change or hide photo info displayed (still images only).
Pause: Press OK to pause the slide show. To restart, highlight Restart and press OK.
Adjust volume: Press magnifier during movie playback to increase volume, mag+flash to decrease.
Exit to playback menu: Press Menu to end the slide show and return to the playback menu.
Exit to playback mode: Press Play to end the slide show and exit to playback mode.
Exit to shooting mode: Press shutter-release button halfway to return to shooting mode.
MENU → Playback Menu → page 2
Rating
Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion. Ratings can also be viewed in ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D. Rating is not available with protected images.
Procedure:
Select an image: Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail playback.
Display playback options. Press the info button to display playback options.
Select Rating: Highlight Rating and press right.
Choose a rating.Press left or right to choose a rating of from zero to five stars, or select trash can to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion. Press OK to complete the operation.
Hack: If Rating is selected for Custom Setting f1 (Custom control assignment) > Fn2 button, pictures can be rated by keeping the Fn2 button pressed and pressing left or right.
MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 1
Reset Photo Shooting Menu
This menu resets all entries in the shooting menu back to the default values defined by Nikon, the only exception is the entry Storage Folder.
Hack: This menu may be useful if you are new to the Z6 and have played a lot with the settings in this menu.
Storage Folder
This menu defines the folder on the memory card in which new images are stored and allows to create new folders:
Select folder by number: You choose a three digit number and the Z6 will create a folder with this number at the beginning of its name if it does not exist yet. The following five characters „Z6“ cannot be altered.
When you see a folder symbol next to the selected number a folder exists already.
Select folder from list: You choose a folder from a list of existing ones – without the possibility to create new ones.
File Naming
You can replace the three letters „DSC“ which are the default beginning of file names with your own individual combination.
an underscore _ before or after these three letters, depending on which color space you use.
a sequential four digit number.
Choose Image Area
The Nikon Z6 offers a choice of the following image areas:
FX (36 × 24): Images are recorded in FX format with an angle of view equivalent to a lens on a 35 mm format camera.
DX (24 × 16): Images are recorded in DX format. To calculate the approximate focal length of the lens in 35 mm format, multiply by 1.5.
5 : 4 (30 × 24): Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 : 4.
1 : 1 (24×24): Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1/
16:9 (36×20): Pictures are recorded with a 16:9 image ratio.
Image Quality
The Nikon Z6 supports the following image quality options:
NEF (RAW): RAW data from the image sensor are saved without additional processing. Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted after shooting.
NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine/NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal/NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic/NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality JPEG image.
JPEG fine/JPEG fine: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).
JPEG normal/JPEG normal: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).
JPEG basic/JPEG basic: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).
TIFF (RGB): Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color). TIFF is supported by a wide variety of imaging applications.
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from Large, Medium, or Small (note that image size varies depending on the option selected for Image area.
FX (36×24; FX format)
Large
Medium
Small
DX (24×16; DX format)
Large
Medium
Small
5 : 4 (30×24)
Large
Medium
Small
1 : 1 (24×24)
Large
Medium
Small
16 : 9 (36×20)
Large
Medium
Small
NEF (RAW) Recording
Choose a compression type and bit depth for NEF (RAW) photos. You can change compression type and bit depth.
NEF (RAW) Compression
Lossless compressed: NEF images are compressed using a reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40% with no effect on image quality.
Compressed: NEF images are compressed using a non-reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about 35–55% with almost no effect on image quality.
Uncompressed: NEF images are not compressed.
NEF (RAW) Bit Depth
12-bit: NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 12 bits.
14-bit: NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits, producing files larger than those with a bit depth of 12 bits but increasing the color data recorded.
Hack: 14 bit uncompressed of course gives the ultimate image quality, but Losless Compressed is so good that is should be used in order to conserve card space. If you’re a portrait or fine art photographer, you should always shoot 14 bit in order to have the maximum color data preserved in your files.
ISO sensitively settings
If the Nikon Z6 decides that it can’t properly expose the image at that ISO given your current aperture and shutter speed, it automatically adjusts ISO as necessary. Turn on the Auto ISO Sensitivity option. The camera will now override your ISO choice when it thinks a proper exposure is not possible with the settings you’ve specified.
If On is selected, the camera will automatically adjust ISO sensitivity when optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the value selected for ISO sensitivity. The options listed below are available for fine-tuning auto ISO sensitivity control.
Maximum sensitivity: Choose an upper limit for ISO sensitivity to prevent it being raised too high.
Maximum sensitivity with c: Choose the upper ISO sensitivity limit for photos taken using an optional flash unit.
Minimum shutter speed: Choose the shutter speed below which auto ISO sensitivity control will kick in to prevent underexposure in modes P and A. Options range from 1/4000 s to 30 s.
MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 2
White Balance
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source. Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If the desired results cannot be achieved with auto white balance, choose an option from the list below or use preset white balance.
Auto
White balance is adjusted automatically for optimal results with most light sources. For best results, use type G, E , D or Z lens. If optional flash fires, results are adjusted appropriately. Color temperature can be viewed in the playback info display after shooting.
Options:
Keep white (reduce warm colors; 3500–8000 K)
Normal (3500–8000 K)
Keep warm lighting colors(3500–8000 K)
Natural light auto
White balance is adjusted for natural light, producing colors closer to those seen by the naked eye. (4500–8000 K)
Incandescent
Use under incandescent lighting. (3000K)
Fluorescent
Sodium-vapor lamps (2700 K): Sodium-vapor lighting (found in sports venues).
High temp. mercury-vapor (7200 K): High color temperature light sources (e.g. mercury-vapor lamps).
Direct sunlight
Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight. (5200K)
Flash
Use with optional flash units. (5400K)
Cloudy
Use in daylight under overcast skies. (6000 K)
Shade
Use in daylight with subjects in the shade. (8000 K)
Choose color temp.
Choose color temperature from list of values. (2500–10,000 K)
Preset manual
Use subject, light source, or existing photograph as reference for white balance.
Set Picture Control
Here you can change settings for the internal processing of picture data from the image sensor into final JPG files.
It’s necessary to start with an existing configuration or set of settings that Nikon has predefined for a certain look of the final image. You can choose between:
Standard: Nikon‘s default for a neutral picture as the standard for most shooting situations.
Neutral: A processing with slightly less sharpening, contrast improvement and saturation; for those who do these steps on their own later on.
Vivid: Higher color saturation, sharpening and contrast.
Monochrome: Converts into black and white.
Portrait: Very similar to „neutral“, slightly less sharpening, contrast and color saturation than „standard“.
Landscape: Higher contrast than „standard“.
You can modify any of these preset configurations by placing a yellow selection mark in it and use the selector to the right.
The „Quick adjust“ increases or decreases all settings in the direction of the intended picture style and is available for all configurations except „neutral“.
Alternatively you can select and change all detail settings individually:
Sharpening: Increases contrasts at edges which improves the perceived sharpness.
Contrast: Increases or decreases the contrast between light and dark areas.
Brightness: Lightening or Darkening of the whole picture.
Saturation: Changes color saturation for more intense or fainter colors.
Hue: Changes the overall color tone in a slightly complicated manner.
And also two which are available only for the configuration „monochrome“:
Filter effects: Simulates the effect of color filters as they are used in black and white photography to adjust contrast.
Toning: Allows you to choose another dominating color tone than black and white.
Additionally you can create your own configurations by copying, modifying and renaming an existing one.
To do so you need the next menu option Manage Picture Control.
When you change a configuration in the Picture Control and do a Reset
your last chosen configuration will stay selected but any changes in it will be reset.
Tips: An important menu with visible impact on your photos! Only those who shoot in RAW format only and create JPG files on their own in the computer can ignore it.
The „best“ settings are a matter of your personal preferences, in this menu everyone has to find his or her best settings by experience.
On the other hand all of these settings can also be changed afterwards in image processing on the computer, you really have to get them right in the camera if you want to have the best possible results straight out of your Nikon Z6.
The configuration „neutral“ is very similar to „standard“ with slightly less contrast and saturation, the difference is really small.
The sharpening chosen by Nikon is rather weak, I prefer a higher value of 5 or 6.
When looking at your images in the proper magnification (100% zoom on the computer monitor) you will see clearer edges.
„Vivid“ has visibly more intense color and more contrast. That can improve your image but also be too much of a good thing if you have already high contrast (e.g. direct sunlight) and make your picture look unnatural.
I would not set contrast and brightness here and switch on the Active D-Lighting.
Regarding the setting „hue“: Ignore this setting, it is only a slight shift in color for which I do not see any practical relevance.
Result: All the above has brought me to the following settings that I use myself:
One own configuration, created with the next menu option Manage Picture Control, called „standard+sharper“ which is a copy of the configuration „standard“ with sharpening increased to 6.
Another configuration called „sharp+vivid“ which is the same as before plus a saturation increased by two steps.
I use the first one most of the time and switch to the second one occasionally.
Last but not least: Do not overestimate the importance of this menu, most important is still a good subject, light, exposure and
white balance for cooler or wamer color rendition. After all that the „Picture Control“ is for the final touch.
Manage Picture Control
This menu allows you to copy existing Picture Control configurations (see previous menu) and save them with personal adjustments under a new name.
To create your own configuration choose the entry „Save/edit“, pick an existing configuration and press OK. Then you can assign one of nine places in the list of possible customized entries, edit it and choose your own name.
you do not really need an own configuration and can ignore this menu. With the user settings also personal adjustments to a Picture Control will be saved.
If you do change the Picture Control settings regularly it is best to put the most commonly used settings into your own configurations.
Reset will put all Picture Control configurations back to their default settings and you need an own configuration if you do not want to tweak Picture Control each time with your setting details.
Save/edit: Create a new custom Picture Control based on an existing preset or custom Picture Control, or edit existing custom Picture Controls.
Rename: Rename custom Picture Controls.
Delete: Delete custom Picture Controls.
Load/save: Use the following options to copy custom Picture Controls to and from the memory card. Once copied to the memory card, Picture Controls can be used with other cameras or compatible software. (Copy to camera, Delete from card or Copy to card.)
Color Space
You can either choose sRGB or Adobe RGB.
sRGB (default): This is the worldwide standard with 256 levels of brightness for each of the basic colors red, green, blue, for displaying images on computer monitors.
Adobe RGB: A color space developed by Adobe for broader color range of printed images.
As for sRGB all colors will be stored with shares of red, green and blue with 256 levels of gradation, the difference is that the maximum saturations are higher.
The color space is relevant only for creation of JPG-files, not for the RAW format.
Active D-Lighting
„Active D-Lighting“ (ADL) is Nikon‘s name for an additional step in the internal image processing that mainly lightens dark areas of the picture.
It is relevant only for JPG files, not for RAW format.
You can set this to Auto, Extra High, High, Normal, Low or Off.
ADL can also darken too bright areas but lightening dark ones is more frequent and the improvements are more visible there.
You can choose an automatic adjustment that the Nikon Z6 will set stronger or weaker depending on your subject‘s contrast or four steps from low to extra high.
Hack: Turn this ON, set it to Normal, it really helps improve your images!
Long Exposure NR
If this menu option is switched on the Nikon Z6 will use an extra step in internal image processing for noise reduction if the exposure time is longer than 1 second.
Hack: switch it Off, it’s better to use advanced image noise reduction on your Mac
High ISO NR
You can choose if an additional noise reduction shall be applied in the internal image processing for shots with high ISO sensitivity.
Vignette Control
Vignetting is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph. Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G, E, D and F lenses (PC lenses excluded). Its effects vary from lens to lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose from High, Normal, Low, and Off.
Hack: Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, TIFF and JPEG images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral brightness, while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings may not produce the desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor. Vignette control does not apply to movies or multiple exposures.
MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 3
Diffraction Compensation
With digital cameras, if you select a small aperture to increase depth of field when shooting cityscapes or landscapes, it may cause a loss of sharpness across the image due to diffraction. .
Thanks to the new and faster EXPEED 6 processor inside the Nikon Z6, there is a new diffraction compensation function. This helps capture landscapes and cityscapes crisply even when small apertures are used(from f/11 onwards).
Auto Distortion Control
Select On to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting with long lenses (note that the edges of the area visible in the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph, and that the time needed to process photographs before recording begins may increase).
Flicker Reduction Shooting
Reduce banding or (in photos taken in continuous release modes) uneven exposure or coloration caused by the flicker of such light sources as fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps during viewfinder photography.
Hack: Take a test shot and view the results before taking additional photographs. Flicker reduction can detect flicker at 100 and 120 Hz (associated respectively with AC power supplies of 50 and 60 Hz). Flicker may not be detected or the desired results may not be achieved with dark backgrounds, bright light sources, or decorative lighting displays and other non-standard lighting. Depending on the light source, there may be a slight delay before the shutter is released. During burst shooting, the frame rate may slow or become erratic; in addition, the desired results may not be achieved if the frequency of the power supply changes during shooting.
Flicker detection will not take effect at shutter speeds slower than 1/100 s (including Bulb and Time) or when Mup is selected for release mode or exposure delay mode is on.
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The following options are available:
Matrix: Produces natural results in most situations. Camera meters wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and, with type G, E, D or F lenses , distance information (3D color matrix metering III; with other CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering III, which does not include 3D distance information).
Center-weighted: Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area (if CPU lens is attached, size of area can be selected using Custom Setting b6, Center-weighted area, if non-CPU or AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–4.5E ED lens is attached, area is equivalent to circle 12 mm in diameter). Classic meter for portraits; recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
Spot: Camera meters circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter (approximately 1.5% of frame). Circle is centered on current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if non-CPU or AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–4.5E ED lens is used or if auto-area AF is in effect, camera will meter center focus point). Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is much brighter or darker.
Highlight-weighted: Camera assigns greatest weight to highlights. Use to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when photographing spotlit performers on-stage.
Hack: Specifying the focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu allows the camera to use color matrix metering when matrix is selected and improves the accuracy of center-weighted and spot metering.
Flash Control
Choose the flash control mode for optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe and adjust settings for off-camera flash photography.
Flash Control Mode
When an SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 is mounted on the camera, the flash control mode, flash level, and other flash settings can be adjusted using the Flash control > Flash control mode item in the photo shooting menu (in the case of the SB-5000, these settings can also be adjusted using the controls on the flash unit). The options available vary with the flash used, while the options displayed under Flash control mode vary with the mode selected. Settings for other flash units can only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
TTL: i-TTL mode. In the cases of the SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300, flash compensation can be adjusted using the W (M) button.
Auto external flash: In this mode, output is adjusted automatically according to the amount of light reflected by the subject; flash compensation is also available. Auto external flash supports “auto aperture” (qA) and “non-TTL auto” (A) modes; non-TTL auto is selected automatically if a non-CPU lens is attached without specifying the focal length and maximum aperture using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu. See the flash unit manual for details.
Distance-priority manual: Choose the distance to the subject; flash output will be adjusted automatically. Flash compensation is also available.
Manual: Choose the flash level manually.
Repeating flash: The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect. Choose the flash level (Output), the maximum number of times the unit fires (Times), and the number of times the flash fires per second (Frequency, measured in Hertz). The options available for Times vary depending on the options selected for Output and Frequency; see the documentation provided with the flash unit for details.
Wireless Flash Options
Adjust settings for simultaneous wireless control of multiple remote flash units. This option is available only when an SB-5000 or SB-500 flash unit or a WR-R10 wireless remote controller is mounted on the camera.
Optical AWL: The remote flash units are controlled using low-intensity flashes emitted by the master flash. Available only with an SB-5000 or SB-500 mounted on the camera accessory shoe.
Optical/radio AWL: This option is for flash photography using both optically- and radio-controlled flash units. Choose this option when using both a WR-R10 and an SB-500 mounted on the camera accessory shoe. Remote flash control is automatically set to Group flash.
Radio AWL: The remote flash units are controlled by radio signals emitted by a WR-R10 attached to the camera. Available only with the WR-R10 and remote flash units that support radio AWL.
Off: Remote flash photography disabled.
Remote Flash Control
Choose from the following remote flash photography options:
Group flash: hoose a separate flash control mode and flash level for each group of remote flash units. If Optical AWL or Optical/radio AWL is selected for Wireless flash options you can choose the channel used by the master flash to communicate with the remote flash units.
Quick wireless control: Choose for control of overall flash output. Use Quick wireless control options to adjust the balance between groups A and B and set the output for group C manually (the master flash does not fire). You can also adjust flash compensation for groups A and B and, if Optical AWL or Optical/radio AWL is selected for Wireless flash options choose the channel used by the master flash to communicate with the remote flash units
Remote repeating: The flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect. Choose the flash level (Output), the maximum number of times the flash units fire (Times), the number of times the units fire per second (Frequency), and, if Optical AWL or Optical/radio AWL is selected for Wireless flash options, the channel used by the master flash to communicate with the remote flash units. Note that the number of times the flash units fire in total may vary depending on the options selected for Output and Frequency; see the documentation provided with the flash unit for details.
Radio Remote Flash Info
View the flash units currently controlled using radio AWL.
Flash Mode
Some of the flash modes are set on the camera, rather than on the flash. To set most of these modes on a Nikon Z6, you keep the flash button depressed and rotate the main (rear) command wheel to cycle through the modes. The modes appear in the flash frame in the top LCD panel on the camera.
To set Auto FP on a Nikon Z6, you need to go into this menu.
Fill Flash
The flash fires with every shot. In modes P and A, shutter speed will automatically be set to values between 1/200 s (or 1/8000 s with Auto FP High-Speed Sync) and 1/60 s.
Red-eye Reduction Mode
When this mode is activated (indicated by an eye-symbol appearing on both the camera’s top LCD and the flash’s rear LCD), the flash fires three flashes at reduced output just before the picture is taken. This makes the iris of humans and animals contract which reduces the area where the red eye effect can be seen. It also introduces a shutter delay to allow the subject’s irises time to react.
The red-effect only occurs when you use the flash as key light pointing forwards and directly into the subjects eyes.
Slow-sync Flash + red-eye
As for Red-eye reduction except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use when you want to include background lighting in portraits. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake.
Slow-sync Flash
The default shutter speed when using flash is 1/60 second (you can change this default on a Nikon Z 6 with custom setting #24). The flash will use a faster shutter speed if the ambient light requires it, but will not normally go below 1/60 second in the modes where camera controls the shutter speed.
When slow-sync flash is activated (on a Z6, you set this by pressing the flash button and turning the main command wheel until the word “SLOW” appears on the camera’s top LCD), shutter speeds as low as 30 seconds may be used to obtain the correct exposure for both the main subject in the foreground lit by the flash, and the background, in low-light situations or at night.
For slow shutter speeds, you may need to use a tripod to avoid camera shake.
In the Night Portrait scene mode, slow-sync flash is automatically activated.
Rear curtain Sync
Normally the flash fires at the same time the shutter curtain opens (i.e. front curtain sync). When rear curtain is activated (indicated by the word “REAR” on the camera’s top LCD), the flash fires just before the shutter curtain closes.
Rear curtain sync may be selected when one is shooting fast-moving subjects at slow shutter speeds. With front curtain sync, unnatural-looking pictures can occur because the blurred movement appears to be in front of the subject frozen by the flash. Rear curtain sync creates a picture in which the blur of a moving subject (for example, the taillights of a speeding car) appears behind the frozen subject.
Rear curtain sync automatically enables slow-sync mode, since the only time you should want to use rear sync, is when you also set a slow shutter speed to capture blurred movement.
Using rear curtain sync with shutter speeds faster than 1/30 second is not recommended. Rear curtain sync introduces a delay between the pre-flash and the main flash lasting the length of the exposure. This delay gives most people just enough time to react to the pre-flash. Using rear sync for portraits is a sure way to make your subjects blink or squint.
Rear curtain sync can not be combined with AWL, or with the FP or RPT modes.
Auto FP
(Focal Plane) is a sync mode that let you synchronise flash with higher shutter speeds than the camera’s normal maximum flash synchronisation shutter speed (often called “x-sync speed”).
To use this mode on a Nikon Z6, you need to have a CLS-compatible flash unit connected to the camera’s hot-shoe, and you must enable Auto FP on the camera. Without having Auto FP enabled, the camera will not let you set the shutter speed higher than the x-sync speed when you use a CLS-compatible flash. With Auto FP enabled, you can use any shutter speed.
In FP mode the flash will not fire once, but many times at an extremely rapid rate (typically 50 KHz) which begins with the opening of front curtain of your camera’s focal plane shutter and ends with closing of rear curtain. This permits the correct exposure to be obtained as the travelling slit of a dual curtain shutter passes over the sensor at high-speed.
Note that using FP reduces the maximum power of the flash. The only way to have FP is to illuminate the focal plane curtain, which, depending on the shutter speed, may cover a very large percentage of the focal plane. This means that the higher the shutter speed is above the shutter’s x-sync speed, the smaller the area of film that gets illuminated by each flash.
The table below shows approximately how much the maximum power expressed as guide number GN is reduced when an SB-900 is used in FP mode on a Nikon Z6. It has full power (GN 34, ISO 100/meter) at the X-sync speed (1/200 second), is reduced by -1 EV (half power) at 1/250 second, and then by another -1 EV for each doubling of shutter speed. At 1/4000 second it is reduced by -5 EV, or 1/32 of full power.
Shutter Speed
GN
Power
1/200
34
0 EV
1/1
1/250
22
-1 EV
1/2
1/500
16
-2 EV
1/4
1/1000
11
-3 EV
1/8
1/2000
8
-4 EV
1/16
1/4000
6
-5 EV
1/32
Using FP will reduce the effective GN of the flash when you exceed the x-sync speed. However, it has no effect at speeds lower than the x-sync. It does no harm to have Auto FP permanently enabled.
On a Nikon Speedlight, the FP mode can be activated in the following flash modes: TTL, TTL BL, AA, M and GN. On the Nissin Di866 the FP mode only works in TTL mode.
Note: The FP mode is mainly useful when you want to use large apertures when doing fill flash in bright daylight. The FP mode does not help you freeze motion. Normal flash photography is very good at freezing motion, since a burst of electronic flash is so incredibly brief. When the dominant light on a scene is a very short flash of light it is almost as if you used a very high shutter speed in the thousandths of a second. However when you use FP mode flash, the flash unit pulses the light output over a longer period of time in order to simulate a light being lit for the entire time the shutter travels across the focal plane. Since the flash burst is no longer very short, it becomes more difficult to freeze motion, even with high shutter speeds. And because the FP mode makes you lose so much of the power of the flash, it is not very useful when you want the flash to be the dominant light. For high speed flash photography, you instead use manual mode, and adjust the power ratio to make sure that the flash burst is short enough to “freeze” movement.
High Speed Sync Without Auto FP mode
The Nikon Z6 will sync with most flash units at any shutter speed (i.e. up to 1/4000 second). This is because these models use a CCD sensor that works as an electronic shutter at high shutter speed. A conventional mechanical shutter is only used at shutter speeds below 1/125 second.
For some reason, Nikon has put in a program limitation that will not let you set faster shutter speed than 1/500 second in these models if you mount a flash unit in the camera’s hot-shoe. You can get around this limitation by taping over the two metal contacts on the back of the Speedlight.
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation can be used to adjust the level of the master and remote flash units by from −3 to +1 EV in steps of 1/3 EV. To choose a value for flash compensation, press the magnifying button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel.
When the master flash or a remote flash is set to TTL or Auto and flash compensation to a value other than ±0.0, an icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder and the current value for flash compensation can be viewed by pressing mag. Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
Focus Mode
AF-S (single AF):
Designed for shooting stationary subjects, this mode locks focus when you depress the shutter button halfway. (Think S for still, stationary.) In AF-S mode, the camera insists on achieving focus before it releases the shutter.
If this behavior annoys you, open the Custom Setting menu, choose Autofocus, and then choose AF-S Priority Selection. If you change the setting to Release, the picture is then recorded when you fully depress the shutter button even if focus isn’t yet achieved.
AF-C (continuous AF):
Geared to capturing moving targets, AF-C mode adjusts focus as needed as long as the shutter button is pressed halfway. (Think C for continuous motion.) Remember that a focus-adjustment occurs only if the subject moves closer to or farther from the camera.
If the subject is moving but only shifts a short distance in a horizontal direction, no adjustment is needed because the focusing distance remains the same.
AF-F
The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject movement or changes in composition. Focus locks when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. This option is only available in movie mode.
MF (manual Focus)
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus. Photographs can be taken at any time, even when the image is not in focus.
Hack: To decide which shutter-release option is right for you, consider whether you’d rather have any shot, even if it’s out of focus, or capture only those that are in focus. I prefer the latter, so I set both AF-S and AF-C modes to Focus. Why waste battery power, memory card space, and inevitable time deleting out-of-focus pictures? Yes, if you’re shooting rapid action, you may miss a few shots waiting for the focus to occur — but if they’re going to be lousy shots, who cares? Sports shooters who fire off hundreds of shots while covering an event, though, may want to unlock shutter release for both AF-C and AF-S modes. Again, you may wind up with lots of wasted shots, but you increase the odds that you’ll capture that split-second “highlight reel” moment.
MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 4
AF Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.
Pinpoint AF: Use for pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Single AF is chosen for Focus mode. Focusing may be slower than with single-point AF.
Single-point AF: Select the focus point; the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects. the ability to limit point selection to every other point allows you to quickly use the joystick, or touchscreen, to position the AF point.
Dynamic-area AF: The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points, letting you concentrate on composition in shots of moving subjects. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Continuous AF is chosen for Focus mode.
Wide-area AF (S) and (L): As for Single-point AF except that wider focus points are used. The focus points for Wide-area AF (L) are wider than those for Wide-area AF (S).
Auto-area AF: The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus area. At default settings, the camera gives priority to portrait subjects; if a portrait subject is detected, the selected subject will be indicated by a yellow border (if multiple faces are detected, you can choose your subject using the multi selector). Subject tracking can be activated by pressing the OK button.
A word on Subject tracking:
When Auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode, pressing OK enables focus tracking. The focus point will change to a targeting reticule; position the reticule over the target and either press OK again or press the AF-ON button to start tracking. The focus point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame (in the case of portrait subjects, focus will track the subject’s face). To end tracking, press OK a third time. To exit subject-tracking mode, press the magnifier/question button.
A word on Quick Focus-Point Selection:
or quicker focus-point selection, choose Every other point for Custom Setting a5 (Focus points used) to use only a quarter of the available focus points (the number of points available for Wide-area AF (L) does not change). If you prefer to use the sub-selector for focus-point selection, you can choose Select center focus point for Custom Setting f2 (Custom control assignment) > Sub-selector center to allow the center of the sub-selector to be used to quickly select the center focus point.
The Touch Shutter: Touch controls can be used to focus and release the shutter. Touch the display to focus and lift your finger to release the shutter.
Tap the icon shown in the illustration to choose the operation performed by tapping the display in shooting mode. Choose from the following options:
Touch: Touch the display to position the focus point and focus (autofocus only; the touch shutter cannot be used to focus in manual focus mode). Focus locks while your finger remains on the display; lift your finger to release the shutter. Available only in photo mode.
Touch AF: As above, except that lifting your finger from the display does not release the shutter. If auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode, the camera will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame; to switch to a different subject, tap it in the display.
Off: Touch shutter disabled.
Vibration Reduction
The Nikon Z 6 is equipped with in-camera vibration reduction (VR), other manufacturers call this sensor stabilisation. The VR unit provides compensation for movement along five axes. The effects of vibration reduction are equivalent to a shutter speed up to approximately 5.0 stops. This function can also be used effectively with NIKKOR F lenses, including those not equipped with a VR function, with the Mount Adapter FTZ . To use the Vibration reduction function of a non-CPU lens, set the focal length in “Non-CPU lens data” in the SETUP MENU (see later).
There is an ON (normal) and SPT (Sport) preset.
Vibration reduction may be unavailable with some lenses. When using vibration reduction, wait for the image in the display to stabilize before shooting. With some lenses, the image in the display may also jiggle after the shutter is released; this is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
Sport or On is recommended for panning shots. In Sport, Normal, and On modes, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake).
To prevent unintended results, select Off when the camera is mounted on a tripod unless the tripod head is unsecured or the camera is mounted on a monopod, in which case Normal, Sport, or On is recommended.
Auto Bracketing
Vary exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Bracketing can be used in situations in which getting the right settings is difficult and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject. The following options are available:
Auto bracketing set: Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing is in effect. Choose AE & flash bracketing to perform both exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE bracketing to bracket only exposure, Flash bracketing to perform only flash-level bracketing, WB bracketing to perform white-balance bracketing, or ADL bracketing to perform bracketing using Active D-Lighting.
Number of shots: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
Increment: Choose the amount the selected settings vary with each shot (ADL bracketing excluded).
Amount: Choose how Active D-Lighting varies with each shot (ADL bracketing only).
Multiple Exposure
Record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph.
Multiple exposure mode
On (series): Take a series of multiple exposures. Select Off to resume normal shooting.
On (single photo): Take one multiple exposure.
Off: Exit without creating additional multiple exposures.
Number of shotsChoose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph.Overlay mode
Add: The exposures are overlaid without modification; gain is not adjusted.
Average: Before the exposures are overlaid, the gain for each is divided by the total number of exposures taken (gain for each exposure is set to 1/2 for 2 exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures, etc).
Lighten: The camera compares the pixels in each exposure and uses only the brightest.
HDR (High Dynamic Range)
Used with high contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR) preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at different exposures.
HDR mode:
On (series): Take a series of HDR photographs. Select Off to resume normal shooting.
On (single photo): Take one HDR photograph.
Off: Exit without taking additional HDR photographs.
Exposure differential: Choose the difference in exposure between the two shots that are combined to make an HDR photograph. Choose larger values for high-contrast subjects, or select Auto to let the camera adjust the exposure differential according to the scene.
Smoothing: Choose how much to smooth the boundaries between the shots that make up each HDR photograph.
Interval Timer Shooting
Take photographs at the selected interval until the specified number of shots has been recorded. Select a release mode other than self-timer (E) when using the interval timer.
Start: Start interval timer shooting, either after 3 s (Now selected for Choose start day/time) or at a selected date and time (Choose day/time). Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken.
Choose start day/time: Choose a start option. To start shooting immediately, select Now. To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select Choose day/time.
Interval: Choose the interval (hours, minutes, and seconds) between shots.
Intervals×shots/interval: Choose the number of intervals and the number of shots per interval.
Exposure smoothing: Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match previous shot in exposure modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval between shots.
Silent photography: Select On to silence the shutter during shooting.
Interval priority: Choose whether the camera gives priority to exposure time or interval timing in exposure modes P and A. Select On to ensure photos are taken at the chosen interval, Off to ensure that photos are correctly exposed. If On is selected, be sure the Minimum shutter speed chosen for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu is faster than the interval. You should also focus using manual focus or, if you are using autofocus, choose Release for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection) or Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection) according to whether AF-C or AF-S is selected.
Starting storage folder: Highlight either of the following options and press 2 to select or deselect: New folder: A new folder is created for each new sequence or Reset file numbering: File numbering is reset to 0001 whenever a new folder is created.
Time-Lapse Movie
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to create a silent time-lapse movie.
Start: Start time-lapse recording. Shooting starts after about 3 s and continues at the selected interval for the selected shooting time.
Interval: Choose the interval between shots in minutes and seconds.
Shooting time: Choose the shooting time (hours and minutes).
Exposure smoothing: Selecting On smooths abrupt changes in exposure in exposure modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval between shots.
Silent photography: Select On to silence the shutter during shooting.
Image area: Choose an image area for time-lapse recording. The options are those for the Image area item in the movie shooting menu.
Frame size/frame rate: Choose the frame size and rate for the final movie. The options are those for the Frame size/frame rate item in the movie shooting menu.
Interval priority: Choose whether the camera gives priority to exposure time or interval timing in exposure modes P and A. Select On to ensure frames are taken at the chosen interval, Off to ensure that frames are correctly exposed. If On is selected, be sure the Minimum shutter speed chosen for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu is faster than the interval. You should also focus using manual focus or, if you are using autofocus, choose Release for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection,) or Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection) according to whether AF-C or AF-S is selected.
Focus Shift Shooting
During focus shift, the camera automatically varies focus over a series of photographs. This feature can be used to take photos that will later be combined using focus stacking. Before using focus shift, rotate the focus mode selector to AF and choose a release mode other than timer.
Start: Start shooting. Shooting will take the selected number of shots, changing the focus distance by the selected amount with each shot.
No. of shots: Choose the number of shots (maximum 300).
Focus step width: Choose the amount the focus distance changes with each shot.
Interval until next shot: Choose the interval between shots. Select 00 to take photos at approximately 5 fps (release modes S, Cl, Ch, and Mup) or 3 fps (release modes Q and Qc). To ensure the correct exposure when using a flash, choose an interval long enough for the flash to charge.
Exposure smoothing: Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match previous shot in exposure modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval between shots.
Peaking Stack Image: During Focus Shift Photography, combine the peaking information from each frame into a single image to display during playback.
Silent photography: Select On to silence the shutter during shooting.
Starting storage folder: Highlight either of the following options and press 2 to select or deselect: New folder: A new folder is created for each new sequence. or Reset file numbering: File numbering is reset to 0001 whenever a new folder is created.
MENU → Photo Shooting Menu → page 5
Silent Photography
Select On to reduce vibrations caused by the shutter when shooting landscapes and other static subjects. Use of a tripod is recommended. The flash and long exposure noise reduction are disabled, as are the electronic front-curtain shutter and beep speaker, regardless of the options selected for Custom Setting d5 (Shutter type) and for Beep options in the setup menu. In continuous release modes, the frame advance rate will change.
Enabling silent photography changes the frame advance rates for continuous release modes and disables some features, including the flash, beep speaker, long exposure noise reduction, and the electronic front-curtain shutter.
Although the noise of the mechanical shutter is muted, other sounds may still be audible, for example during autofocus or if the Menu or Play button is pressed when an option other than Off is selected for Vibration reduction. During silent photography, flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the display and in the final picture under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or with subjects that are in motion, particularly if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves horizontally at high speed through the frame. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots may also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear in some areas of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source.
MENU → Movie Shooting Menu → page 1
Reset Movie Shooting Menu
In case of trouble or unexpected behaviour, highlight Yes and press OK to restore movie shooting menu options to their default values.
File Naming
Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the image files in which movies are stored. The default prefix is “DSC”.
Choose Image Area
Choose the image area for movies.
Hack: Auto DX Crop: If On is selected, movies shot using a DX lens will automatically be recorded using the DX (DX-based movie format) image area.
Frame Size/Frame Rate
Choose the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate.
4K UHD (max 29 minutes 59 seconds recording time)
2160 30p: 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 30p 144 Mbps
2160 25p: 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 25p 144 Mbps
2160 24p: 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 24p 144 Mbps
HD (max 29 minutes 59 seconds recording time)
1080 120p: 1920 x 1080 120p; 144 Mbps
1080 100p: 1920 x 1080 100p; 144 Mbps
1080 60p: 1920 x 1080 60p; 56 Mbps
1080 50p: 1920 x 1080 50p; 56 Mbps
1080 25p: 1920 x 1080 25p; 28 Mbps
1080 24p: 1920 x 1080 24p; 28 Mbps
Slow-Mo (max 3 minute recording time)
1080 30p x 4: 1920 x 1080; 30p x 4 (slow-mo) 36 Mbps
1080 25p x 4: 1920 x 1080; 25p x 4 (slow-mo) 36 Mbps
1080 24p x 4: 1920 x 1080; 24p x 5 (slow-mo) 29 Mbps
Movie Quality
You can choose from High quality and Normal.
Movie File Type
Choose the file format for movies from MOV and MP4.
Hack: MP4 is superior!
ISO Sensitivity Settings
You can adjust the following ISO sensitivity settings:
Maximum sensitivity: Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control from values between ISO 200 and Hi 2. Auto ISO sensitivity control is used in exposure modes P, S, and Aand when On is selected for Auto ISO control (mode M) in exposure mode M.
Auto ISO control (mode M): Select On for auto ISO sensitivity control in exposure mode M, Off to use the value selected for ISO sensitivity (mode M).
ISO sensitivity (mode M): Choose the ISO sensitivity for exposure mode M from values between ISO 64 and Hi 2. Auto ISO sensitivity control is used in other exposure modes.
Hack: At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing and noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may increase. This can be prevented by choosing a lower value for the ISO Maximum sensitivity.
White Balance
Choose the white balance for movies (same choices as for the Photo Settings)
MENU → Movie Shooting Menu → page 2
Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control for movies. You’ll also find the Creative Picture Control settings here. You can find presets like Dream, Morning, Pop, Sunday, Sober, Dramatic, Silence, Bleached, Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red, Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary and Carbon. These can off course be edited too.
Manage Picture Control
You can create custom Picture Controls here. (again same procedure as for photos)
Active D-Lighting
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating movies with natural contrast. Select Same as photo settings to use the option currently selected for photos.
Options are Auto, Extra High, High, Normal, Low or Off.
High ISO NR
Reduce “noise” (what Nikon calls randomly-spaced bright pixels) in movies recorded at high ISO sensitivities
Vignette Control
reduce shading or lens vignetting automatically using this function.
Diffraction Compensation
Same as for stills, the Nikon Z6 can automatically reduce the loss of sharpness due to diffraction when lenses are used with an aperture above f/11.
Auto Distortion Control
Automatically corrects for peripheral distortion (requires a lens with a CPU chip with distortion control support.)
Flicker Reduction
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting movies under fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting. Choose Auto to allow the camera to automatically choose the correct frequency, or manually match the frequency to that of the local AC power supply.
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in which case you should try choosing a smaller aperture (higher f-number). To prevent flicker, select mode M and choose a shutter speed adapted to the frequency of the local power supply: 1/125 s, 1/60 s, or 1/30 s for 60 Hz; 1/100 s, 1/50 s, or 1/25 s for 50 Hz.
MENU → Movie Shooting Menu → page 3
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The same options as in the Photo Menu are available.
Matrix metering: The camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and distance for results close to those seen by the naked eye.
Center-weighted metering: The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to an area in the center of the frame, the size of which can be chosen using Custom Setting b3 (Center-weighted area). This is the classic meter for portraits and is also recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
Spot metering: The camera meters a ⌀4 mm circle (equivalent to approximately 1.5% of the frame) centered on the current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if auto-area AF is in effect, the camera will instead meter the center focus point). Spot metering ensures that the subject will be correctly exposed, even when the background is much brighter or darker.
Highlight-weighted metering: The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights. Use this option to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when photographing spotlit performers on-stage.
Focus Mode
At default settings, the focus mode can also be selected by holding the Fn2 button and rotating the main command dial.
AF-S: For stationary subjects. Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in green; focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point will flash red. At default settings, the shutter can only be released if the camera is able to focus (focus priority).
AF-C: For moving subjects. The camera focuses continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if the subject moves, the camera will predict the final distance to the subject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings, the shutter can be released whether or not the subject is in focus (release priority).
AF-F: The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject movement or changes in composition. Focus locks when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. This option is only available in movie mode.
Manual focus: The shutter can be released whether or not the subject is in focus.
AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode controls how the camera selects the focus-point for autofocus.
AF-area mode can also be selected by holding the Fn2 button and rotating the sub-command dial.
Pinpoint AF: Use for pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Single AF is chosen for Focus mode. Focusing may be slower than with single-point AF.
Single-point AF: The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. Use with stationary subjects.
Dynamic-area AF: The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points, letting you concentrate on composition in shots of moving subjects. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Continuous AF is chosen for Focus mode.
Wide-area AF (S or L): As for Single-point AF except that wider focus points are used. The focus points for Wide-area AF (L) are wider than those for Wide-area AF (S).
Auto-area AF: The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus area. At default settings, the camera gives priority to portrait subjects; if a portrait subject is detected, the selected subject will be indicated by a yellow border (if multiple faces are detected, you can choose your subject using the multi selector). Subject tracking can be activated by pressing the OK button.
Hack: For quicker focus-point selection, choose Every other point for Custom Setting a5 (Focus points used) to use only a quarter of the available focus points (the number of points available for Wide-area AF (L) does not change). If you prefer to use the sub-selector for focus-point selection, you can choose Select center focus point for Custom Setting f2 (Custom control assignment) > Sub-selector center to allow the center of the sub-selector to be used to quickly select the center focus point.
Subject Tracking: When Auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode, pressing OK enables focus tracking. The focus point will change to a targeting reticule; position the reticule over the target and either press OK again or press the AF-ON button to start tracking. The focus point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame (in the case of portrait subjects, focus will track the subject’s face). To end tracking, press J a third time. To exit subject-tracking mode, press the mag/question button.
Vibration Reduction
Identical to the Photo Menu again. Only needed when your lens does not have a VR switch. If your lens does have a VR switch, turning it of will turn off both lens and sensor stabilisation.
Electronic VR
Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction in movie mode.
Microphone Sensitivity
Turn the built-in or external microphones on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust sensitivity automatically, Microphone off to turn sound recording off; to select microphone sensitivity manually, select Manual sensitivity and choose a sensitivity.
Attenuator
Select Enable to reduce microphone gain and prevent audio distortion when recording movies in loud environments.
Frequency Response
If S Wide range is selected, the built-in and external microphones will respond to a wide range of frequencies, from music to the bustling hum of a city street. Choose T Vocal range to bring out human voices.
MENU → Movie Shooting Menu → page 4
Wind Noise Reduction
Select On to enable the low-cut filter for the built-in microphone (optional stereo microphones are unaffected), reducing noise produced by wind blowing over the microphone (note that other sounds may also be affected). Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo microphones that support this feature can be enabled or disabled using microphone controls.
Headphone Volume
Adjust the headphone volume here.
Time Code
The Nikon Z6 is quite a capable video camera. It’s possible to write time code to the movie files for alignment in software later.
Record Timecodes
On: Time codes are recorded and appear in the display.
On (with HDMI output): Time codes will be included with footage saved to Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, or SUMO-series Monitor recorders connected via an HDMI cable.
Off: Time codes are not recorded.
Count-Up Method:
Record run: Time codes are incremented only while recording is in progress.
Free run: Time codes are incremented continuously, including while the camera is off.
Timecode origin:
Reset: Reset the time code to 00:00:00.00.
Enter manually: Enter the hour, minute, second, and frame number manually.
Current time: Set the time code to the current time as provided by the camera clock.
Drop Frame:
Select On to compensate for discrepancies between the frame count and the actual recording time at frame rates of 30 and 60 fps.
Count-Up Method:
REC
Timecode origin:
Drop Frame:
ON or OFF
MENU → Custom Setting Menu → page 1
Reset Custom Settings
Resets all Custom settings to the factory settings.
Autofocus Settings
a1 AF-C Priority Selection
When AF-C is selected for photography, this option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).
Release: Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed.
Focus: Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus.
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when AF-C is selected for autofocus mode. The camera will continue to adjust focus until the shutter is released.
a2 AF-S Priority Selection
When AF-S is selected for photography, this option controls whether photographs can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus priority) or whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority).
Release: Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed.
Focus: Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator is displayed.
Regardless of the option selected, if the in-focus indicator is displayed when AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus lock continues until the shutter is released.
a3 Focus Tracking with Lock-on
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to changes in the distance to the subject when AF-C is selected during viewfinder photography.
Choose from values between 5 (Delayed)and 1 (Quick). The higher the value, the slower the response and the less likely you are to lose focus on your original subject. The lower the value, the quicker the response and the easier it is to shift focus to objects crossing your field of view. Note that 2 and 1 (Quick) are equivalent to 3 when auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
a4 Auto-Area AF Face/Eye detection Detection
Choose whether the camera detects and focuses on faces when Auto Area is selected for AF-area mode. Since firmware version 2, this also includes Eye detection.You now how the option to turn both face and eye detection on(great idea for portraits), only face detection on, or both off. Eye detection does not work during movie mode. You need to set the camera to AF-S or AF-C as Focus Mode if you want to use Eye AF as well as Auto Area AF for AF-area Mode.
a5 Focus Points Used
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-point selection.
All: Every focus point available in the current AF-area mode can be selected.
1/2: The number of available focus points is reduced by three quarters (the number of focus points available in Wide-area AF (L) mode does not change). Use for quick focus-point selection.
a6 Store Points by Orientation
Choose whether separate focus points can be selected for “wide” (landscape) orientation, for “tall” (portrait) orientation with the camera rotated 90° clockwise, and for “tall” orientation with the camera rotated 90° counterclockwise.
Select Off to use the same focus point and AF-area mode regardless of camera orientation.
Choose Focus point to enable separate focus-point selection, or Focus point and AF-area mode to enable separate selection of both the focus point and the AF-area mode.
a7 AF Activation
Choose whether the shutter-release button can be used to focus (Shutter/AF-ON) or if focus can only be adjusted using the AF-ON button or other controls to which AF-ON has been assigned (AF-ON only).
a8 Limit AF-area mode Selection
Choose the options that can be selected by rotating the sub-command dial when AF-area mode is assigned to the i menu or a camera control. Highlight the desired modes and press right to select or deselect. Press OK to save changes when settings are complete.
a9 Focus Point Wrap-Around
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of the viewfinder to another
Wrap: Focus-point selection “wraps around” from top to bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left to right, so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted () selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display ().
No wrap: The focus-point display is bounded by the outermost focus points so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected has no effect.
a10 Focus Point Options
Choose from the following focus point display options.
Focus point illumination: Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the viewfinder.
Auto: The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as needed to establish contrast with the background.
On: The selected focus point is always highlighted, regardless of the brightness of the background. Depending on the brightness of the background, the selected focus point may be difficult to see.
Off: The selected focus point is not highlighted.
Manual focus mode: Choose On to display the active focus point in manual focus mode, Off to display the focus point only during focus point selection.
Dynamic-area AF assist: Choose On to display both the selected focus point and the surrounding focus points in dynamic-area AF mode.
a11 Low Light AF
Autofocus is achievable with the Nikon Z6 down to -4EV provided low-light autofocus is activated. only works in Single AF!!!
Choose On for more accurate focus under low-light conditions when AF-S is selected for focus mode, but note that camera may require more time to focus. This option takes effect only in photo mode when a setting other than Auto is chosen with the mode dial. While low-light AF is in effect, “Low-light” will appear in the display and the display refresh rate may drop.
Hack: This slows down autofocus for general photography, so it should be disabled except for focussing in really low light.
a12 Built-In AF-Assist Illuminator
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor.
On: The illuminator lights as required (AF-S focus mode only).
Off: The illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation. The camera may not be able to focus when lighting is poor.
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 1–3 m (3 ft 4 in.–9 ft 10 in.); when using the illuminator, remove the lens hood. Do not obstruct the AF-assist illuminator while it is lit.
a13 Manual Focus Ring In AF Mode
Choose whether the lens focus ring can be used for manual focus in autofocus mode.
Enable: Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens focus ring while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (autofocus with manual override). To refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from the shutter-release button and then press it halfway again.
Disable: The lens focus ring cannot be used for manual focus while autofocus mode is selected.
Metering/Exposure Settings
b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl
Select the increments used when making adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, and bracketing.
b2 Easy exposure compensation
This option controls whether the plus/minus button is needed to set exposure compensation. If On (Auto reset) or On is selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure display will flash even when exposure compensation is set to ±0.
On (Auto reset): Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the command dials (see note below). The setting selected using the command dial is reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires (exposure compensation settings selected using the E button are not reset).
On: As above, except that the exposure compensation value selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires.
Off: Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button and rotating the main command dial.
b3 Center-weighted area
Choose the size of the area given the most weight in center-weighted metering. If a non-CPU lens is attached, the size of the area is fixed at 12 mm.
Remember that the exposure compensation icon is not displayed when exposure fine-tuning is in effect. The only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-tuning menu.
b4 Fine-Tune optimal exposure
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the camera. Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each metering method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV.
Timers/AE Lock Settings
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L
Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release button is pressed.
On (half press): Pressing the shutter-release button halfway locks exposure.
On (burst mode): Exposure only locks while the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.
Off: Pressing the shutter-release button does not lock exposure.
c2 Self-timer
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of shots taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.
Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
Interval between shots: Choose the interval between shots when the Number of shots is more than 1.
c3 Power off delay
Choose how long the monitor remains on when no operations are performed during playback (Playback; defaults to 10 seconds) and image review (Image review; defaults to 4 seconds), when menus (Menus; defaults to 1 minute) or information (Information display; defaults to 10 s) are displayed, or during live view and movie recording (Live view; defaults to 10 minutes). Choose a shorter monitor-off delay for longer battery life.
Shooting/display Settings
d1 CL mode shooting speed
Choose the frame advance rate for low-speed continuous release mode.
d2 Max. continuous release
he maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous release modes can be set to any value between 1 and 200. Note that regardless of the option selected, there is no limit to the number of photos that can be taken in a single burst when a shutter speed of 4 s or slower is selected in mode S or M.
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d2, shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills.
d3 Sync. Release mode options
Choose whether the shutters on the remote cameras are synchronized with the shutter on the master camera when using an optional wireless remote controller in synchronized release mode.
d4 Exposure delay mode
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, shutter release can be delayed by from about 0.2 to 3 seconds after the shutter is engaged.
d5 Shutter type since firmware version 2 (used to be Electronic front-curtain shutter)
You have the choice of Auto, Mechanical shutter, and Electronic front-curtain shutter. If Auto is selected, the camera will automatically choose a shutter type according to shutter speed.
The fastest shutter speed and maximum ISO sensitivity available with the electronic front-curtain shutter are 1/2000 s and ISO 25600, respectively.
d6 Limit selectable image area
Choose the options available when image-area selection is assigned to the i menu or to the command dials and a camera control. Highlight the desired options and press the right arrow to select or deselect. Press OK to save changes when settings are complete.
d7 File number sequence
When a picture is taken, the camera names the file by adding one to the last file number used. This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera.
On: When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.
Off: File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder is created automatically if a picture is taken when the current folder contains 5000 pictures.
Reset: Same as for On, except that the next picture taken is assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder. If the folder is empty, file numbering is reset to 0001.
d8 Apply settings to live view
Choose On to preview how changes to such settings as white balance, Picture Controls, and exposure compensation affect color and brightness in photo mode, or select Off to adjust brightness and hue for ease of viewing (regardless of the option selected, the effects of the aforementioned settings are always visible in movie mode).
d9 Framing grid display
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for reference when composing photos.
d10 Peaking highlights
When focus peaking is enabled in manual focus mode, objects that are in focus are indicated by colored outlines in the display. Choose the peaking level and outline color.
Peaking level: Choose from 3 (high sensitivity), 2 (standard), 1 (low sensitivity), and Off; the higher the value, the greater the depth that will be shown as being in focus.
Peaking highlight color: Choose the highlight color.
d11 View all in continuous mode
Choose whether image review is available during burst shooting. If Off is selected, not only the monitor but also the monitor backlight will turn off during exposures.
Bracketing/Flash Settings
e1 Flash Sync Speed
This option controls flash sync speed.
1/250 s (Auto FP): Auto FP high-speed sync is used when a compatible flash unit is attached. If other flash units are used, shutter speed is set to 1/250 s. When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1/250 s in exposure mode P or A, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1/250 s. If the flash unit supports auto FP high-speed sync, shutter speeds as fast as 1/8000 s can be selected by the camera (modes P and A) or by the user (modes S and M).
1/250 s–1/60 s: Flash sync speed set to selected value.
Hack: Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit: To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or manual exposure modes, select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed (30 s or %). An X (flash sync indicator) will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel together with the flash sync speed.
Hack: Auto FP High-Speed Sync: Auto FP high-speed sync allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright sunlight. The information display flash mode indicator shows “FP” when auto FP high-speed sync is active.
e2 Flash Shutter Speed
Choose the slowest shutter speed available when front- or rear-curtain sync or red-eye reduction is used in mode P or A (regardless of the setting chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in modes S and M or at flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction with slow sync).
e3 Exposure comp. for flash
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure compensation is used.
Entire frame: Both flash level and exposure compensation are adjusted to modify exposure over the entire frame.
Background only: Exposure compensation applies to background only.
e4 Auto ISO sensitivity control (with flash)
Choose the reference used to set exposure when a flash is used with auto ISO sensitivity control.
Subject and background: The camera takes both the main subject and background lighting into account when adjusting ISO sensitivity.
Subject only: ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the main subject is correctly exposed.
e 5 Modeling Flash
If On is selected when the camera is used with an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting system, a modeling flash will be emitted when the camera Pv button is pressed. No modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected.
e6 Auto bracketing (mode M)
This option determines which settings are affected when AE & flash bracketing or AE bracketing is selected for the Auto bracketing set option in the photo shooting menu in manual exposure mode.
Flash/speed: Camera varies shutter speed (AE bracketing) or shutter speed and flash level (AE & flash bracketing).
Flash/speed/aperture: Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (AE bracketing) or shutter speed, aperture, and flash level (AE & flash bracketing).
Flash/aperture: Camera varies aperture (AE bracketing) or aperture and flash level (AE & flash bracketing).
Flash only:Camera varies flash level only (AE & flash bracketing).
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or qA (auto aperture) flash control. If a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used, ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot when auto ISO sensitivity control is on.
e7 Bracketing order
At the default setting of MTR > under > over, exposure, flash, and white balance bracketing are performed in the following order: the unmodified shot is taken first, followed by the shot with the lowest value, followed by the shot with the highest value. If Under > MTR > over (plus to minus) is selected, shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value. This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.
Controls Settings
f1 Customize i menu
Customise the appearance of the i Menu. What’s included and what not.
Split-Screen Display Zoom: When assigned to the i menu, Split-screen display zoom can be used to split the display into two boxes showing separate areas of the frame side-by-side at a high zoom ratio. The positions of the magnified areas are shown in the navigation window, making it easier to check focus at two different locations when photographing a building or other wide object situated at right angles to the camera.
f2 Custom control assignment
Choose the functions assigned to camera controls, whether used individually or in combination with the command dials.
f3 OK button
Customise the functionality if the OK button.
Shooting mode: Choose from the options below. Regardless of the option selected, the OK button can be used for focus tracking when auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
Select center focus point: Pressing OK selects the center focus point.
Zoom on/off: Press OK to zoom the display in on the area around the current focus point (to choose the zoom ratio, highlight Zoom on/off and press right).
None: Pressing J during shooting has no effect.
Playback mode: Choose from the options below. Regardless of the option selected, pressing OK when a movie is displayed full frame starts movie playback.
Thumbnail on/off: Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail playback.
View histograms: In both full-frame and thumbnail playback, a histogram is displayed while the OK button is pressed.
Zoom on/off: Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback and playback zoom (to choose the zoom ratio, highlight Zoom on/off and press right). The zoom display is centered on the active focus point.
Choose folder: A folder-selection dialog will be displayed; highlight a folder and press OK to view the pictures in the selected folder.
f4 Shutter Spd & aperture lock
Selecting On for Shutter speed lock locks shutter speed at the value currently selected in mode S or M. Selecting On for Aperture lock locks aperture at the value currently selected in mode A or M. Shutter speed and aperture lock are not available in mode P.
f5 Customize command dials
This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command dials.
Reverse rotation: Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dials for selected operations. Highlight options and press right to select or deselect, and then press OK to save changes and exit.
Change main/sub: Choose the roles played by the command dials for exposure and focus operations.
Exposure setting: If On is selected, the main command dial will control aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed. If On (Mode A) is selected, the main command dial will be used to set aperture in mode A only.
Autofocus setting: This option applies to the control assigned Focus mode/AF-area mode using Custom Setting f2 (Custom control assignment). If On is selected, the focus mode can be chosen by keeping the control pressed and rotating the sub-command dial, AF-area mode by keeping the AF-mode button pressed and rotating the main command dial.
Menus and playback: Select Off to use the multi selector for menus and playback. If On or On (image review excluded) is selected, the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback and to highlight thumbnails and menu items. The sub-command dial is used in full-frame playback to skip forward or back according to the option selected for Sub-dial frame advance and in thumbnail playback to page up or down. While menus are displayed, rotating the sub-command dial right displays the sub-menu for the highlighted option, while rotating it left displays the previous menu. To make a selection, press 2 or J. Select On (image review excluded) to prevent the command dials from being used for playback during image review.
Sub-dial frame advance: When On or On (image review excluded) is selected for Menus and playback, the sub-command dial can be rotated during full-frame playback to select a folder, to skip forward or back 10 or 50 frames at a time, or to skip to the next or previous protected picture, the next or previous photo, the next or previous movie, or the next or previous picture with a selected rating (to choose the rating, highlight Rating and press right).
f6 Release Button to use dial
Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released. This setting applies to the plus/minus, ISO, and timer buttons and also to controls to which the following roles have been assigned using Custom Settings f2 or g2 (Custom control assignment): Choose image area, Image quality/size, White balance, Set Picture Control, Active D-Lighting, Metering, Flash mode/compensation, Focus mode/AF-area mode, Auto bracketing, Multiple exposure, HDR (high dynamic range), Exposure delay mode, Shutter spd & aperture lock, Peaking highlights, Choose non-CPU lens number, and Microphone sensitivity.
f7 Reverse indicators
If (W) is selected, the exposure indicators in the control panel, viewfinder, and information display are displayed with negative values on the left and positive values on the right. Select (V) to display positive values on the left and negative values on the right.
Movie Settings
g1 Customize i Menu
Choose the functions assigned to camera controls, whether used individually or in combination with the command dials, when you press i.
g2 Custom control assignment
Assign the custom controls for operation when in movie mode. Power aperture is available only in modes A and M. The display may flicker while aperture is adjusted.
g3 OK button
Choose the role assigned to the J button in movie mode. Regardless of the option selected, the OK button can be used for focus tracking when auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
Select center focus point: Pressing OK selects the center focus point.
Zoom on/off: Press OK to zoom the display in on the area around the current focus point (to choose the zoom ratio, highlight Zoom on/off and press right).
Record movies: Press OK to start and stop movie recording.
None: Pressing OK has no effect.
g4 AF Speed
Change the speed of the autofocus for movie mode. o choose when the selected option applies, highlight When to apply and press right. Choose from Always (the selected option applies whenever the camera is in movie mode) and Only while recording (the selected option applies only while recording is in progress; at other times, the focus speed is “+5”, or in other words as fast possible).
g5 AF tracking sensitivity
Choose how quickly focus responds when your subject leaves the focus point or something passes between the subject and the camera in movie mode. Choose from values between 7 (Low) and 1 (High). The higher the value, the slower the response and the less likely you are to lose focus on your original subject when something passes between the subject and the camera. The lower the value, the quicker the camera is to respond to the subject leaving the focus area by shifting focus to a new subject in the same area.
g6 Highlight display
Choose whether shading is used to indicate highlights (bright areas of the frame) and select the level of brightness needed to trigger the highlight display.
Display pattern: To enable the highlight display, select Pattern 1 or Pattern 2.
Highlight display threshold: Choose the brightness needed to trigger the movie highlight display. The lower the value, the greater the range of brightnesses that will be shown as highlights. If 255 is selected, the highlight display will show only areas that are potentially overexposed.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 1
Format Memory Card
To begin formatting, choose a memory card slot and select Yes. Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card in the selected slot. Before formatting, be sure to make backup copies as required.
Save User Settings
Frequently-used combinations of settings can be assigned to the U1, U2, and U3 positions on the mode dial.
Follow the steps below to save settings:
Select a mode.
Rotate the mode dial to the desired mode.
Adjust settings.
Choose a focus point and make the desired adjustments to flexible program (mode P), shutter speed (modes S and M), exposure and flash compensation, aperture (modes A and M), and settings in the photo shooting, movie shooting, and Custom Settings menus.
Select Save user settings.
Highlight Save user settings in the setup menu and press 2.
Select a position.
Highlight Save to U1, Save to U2, or Save to U3 and press 2.
Save user settings.
Highlight Save settings and press J to assign the settings selected in Steps 1 and 2 to the mode dial position selected in Step 4.
Reset User Settings
Reset settings for U1, U2, and U3 to default values.
Language
Choose a language for camera menus and messages.
Time Zone And Date
Change time zones, set the camera clock, synchronize the clock with the clock on a smart device, choose the date display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.
Time zone: Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the new time zone.
Date and time: Set the camera clock.
Date format: Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed.
Daylight saving time: Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will automatically be advanced or set back one hour. The default setting is Off.
Monitor Brightness
Press the up or down arrow to adjust monitor brightness. Choose higher values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
Note that monitor brightness can only be adjusted when the monitor is the active display; it cannot be adjusted in the “viewfinder only” monitor mode or when your eye is to the viewfinder.
Monitor Color Balance
Use the multi selector as shown below to adjust monitor color balance with reference to a sample image. The sample image is the last photograph taken or, in playback mode, the last photograph displayed; to choose a different image, press the mag/question button and select an image from a thumbnail list (to view the highlighted image full frame, press and hold magnify). If the memory card contains no photographs, an empty frame with a gray border will be displayed in place of the sample image. Press OK to exit when adjustments are complete.
Note that monitor color balance can only be adjusted when the monitor is the active display; it cannot be adjusted in the “viewfinder only” monitor mode or when your eye is to the viewfinder. Monitor color balance applies only to the shooting, playback, and menu displays; pictures taken with the camera are not affected.
Viewfinder Brightness
Adjust viewfinder brightness. If Auto is selected, viewfinder brightness will be adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions; to adjust brightness manually, select Manual and press up or down (choose higher values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness). Note that viewfinder brightness can only be adjusted when the viewfinder is the active display; it cannot be adjusted when the viewfinder is off or in the “monitor only” monitor mode.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 2
Viewfinder Color Balance
Use the multi selector to adjust viewfinder color balance as described in Monitor Color Balance.
Control Panel Brightness
The control pannel is located on the top of the camera housing. You can change the brightness of this monochrome LED pannel. If Auto is selected, control panel brightness will be adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions; to adjust brightness manually, select Manual and press up or down. Selecting Off turns the control panel off.
Hack: Set to Auto, this will dim the panel in low light.
Limit Monitor Mode Selection
Choose the monitor modes that can be selected using the monitor mode button. Highlight the desired options and press right to select or deselect. Press OK to save changes when settings are complete.
Information Display
If Auto (AUTO) is selected, the color of the lettering in the information display will automatically change from black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background. To always use the same color lettering, select Manual and choose Dark on light (B; black lettering) or Light on dark (W; white lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color.
AF fine-tune
Fine-tune focus for up to 20 lens types. Use only as required; AF tuning is not recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal focus. Auto fine-tuning is available in live view. We recommend that you perform fine-tuning at a focus distance you use frequently; if you perform focus-tuning at a short focus distance, for example, you may find it less effective at longer distances.
AF fine-tune (On/Off): Choose On to turn AF tuning on, Off to turn it off.
Saved value: Tune AF for the current lens. Press 1 to move focal point away from camera or 3 to move focal point toward camera; choose from values between +20 and –20. The camera can store values for up to 30 lens types. Only one value can be stored for each type of lens.
Default: Choose the AF tuning value used when no previously saved value exists for the current lens.
List saved values: List previously saved AF tuning values. To delete a lens from the list, highlight the desired lens and press O. To change a lens identifier (for example, to choose an identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value can be used with only one lens of each type), highlight the desired lens and press the trash icon. A menu will be displayed; press up or down to choose an identifier and press OK to save changes and exit.
Non CPU Lens Data
Record the focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses, allowing them to be used with functions normally reserved for CPU lenses.
Lens number: Choose a number to identify the lens.
Focal length (mm): Enter the focal length.
Maximum aperture: Enter the maximum aperture.
Clean Image Sensor
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or the body cap is removed may adhere to the image sensor and affect your photographs. The Clean image sensor option vibrates the sensor to remove dust.
Hack: Set to Automatic Cleaning. You’ll notice that mirrorless cameras like the Nikon Z6 collect a lot of dust on the sensor due to the fact that there is no mirror. This makes life easier and will reduce the amount of wet sensor cleaning you’ll have to do.
Image Dust Off ref Photo
cquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D (for more information, refer to Capture NX-D online help). Image Dust Off cannot be used with small or medium-sized NEF (RAW) images.
An FX lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended when recording Image Dust Off reference data. When using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the following options and press J. To exit without acquiring image dust off data, press G.
Start: A message will be displayed.
Clean sensor and then start: Select this option to clean the image sensor before starting. A message will be displayed when cleaning is complete.
Frame a featureless white object in the display.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the display and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
Acquire dust off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data and a message will be displayed. Choose another reference object and repeat the process from Step 1.
Image Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed cannot be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean sensor and then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs.
Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures. Reference images cannot be viewed using computer imaging software. A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 3
Image Comment
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or Capture NX-D. The comment is also visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display. The following options are available:
Input comment: Input a comment as described in “Text Entry”. Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
Attach comment: Select this option to attach the comment to all subsequent photographs. Attach comment can be turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2. After choosing the desired setting, press OK to exit.
Copyright Information
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken. Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in the photo information display and can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or in Capture NX-D. The following options are available:
Artist: Enter a photographer name as described in “Text Entry”. Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described in “Text Entry”. Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters long.
Attach copyright information: Select this option to attach copyright information to all subsequent photographs. Attach copyright information can be turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2. After choosing the desired setting, press J to exit.
Beep Options
Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when:
The self-timer is in operation
Time-lapse recording ends
The camera focuses in photo mode (AF-S selected for focus mode; Focus selected for Custom Setting a2, AF-S priority selection; and Off selected for Silent photography)
The touch screen is used for keyboard entry
The Beep options menu contains the following items:
Beep on/off: Turn the beep speaker on or off, or select Off (touch controls only) to disable the beep during keyboard entry while enabling it for other purposes.
Volume: Adjust beep volume.
Pitch: Choose the pitch of the beep from High and Low.
Touch Controls
Adjust monitor touch control settings.
Enable/Disable Touch Controls: Select Disable to prevent accidental use of touch-screen controls, or Playback only to enable touch-screen controls in playback mode only.
Full-Frame Playback Flicks: Choose the gesture used to display the next image in full-frame playback: a flick from right to left or a flick from left to right.
HDMI
Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices. The camera can record video directly to connected HDMI recorders. Some recorders will even start and stop recording in response to camera controls. Use the HDMI option in the setup menu to adjust settings for HDMI output.
Output Resolution: Choose the format for images output to the HDMI device. If Auto is selected, the camera will automatically select the appropriate format.
Advanced: Adjust the settings below.
Output range: Auto is recommended in most situations. If the camera is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal output range for the HDMI device, you can choose Limited range for devices with an RGB video signal input range of 16 to 235 or Full range for devices with an RGB video signal input range of 0 to 255. Choose Limited range if you notice a loss of detail in shadows, Full range if shadows are “washed out” or too bright.
External recording control: Enabling external recording control allows camera controls to be used to start and stop recording when the camera is connected via HDMI to a third-party recorder that supports the Atomos Open Protocol (Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, or SUMO-series Monitor recorders). An icon will be displayed in the camera monitor: A is displayed in movie live view, while B is displayed during movie recording. During recording, check the recorder and recorder display to ensure that footage is being saved to the device (note that the footage output to the device may be disrupted while external recording control is in effect). The camera display will turn off automatically when the standby timer expires, ending HDMI output; when recording movies to an external device, select Standby timer for Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay) and choose No limit or a time longer than the anticipated recording time. See the manual provided with the recorder for more information on device features and operation.
Output data depth: Choose from 8 bit and 10 bit.
N-Log setting: Select On (cannot record to card) to preserve details in highlights and shadows and avoid over-saturated colors when recording movies. Choose this option (available only when 10 bit is selected for Output data depth) when recording footage that will later be color-corrected. The footage will be recorded directly to the external device and cannot be saved to the camera memory card. The ISO sensitivity settings > Maximum sensitivity and ISO sensitivity (Mode M) options in the movie shooting menu can be set to values of from ISO 1600 to 25600 and ISO 800 to 25600, respectively.
View assist: Choose On for a live preview of video footage recorded with On (cannot record to card) selected for N-Log setting. The colors in the preview will differ from those of the final movie, but this has no effect on the footage actually recorded.
HDMI Output:
HDMI output is not available at movie frame sizes of 1920 × 1080 120p, 1920 × 1080 100p, or 1920 × 1080 slow-mo or when the camera is connected to a device running SnapBridge or Camera Control Pro 2.
10-Bit Output Data Depth:
10 bit can be used only with compatible recorders. Regardless of the display mode selected, the camera monitor will turn on and the viewfinder will remain blank. No photos can be taken; during movie recording, the following additional restrictions apply when 3840 × 2160 is selected for frame size:
Movies are not recorded to memory cards inserted in the camera.
Icons and characters in the monitor will display at low resolution.
Selecting the DX image area reduces the angle of view to about 90%.
Zoom
Movies filmed at a frame size of 3840 × 2160 are displayed at a size of 1920 × 1080 when zoomed in.
Location Data
Adjust settings for use when the camera is connected to a device that provides location data, namely a GPS receiver or a smart device running the SnapBridge app (for more information on SnapBridge, see the app’s online help).
Standby timer: If Enable is selected when a GPS receiver is connected, the exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the period specified Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay) > Standby timer, reducing the drain on the battery.
Position: View the location data supplied by the GPS receiver or smart device (the items displayed vary with the source).
Set clock from satellite: Select Yes to synchronize the camera clock with the time reported by the GPS device.
Wireless Remote (WR) Options
Adjust settings for optional WR-R10 wireless remote controllers and for optional radio-controlled flash units that support Advanced Wireless Lighting.
LED Lamp:
Enable or disable the status LEDs on a WR-R10 wireless remote controller mounted on the camera. For more information, see the documentation supplied with the wireless remote controller.
Link Mode:
Choose a link mode for WR-R10 wireless remote controllers mounted on other cameras or radio-controlled flash units that support Advanced Wireless Lighting. Be sure that the same mode is selected for the other devices.
Pairing: To pair the camera with a WR-R10, mount the WR-R10 on the camera and press the pairing button.
PIN: Connect using a four-digit PIN code. Press 4 or 2to highlight digits and press 1 or 3 to change, then press J to enter and display the selected PIN.
Regardless of the option selected for Link mode, signals from paired wireless remote controllers will always be received by the WR-R10. Users of the WR-1 wireless remote controller will need to select pairing as the WR-1 link mode.
Assign remote (WR) Fn Button
Choose the role played by the Fn button on optional wireless remote controllers equipped with an Fn button.
Airplane Mode
Select Enable to disable the wireless features of Eye-Fi cards and Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connections to smart devices. Connections to other devices using a wireless transmitter can only be disabled by removing the transmitter from the camera.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 4
Connect To Smart Device
Adjust settings for connection to smart devices.
Start: Follow on-screen instructions to connect to the smart device.
Password protection: Choose a password for smart device connections and turn password protection on or off.
Use SnapBridge to control the camera remotely from a smart device and download pictures from the camera. SnapBridge is available free-of-charge from the Apple App Store and on Google Play.
Connect To PC
If On is selected, new photos will automatically be uploaded to the PC.
Connecting via USB:
If the supplied USB cable is used to connect the camera to a computer running ViewNX-i, you can copy pictures to the computer, where they can be viewed, edited, and organized.
Installing ViewNX-i:
Download the ViewNX-i installer from the following website and follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation (existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as earlier versions may not support the camera). An Internet connection is required. For system requirements and other information, see the Nikon website for your region.
Copying Pictures to the Computer
For detailed instructions, see the online help for ViewNX-i.
Connect the USB cable.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown.
USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
Use a Reliable Power Source
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged.
Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
Turn the camera on.
The Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX-i will start (if a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select Nikon Transfer 2).
Windows 7
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as described below.
Double-click .
Windows 10 and Windows 8.1
Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 may display an AutoPlay prompt when the camera is connected. Tap or click the dialog and then tap or click Nikon Transfer 2 to select Nikon Transfer 2.
macOS/OS X
If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, confirm that the camera is connected and then launch Image Capture (an application that comes with macOS or OS X) and select Nikon Transfer 2 as the application that opens when the camera is detected.
Under Import pictures and videos, click Change program. A program selection dialog will be displayed; select Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.
Click Start Transfer.
Pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer.
Click Start Transfer
Transferring Movies
Do not attempt to transfer movies from the memory card while it is inserted in another camera. Doing so could result in the movies being deleted without being transferred.
During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress.
Turn the camera off.
Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete.
Wireless Networks (Wi-Fi)
The following methods can be used to connect to a computer via Wi-Fi. For more information.
Built-in Wi-Fi
Use the Connect to PC option in the camera setup menu to connect to computers either directly or via a wireless router.
Connection via a wireless router
Direct wireless connection
Wireless Transmitter (WT-7)
Adjust settings for optional WT-7 wireless remote controllers and for optional radio-controlled flash units that support Advanced Wireless Lighting.
When the camera is connected to an optional WT-7 wireless transmitter, the Wireless transmitter (WT-7) option in the setup menu can be used for connection to computers or ftp servers.
Use the WT-7 for connection to Ethernet networks and for more reliable connections to wireless networks. With Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately), the camera can be controlled remotely and pictures saved directly to the computer as they are taken.
Conformity Marking
View a selection of the standards with which the camera complies.
Battery Info
View information on the battery currently inserted in the camera.
Charge: The current battery level expressed as a percentage.
No. of shots: The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since the battery was last charged. Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset white balance.
Battery age: A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates that battery performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the battery has reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced. Note that fresh batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in charging life; the battery age display will however return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
Slot Empty Release Lock
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode). If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.
Save/Load Settings
Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory card (if the card is full, an error will be displayed). Use this option to share settings among Nikon Z6 cameras.
Reset All Settings
Reset all settings except Language and Time zone and date to their default values. Copyright information and other user-generated entries are also reset. We recommend that you save settings using the Save/load settings option in the setup menu before performing a reset.
MENU → Setup Menu → page 5
Firmware Version
View the current camera firmware version of your Nikon Z6 and attached lens.
MENU → Retouch Menu → page 1
NEF (RAW) Processing
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs. If you displayed the retouch menu by pressing the G button, you can use this option to copy multiple images.
Select NEF (RAW) processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch menu and press 2.
Choose how images are selected.
Choose from the following options:
Select image(s): Select one or more images manually.
Select date: Create JPEG copies of all the NEF (RAW) images taken on selected dates.
Select all images: Create JPEG copies of all the NEF (RAW) images on the memory card (proceed to Step 4).
Select photographs.
If you chose Select image(s) in Step 2, a picture selection dialog will be displayed listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera. Highlight images using the multi selector and press the W (Q) button to select or deselect; selected images are indicated by a Licon. To view the highlighted image full screen, press and hold the X button. Press J to proceed to Step 4 when your selection is complete.
If you chose Select date in Step 2, a list of dates will be displayed. Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to select or deselect. Press J to select all NEF (RAW) pictures taken on the chosen dates and proceed to Step 4.
Choose settings for the JPEG copies.
Adjust the settings listed below, or select Original to use the setting in effect when the photograph was taken (the original settings are listed below the preview). Note that exposure compensation can only be set to values between −2 and +2 EV.
1
Image quality
2
Image size
3
White balance
4
Exposure compensation
5
Set Picture Control
6
High ISO NR
7
Color space
8
Vignette control
9
Active D-Lighting
10
Diffraction compensation
Copy the photographs.
Highlight EXE and press J to create a JPEG copy of the selected photograph (if multiple photos are selected, a confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J to create JPEG copies of the selected photos). To exit without copying the photographs, press the Gbutton.
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy as described below.
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy as described below.
To reduce size of the crop: Press mag/question button.
To increase size of the crop: Press magnifier.
To change the crop aspect ratio: Rotate the main command dial.
To position the crop: Use the multi selector. Keep the multi selector pressed to move the crop rapidly to the desired position.
To create a cropped copy: Press OK to save the current crop as a separate file. The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and appears at upper left in the crop display.
Resize
Create small copies of selected photographs.
Select Resize.
Highlight Resize in the N tab and press 2.
Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and press 2.
Highlight the desired size and press J.
Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image(s) and press 2.
Highlight pictures and press W (Q) to select or deselect (to view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button). Selected pictures are marked by a 8 icon. Press J when the selection is complete. Note that photographs taken at an image-area setting of 5 : 4 (30×24), 1 : 1 (24×24), or 16 : 9 (36×20) cannot be resized.
Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Highlight Yesand press J to save the resized copies.
D-Lighting
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photos.
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs.
Press left or right to choose the amount of correction performed. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to save the retouched copy.
Red-Eye Correction
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and is available only with photographs taken using the flash. The photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and press OK to create a copy. Note that red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.
Straighten
Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2 to rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments of approximately 0.25 degrees, 4 to rotate it counterclockwise (the effect can be previewed in the edit display; note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy). Press OK to save the retouched copy.
Distortion Control
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select Manual to reduce distortion manually. Note that Auto is not available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see “Auto Distortion Control”. Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pincushion distortion (the effect can be previewed in the edit display; note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to save the retouched copy. Note that distortion control may heavily crop or distort the edges of copies created from photographs taken with DX lenses at image areas other than DX (24×16).
Perspective Control
Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from the base of a tall object. Use the multi selector to adjust perspective (note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more of the edges being cropped out). The results can be previewed in the edit display. Press OK to save the retouched copy.
MENU → Retouch Menu → page 2
Image Overlay
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size. To create a NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW) and an image size of Large (the overlay will be saved as a large NEF/RAW image even if Small or Medium is selected).
Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press 2. Image overlay options will be displayed, with Image 1highlighted; press J to display a picture selection dialog listing only large NEF (RAW) images created with this camera (small and medium NEF/RAW images cannot be selected).
Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to highlight the first photograph in the overlay. To view the highlighted photograph full frame, press and hold the mag button. Press OK to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display.
Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight Image 2 and press OK, then select the second photo as described in Step 2.
Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to select the gain from values between 0.1 and 2.0. Repeat for the second image. The default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it. The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.
Preview the overlay.
To preview the composition, press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in the Preview column, then press up or down to highlight Overlay and press OK (note that colors and brightness in the preview may differ from the final image). To save the overlay without displaying a preview, select Save. To return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press mag/question button.
Save the overlay.
Press OK while the preview is displayed to save the overlay. After an overlay is created, the resulting image will be displayed full-frame.
Trim Movie
Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed.
Choose Start/End Point
Follow the steps below to create trimmed copies of movies.
Display a movie full frame.
Pause the movie on the new opening frame.
Play the movie back as described in “Viewing Movies”, pressing OK to start and resume playback and down to pause, and pressing left or right or rotating the main or sub-command dial to locate the desired frame. Your approximate position in the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar. Pause playback when you reach the new opening frame.
Movie progress bar
Select Choose start/end point.
Press the i button to display the i menu, then highlight Choose start/end point and press OK.
Select Start point.
To create a copy that begins from the current frame, highlight Start point and press OK. The frames before the current frame will be removed when you save the copy in Step 9.
Start point
Confirm the new start point.
If the desired frame is not currently displayed, press 4or 2 to advance or rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back, rotate the main command dial; to skip to the first or last frame, rotate the sub-command dial).
Choose the end point.
Press the center of the sub-selector to switch from the start point (w) to the end point (x) selection tool and then select the closing frame as described in Step 5. The frames after the selected frame will be removed when you save the copy in Step 9.
Sub-selector
End point
Create the copy.
Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1.
Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight Preview and press OK (to interrupt the preview and return to the save options menu, press 1). To abandon the current copy and select a new start point or end point as described above, highlight Cancel and press J; to save the copy, proceed to Step 9.
Save the copy.
Highlight Save as new file and press J to save the copy to a new file. To replace the original movie file with the edited copy, highlight Overwrite existing file and press OK.
Trim Movie
Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed.
MENU → My Menu
he MY MENU option can be used to create and edit a customized list of options from the playback, photo shooting, movie shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus for quick access (up to 20 items). If desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu.
Add Items
Add items to My Menu
Rewove Items
Remove Items from my menu.
Rank Items
change the ranking of your added items.
Choose Tab
Choose a tab for your added item.
The i Menu
The most used functions in the main Menu can also be easily accessed by pressing the “I” on the back plate of the camera. This will bring you too the i Menu. This menu is completely customisable for both Photo and Movie mode (Controls Settings f1 – Customize i menu). We’ll have a quick look at the functionality added to this Menu as factory settings.
Here you can change settings for the internal processing of picture data from the image sensor into final JPG files.
It’s necessary to start with an existing configuration or set of settings that Nikon has predefined for a certain look of the final image. You can choose between:
Auto: Your Nikon Z6 automatically detects the type of scene.
Standard: Nikon‘s default for a neutral picture as the standard for most shooting situations.
Neutral: A processing with slightly less sharpening, contrast improvement and saturation; for those who do these steps on their own later on.
Vivid: Higher color saturation, sharpening and contrast.
Monochrome: Converts into black and white.
Portrait: Very similar to „neutral“, slightly less sharpening, contrast and color saturation than „standard“.
Landscape: Higher contrast than „standard“.
You can also choose between a range of picture presets like Dream, Morning, Pop, Sunday, Sober, Dramatic, Silence, Bleached, Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red, Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary and Carbon.
Image Quality
NEF (RAW): RAW data from the image sensor are saved without additional processing. Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted after shooting.
NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine/NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal/NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic/NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic: Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality JPEG image.
JPEG fine/JPEG fine: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).
JPEG normal/JPEG normal: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).
JPEG basic/JPEG basic: Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).
TIFF (RGB): Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color). TIFF is supported by a wide variety of imaging applications.
Flash Control
Choose the flash control mode for optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe and adjust settings for off-camera flash photography. See the flash control settings in the menu for more info.
WiFi connection
Turn On/Off the WiFi connection.
Release Mode
Single frame: The camera takes one photograph each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
Continuous low speed: While shutter-release button is held down, camera takes photographs at frame rate selected for Custom Setting d1 (CL mode shooting speed)
Continuous high speed: While shutter-release button is held down, camera takes photographs at frame rate given in “Power Source and Frame Rate” Use for active subjects.
Continuous high speed plus: only with jpeg.
Self-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer.
AF Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.
Pinpoint AF: Use for pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Single AF is chosen for Focus mode. Focusing may be slower than with single-point AF.
Single-point AF: Select the focus point; the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects. the ability to limit point selection to every other point allows you to quickly use the joystick, or touchscreen, to position the AF point.
Dynamic-area AF: The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points, letting you concentrate on composition in shots of moving subjects. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Continuous AF is chosen for Focus mode.
Wide-area AF (S) and (L): As for Single-point AF except that wider focus points are used. The focus points for Wide-area AF (L) are wider than those for Wide-area AF (S).
Auto-area AF: The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus area. At default settings, the camera gives priority to portrait subjects; if a portrait subject is detected, the selected subject will be indicated by a yellow border (if multiple faces are detected, you can choose your subject using the multi selector). Subject tracking can be activated by pressing the OK button.
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from Large, Medium, or Small (note that image size varies depending on the option selected for Image area.
White Balance
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source. Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If the desired results cannot be achieved with auto white balance, choose an option from the list below or use preset white balance.
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The following options are available:
Matrix metering: The camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and distance for results close to those seen by the naked eye.
Center-weighted metering: The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to an area in the center of the frame, the size of which can be chosen using Custom Setting b3 (Center-weighted area). This is the classic meter for portraits and is also recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
Spot metering: The camera meters a ⌀4 mm circle (equivalent to approximately 1.5% of the frame) centered on the current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if auto-area AF is in effect, the camera will instead meter the center focus point). Spot metering ensures that the subject will be correctly exposed, even when the background is much brighter or darker.
Highlight-weighted metering: The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights. Use this option to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when photographing spotlit performers on-stage.
Face Tracking
Turn on face tracking, or automatic face detection and autofocus tracking.
Vibration Reduction
The Nikon Z 6 is equipped with in-camera vibration reduction (VR), other manufacturers call this sensor stabilisation. The VR unit provides compensation for movement along five axes. The effects of vibration reduction are equivalent to a shutter speed up to approximately 5.0 stops. This function can also be used effectively with NIKKOR F lenses, including those not equipped with a VR function, with the Mount Adapter FTZ . ).
There is an ON (normal) and SPT (Sport) preset.
Focus Mode
AF-S: For stationary subjects. Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in green; focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point will flash red. At default settings, the shutter can only be released if the camera is able to focus (focus priority).
AF-C: For moving subjects. The camera focuses continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if the subject moves, the camera will predict the final distance to the subject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings, the shutter can be released whether or not the subject is in focus (release priority).
AF-F: The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject movement or changes in composition. Focus locks when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. This option is only available in movie mode.
Manual focus: The shutter can be released whether or not the subject is in focus.
Quick how-to Nikon Z6 settings
How to set-up back button focussing
Back button focussing is a focussing and composition method where you disconnect the autofocus engine from the standard shutter button half-press. This enables you to engage the autofocus system only with the AF-ON button on the backplate.
Now your autofocus and shutter are disconnected, enabling you to acquire autofocus independently from the shutter button action. This method is often used to recompose your shot after autofocus is acquired, the so-called focus and recompose method.
This is very easy the set up with the Nikon Z6:
Go to a7 in the autofocus menu and set AF activation to AF-ON only. This way, only the AF ON button will engage the autofocus engine.
Conclusion
There is always a learning curve with every new camera you purchase. Luckily, Nikon decided to keep the hierarchy and the logic of their DSLR series cameras in the new Nikon Z6. This makes art easier to navigate at least for photographers experienced with those cameras. The Nikon Z6 is fairly new so I’ll add more tips and tricks to this post as I get more and more familiar with it. If you have any comments or questions, or just want to write about your experience with the Z6, feel free to post them in the comment section below.
Welcome to my Sony RX100 VI advanced manual with tips and tricks. This guide starts from your Menu settings and goes through all aspects of this nice little compact camera. I know it is a lot of information, but you’ll get the hang of it soon, I promise.
If you’re coming from earlier versions, the latest Sony RX100 VI has a few added features compared to those, and you’ll see a few new features in the menus too. The most noteworthy is of course the addition of a whopping 24-200 mm lens with an f/2.8 to f/4.5 aperture.
By the way, I have different guides with tips and settings for the other RX100 series cameras too:
Since the Sony RX100 VI has the same menu layout as recently released Sony Alpha cameras, you’ll quickly find your way around if you already own one of those.
I’ll be going over the entire Menu structure in this post, and giving you tips, pointers, and tricks along the way. If you’re a bit impatient, there is a more abbreviated “best settings” chapter before my conclusion.
Diving into the Sony RX100 VI MENU system
When you switch on yourSony RX100 VI, you’ll be asked to enter a date, time and timezone. This setting is necessary, as all images captured will have a timestamp, making it easy to find your favorite pictures in the future.
After this is setup, press the MENU button. You’ll see a range of icons and pages.
We’ll start at page 1 of the camera Icon (camera settings)
(MENU – Camera Settings – page 1)
File Format
Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW+jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the Sony RX100 VI pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.
A jpeg is a compressed imagewhich takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.
Jpeg Quality
Jpeg is available in EXTRA FINE (best Quality) FINE (medium Quality) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality).
Jpeg Image size
The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.
Image size when the aspect ratio is 3:2:
L: 20M 5472×3648 pixels
M: 10M 3888×2592 pixels
S: 5.0M 2736×1824 pixels
Image size when the aspect ratio is 4:3:
L: 18M 4864×3648 pixels
M: 10M 3648×2736 pixels
S: 5.0M 2592×1944 pixels VGA 640×480 pixels
Image size when Aspect Ratio is 16:9
L: 17M 5472×3080 pixels
M: 7.5M 3648×2056 pixels
S: 4.2M 2720×1528 pixels
Image size when Aspect Ratio is 1:1
L: 13M 3648×3648 pixels
M: 6.5M 2544×2544 pixels
S: 3.7M 1920×1920 pixels
Note that when Quality is set to RAW or RAW & JPEG, the image size for RAW images is automatically set to L for optimal quality.
If SD card space is an issue, you can set it to Small.
Aspect ratio:
You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface), 4:3, 1:1 or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.
Panorama Size:
(when in panorama shooting mode) Size is selectable between standard and wide. Wide means your picture will cover a larger area. Set it to standard, having to scan an even broader area when making panoramas will take some experience with the Sony RX100 VI to do efficiently.
Panorama direction
A panorama picture (only available in jpeg) is a composite of several images stitched together. When in this mode, you’ll see an arrow that guides you in what direction and speed you should pan the Sony RX100 VI to take the sequential images that will be stitched together. You can choose the path in this menu (either, up, down, left or right).
(MENU – Camera Settings – page 2)
Long Exposure NR
Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.
High ISO NR
Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).
Color Space
You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.
(MENU – Camera Settings – page 3)
Auto Mode
Switch the auto mode between Intelligent Auto and Superior Auto.
Intelligent Auto:
This mode automatically detects the type of scene you’re shooting and adjusts the scene automatically. You’ll see the icon for the recognized scene appears on the top right hand of the screen.
These scenes are the same ones which can be selected individually in SCENE mode.
The Sony RX100 VI will also use the most appropriate FOCUS AREA, and ISO value (the ISO range cannot be changed in iAuto though).
Drive Mode (single shooting, continuous shooting Lo-Mid-Hi), Self-timer and Self-timer cont (multiple images with the self-timer) can be changed by using the Fn button.
Works for both RAW and JPEG shooting.
Disadvantage: ISO range is fixed to 50-6400 (you can’t change the range).
Superior Auto:
Superior Auto is similar to iAuto, as it also detects scenes automatically, except it uses more complex processing.
This includes composite layering (layering different shots on top of each other for HDR style pictures) and automatically choosing what it thinks is the best image.
Disadvantage: ISO range is (like in iAuto) fixed range and only useable for jpeg shooting.
Scene Selection
You can select the presets for different scenes (like sports or portrait) from here
Drive Mode
You can set the drive mode, such as continuous or self-timer shooting.
Single Shooting (default setting): Shoots one still image. Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button. Hi: takes about six images per second, Lo about 3
Self-timer: Shoots an image after 10 or 2 seconds. (selectable in sub menu) You can change the angle of the LCD screen and shoot images while monitoring the image on the screen.
Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a specified number of images continuously after 10 seconds or 2 seconds (selectable in the sub menu).
Cont. Bracket: Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness. (from 3 to 5 images with between .3 and 3 EV difference, selectable in the sub menu.) For processing as HDR on your PC.
Single Bracket: Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness. (from 3 to 5 images with between .3 and 3 EV difference, selectable in the sub menu) For processing as HDR on your PC.
WB bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each with a different color tone according to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature, and the color filter. (3 images with either LO small changes or Hi large changes)
DRO Bracket: Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
Bracket Settings
You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
Selftimer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)
This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your camera settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.
Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)
This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. The items that you can register are displayed on the menu of the SonyRX100 VI. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.
(MENU – Camera Settings – page 4)
Focus Mode:
Here, you can select how the autofocus engine will behave when you half-press the shutter button. Novice users should set into AF-A. This functionality is partly dependent on what focus area you select (see next)
AF-S: With a half-press of the shutter button, the RX will focus only once. Suitable for capturing stills.
AF-A: AF Automatic intelligently switches between S and C, depending on whether the camera detects movement or not. This is the standard setting and the easiest to use.
AF-C: The Sony RX100 VI will continuously focus on any movement when you half-press the shutter button.
DMF: The RX100 VI focuses on your subject and allows you to fine-tune your focus area further using the manual focus ring on the lens.
MF: No autofocus is used, and you focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.
You can see a focus indicator on screen or EVF. When it is lit, the subject is in Focus and focus is locked.
Tip: It’s also possible to assign a button for what is called ‘Focus Hold’. With Focus Hold, you can freeze your focus point when you press this button. This is often used by photographers to allow for a greater flexibility in composition.
Another important fact is that in Movie mode, only Continuous AF and MF are available.
Focus area
You might think it is best to leave it on the factory ‘wide’ setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.
Wide:
Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
Center:
Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the Sony RX100 VI to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.
Flexible spot:
Flexible spot area selects a spot anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center) You can set it to small, medium or large. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the camera will struggle to find focus when set to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
Expandable flexible spot
If the Sony RX100 VI fails to focus on the single selected point, it uses the focus points around the flexible spot as the second priority area to achieve focus.
Lock-on AF:
When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the RX100M5 tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. Point the cursor to Lock-on AF on the Focus Area setting screen, then select the desired tracking start area using the left/right sides of the control wheel. You can move the tracking start area to a desired point by designating the area to be the flexible spot or expand flexible spot. On the Flexible Spot shooting screen, you can change the size of the AF range finder frame by rotating the control wheel.
Phase detection AF: When there is phase detection AF points within the autofocus area, the product uses the combined autofocus of the phase detection AF and contrast AF.
Swt. V/H AF Area
This is called Orientation linked AF points in Canon language. Switch AF point/AF Area to align with your subject in landscape mode (horizontal) if you change the camera orientation to Portrait (vertical) mode.
Off: disable this feature
AF Point Only: If you switch to portrait mode, the RX100 VI will automatically move the AF point in use up to align with your subject.
AF Point AF Area: If you switch to portrait mode, the RX100 VI will automatically move the AF point and AF area in use up.
AF Illuminator:
The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the Sony RX100 VI to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on.
Center Lock-on AF
This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In the iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and the Sony RX100 VI is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.
Set face prty in af
Sets whether the camera focuses on detected faces with higher priority in the auto-focus mode.
On: The camera focuses on detected faces with higher priority.
Off: The camera focuses without face detection.
(MENU – Camera Settings – page 5)
Pre-AF
Select if the Sony RX10 VI will automatically adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
AF Area regist.
You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.
How to register focus area
MENU – (Camera Settings1) – [AF Area Regist.] – [On].
Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.
How to call up the registered focus area
MENU – (Camera Settings2) – [Custom Key] – desired key, then select [Regist. AF Area hold].
Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which [Regist. AF Area hold] has been assigned and then press the shutter button to shoot images.
Del. Reg. AF Area
Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using AF Area regist.
AF Area Auto Clear
Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved. On Or Off.
Disp cont. AF area
You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when Focus Area is set to Wide or Zone, in Continuous AF mode.
Phase Detect. Area
Sets whether or not to display the Phase Detection AF area.
(MENU – Camera Settings – page 6)
Exposure Comp
(Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):
If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.
ISO
You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.
I have this range set between 100-1600 as this range is virtually noise free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 1600. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO, you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….
Iso Auto Min SS.
This is a useful and exciting setting. If you select ISO AUTO you are in P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority) mode; you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing. The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower] is 1 EV.
You have three possibilities here:
FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than the Standard (normal). This will help you prevent getting blurred images when shooting action or sports. This at the cost of raising the ISO and noise in your images. Remember this is linked to your Auto ISO settings, so it won’t go any higher than your upper limit, even if the Sony RX100 VI is capable of doing so.
STD (Standard): The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than the Standard setting. This enables you to shoot images with less noise. Never to be used if you want to shoot action, but can be useful if you are a landscape or architecture photographer who likes to walk around without a tripod yet takes some time to frame and shoot images carefully.
1/8000 ― 30″: The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.
Metering Mode
Metering mode refers to the way the Sony RX100VI reads the light and sets the exposure.
In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.
In spot or center, the Sony RX100 VI only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).
Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the metering circle depends on the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.
Tip: When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.
Face Priority in Multi Metering Mode
A very interesting addition to the metering possibilities. When Metering mode is set to multi, this function allows you to set the priority of the light metering to detected faces for a better exposure. great for portraits.
Spot Metering Point
Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.
Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.
(MENU – Camera Settings – page 7)
AEL w shutter
Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.
Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.
The Sony RX100 VI keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.
Exposure Std. Adjust
Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.
(MENU – Camera Settings – page 8)
Flash Mode
If you’d like to get more into flash photography, you should read up on the different possibilities and what their effect would be on your images. This is a basic explanation of what the different modes do:
fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).
Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the Sony RX100 VI to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.
Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
Flash comp or Flash compensation:
Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button).
Red Eye Reduction:
This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.
(MENU – Camera Settings – page 9)
White Balance
You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.
Priority Set in AWB
Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.
Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
DRO/Auto HDR
DRO:
This stands for Dynamic range optimise and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.
Auto HDR:
(not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.
The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.
Creative Style
The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid colour to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to you RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these, and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to colour.
Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.
You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.
This functionality can be changed:
Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
Picture Effect
Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your Sony RX100 VI, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).
Off: Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
Picture Profile
Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.
The basic contrast and coloring are defined by the combination of [Gamma] (gamma curve) and [Color Mode] (color characteristics) settings.
Gamma:
Movie: Standard gamma curve for video.
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images.
Cine1: Softens the contrast in darker image areas and emphasizes gradation changes in lighter image areas, producing a subdued tone overall (equivalent to HG4609G33) Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 33% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 109%. Images shot with this gamma can be used without grading, but since the images have smooth gradation characteristics, this can be used to grade and finalize the viewed image in the post-production process.
Cine2: Similar results to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal (equivalent to HG4600G30)
Gamma curve that obtains a dynamic range of 460% when the exposure is adjusted to 30% video output with 18% reflectance gray. The maximum value of video output is 100%.
Cine3: Stronger contrast between dark and light image areas and greater emphasis on black gradation changes (compared to [Cine1] and [Cine2])
Cine4: Stronger contrast than [Cine3] in darker image areas.
ITU709 ITU709 gamma curve (low-light gain of 4.5).
ITU709: (800%) Gamma curve for checking scenes recorded using [S-Log2] or [S-Log3].
S-Log2 [S-Log2] gamma curve. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 32%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. The maximum value of video output is 106%.
S-Log3: [S-Log3] gamma curve with characteristics closer to those of film. This setting is selected when some grading work will be performed after recording. It allows for better reproduction of gradations in shadows and the mid-tone range than S-Log2. The exposure is set so that 18% reflectance gray video is output as 41%. Under these conditions, a dynamic range of 1,300% is obtained with 90% reflectance white. As a characteristic of S-Log3, the dynamic range can be extended above 1,300%. However, Picture Profile is set to a dynamic range of 1,300% in order to maintain a balance with camera performance. Under these conditions, the maximum value of video output is 94%.
Color Mode:
Movie Color tones for [Movie] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for movies when Picture Profile is not used)
Still Color tones for [Still] gamma curve (standard color reproduction for still images when Picture Profile is not used)
Cinema Color tones for [Cine1] and [Cine2] gamma curve
Pro Color tones similar to standard Sony broadcast camera image quality (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
ITU709 Matrix ITU709 color tones (used in combination with [ITU709] gamma curve)
Black & White Sets the saturation to 0 for recording in black and white
S-Gamut Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
S-Gamut3.Cine Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
This setting is easier to use than [S-Gamut3], because it limits the color space to a more practical range than that of [S-Gamut3]. It is recommended in cases where [S-Gamut3], a wide color space, is not required.
S-Gammut3 Setting based on the assumption that some grading work will be performed after recording. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3].
This setting has a wider color space than that of [S-Gamut3.Cine]. It is suited for converting images to a format with a wide color space like BT.2020.
Depending on the type of camera, the entire [S-Gamut3] color space may not be supported.
Black Level:
This function adjusts the black level of the image -15 to +15. As an image effect, you can emphasize the color black to create an image that gives a powerful impression, or you can weaken black to give the image a soft impression.
Shifting Black Level in the minus direction emphasizes the black color in the image, while changing the level in the plus direction weakens the black color.
If you want to simulate an old film, or capture winter morning fog, the black level value should be increased. If you decrease the value, gradations in dark areas will be smoothed out, making the areas appear in crisp black. When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies. This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.
When using multiple fixed cameras to shoot the same subject from different angles, the balance between subject and background often varies.
This balance variation may cause the black color in the subject to appear different when cameras are switched. However, this is an optical illusion. If it occurs, you can correct it by adjusting Black Level to make the black color look the same.
Black Gamma:
This function lets you alter the shape of the selected gamma curve and adjust gradations in dark image areas. Range available between Wide, Middle or Narrow. Leven between -7 and +7.
[Range] controls the luminance range that Black Gamma influences. The [Narrow] setting keeps the range close to black, while the [Wide] setting extends the range to gray. [Range] should be set narrower when you want to control the quality of dark areas. If you want to adjust the overall image tone, [Range] should be set wider. At first, it may be a good idea to start from the [Narrow] setting.
Increasing the [Level] value brightens the image, whereas decreasing the value makes the image darker. For example, if you set [Range] to [Narrow] and decrease the [Level] value, you can create an image with dark areas that are similar to the ones seen in films. Unlike Black Level, Black Gamma Level adjusts luminance subtly.
Knee:
This function sets the knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high-intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your Sony RX100 VI.
First, select whether to set the knee point and slope automatically or manually in [Mode], and then adjust each setting.
Knee > Mode: Auto / Manual
Knee > Auto Set > Max Point: 90% to 100%
Knee > Auto Set > Sensitivity: High / Mid / Low
Knee > Manual Set > Point: 75% to 105%
Knee > Manual Set > Slope: –5 to +5
Mode:
Auto:
Automatically adjusts the knee based on what is selected in the following settings (when [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma]).
[Max Point] determines the maximum knee point level (white level). The knee slope is automatically adjusted according to the Max Point setting. The standard is to keep it at 100%. A lower setting will turn white grayish, while a higher setting will discard gradations in high luminance areas.
[Sensitivity] changes the luminance level at which the knee’s automatic adjustment starts. When set to [High], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at lower input signal levels than normal. When set to [Low], the knee’s automatic adjustment starts at higher input signal levels than normal.
When a parameter other than [Movie] or [ITU709] is selected in [Gamma], the gamma curve will not exceed the White clip point and over-exposure rarely occurs. When [Mode] is set to [Auto] with these settings, the Knee function is disabled. If you want to enable the Knee function, set [Mode] to [Manual].
Manual:
Sticks to settings based on the following selections.
[Point] sets the position of the knee point output level.
[Slope] determines the inclination of the knee slope.
A negative slope setting results in a gentler knee slope angle. This expands the dynamic range, but reduces the ability to produce rich gradations. A positive slope setting makes the knee slope inclination steeper. This shrinks the dynamic range, but bolsters the ability to express gradations. When [Slope] is set to +5, the Knee function is disabled.
Set [Point] and [Slope] in [Manual Set] in combination. If you select a higher setting for [Point] and a gentler setting for [Slope], you can obtain video-like sharp highlight effects. If softer film-like highlight effects are desired, select a lower setting for [Point] and a steeper setting for [Slope]. In practical terms, move [Point] and [Slope] up and down in opposite directions while checking the gradations in high luminance areas until you find the ideal settings.
Saturation
A positive value results in more vivid colors, while a negative value presents faded colors. Saturation must be adjusted in tandem with contrast. Bright and vivid settings produce video-like images, while dark and vivid settings result in film-like images. The combination of bright and light creates pastel tones, whereas dark and light settings create artistic finishes.
Color Phase
As you rotate the color wheel to the left (decreasing the set value) or to the right (increasing the set value), the colors shift along the spectrum from red to yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta and red. Because this affects all colors, it is difficult to make specific adjustments exactly as intended. Use this function when matching coloring closely between different cameras.
Color Depth
This function adjusts the luminance for each color phase. The luminance changes more drastically when the selected color is richer (higher saturation). It does not change much at all when the color is achromatic.
A higher set value lowers luminance while deepening the color. A lower set value increases luminance, making the color look paler.
This setting does not only enhance the apparent vividness of colors, but also can express deep, dark colors.
Because each of the 6 colors — R (Red), G (Green), B (Blue), C (Cyan), M (Magenta), Y (Yellow) — can be adjusted individually, you can apply this function to just the colors you want to emphasize.
Emphasizing image edges (Detail)
This function adjusts how much detail is applied to the subject’s image edges.
Because settings other than [Level] are quite complex, we recommend you start by adjusting only the [Level] setting first.
Level
This function determines the strength of detail image processing to be applied.
If you apply too much detail, the subject’s original atmosphere may be undermined, as its translucence may be lost or it may be given an unnatural luster. Excessive detail when shooting shiny leaves, for instance, may result in the leaves looking as if they are made of plastic. It is also advisable to apply detail only modestly when shooting paintings.
Because Detail makes image edges wider, the original texture of a subject consisting of very fine lines may be lost if too much detail processing is applied. (Example: thin lace curtains)
Also, be aware that Detail may fatten up the edges of noise particles that appear under a high gain setting, and may make such particles highly noticeable. In such cases, you can adjust the amount of detail processing on the noise particles by using the [Crispening] function.
The image edges become more visible when viewed on large screens. It may be advisable to ease off on Detail if you plan to view the image on large TVs or screens.
(MENU – Camera Settings – page 10)
Soft Skin Effect
If you’re using this camera mainly for pics of friends and family, this is an excellent feature, as it will soften and smooth skin tones make you and your beloved ones look their best. (only available when quality is set to Jpeg)
(MENU – Camera Settings – page 11)
Focus Magnifier
When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the Sony RX100 VI to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.
Focus Magnif Time
You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.
Initial Focus Mag.
Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.
x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x6.2: Displays a 6.2-times enlarged image.
MF assist
This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier found on this page too You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.
Peaking Setting
Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid which works when you have your Sony RX100 VI set to MF or DMF.Y ou’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies, and you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
(MENU – Camera Settings – page 12)
Face Registration
If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when [Face Detection] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)]. Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.
MENU – (Camera Settings1) – [Face Registration] – [New Registration].
Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].
Regist. Face Priority
The RX100 VI will give priority when detecting your registered faces.
Smile Shutter
This is another powerful feature. It can be set to detect automatically and focus on (registered) faces and enable a function called Smile Shutter. When the latter is enabled, the RX will automatically capture an image when a smile is detected. Did I hear you say Selfie? Yes, it’s the ultimate selfie tool, along with the pivoting screen.
Auto Object Framing
When enabled, the Sony will automatically crop your captured image to what it deems best. Meaning it will cut the picture for a nicer composition. Only available for Jpegs, though, a nice feature if you don’t want to bother too much with the technical side of photography.
Self Portrait/Timer
You can change the angle of the LCD screen and shoot images while monitoring the image on the screen.
MENU – (Custom Settings) – [Self-portrait/ -timer] – [On].
Tilt the LCD screen 180° upward, and then point the lens at yourself.
Press the shutter button. The camera starts the self-timer shooting after three seconds.
If you want to use another Drive Mode than the 3-second self-timer mode, first set [Self-portrait/ -timer] to [Off], then tilt the monitor upward approx. 180 degrees.
(MENU – Movie settings – page 1)
Movie settings page 1
Exposure Mode
You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting here.
Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
HFR Exposure Mode
You can select the exposure mode for high frame rate shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with HFR Settings later.
Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
File Format (video)
You can choose between XAVC S 4K, XAVC S HD, MP4 or AVCHD. You’ll need a fast UHS Speed Class U3 SD card to record at 100 Mbps or more.
XAVC S 4K: Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM
XAVC S HD: Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
AVCHD: Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
Record Setting (video):
You can choose the quality of recorded video here. Select the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-rate, the higher the picture quality. Frame- and bit-rate differ depending on your movie file format.
When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K you have these options:
30p 100M/25p 100M
30p 60M/25p 60M
24p 100M
24p 60M
When File Format is set to XAVC S HD you have these options:
60p 50M/50p 50M
30p 50M/25p 50M
24p 50M
120p 100M/100p 100M
120p 60M/100p 60M
When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:
60i 24M(FX)/50i 24M(FX)
60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH)
60p 28M(PS)/50p 28M(PS)
24p 24M(FX)/25p 24M(FX)
24p 17M(FH)/25p 17M(FH)
HFR settings
You can do slow-motion recording or record quick-motion recording. The sound will not be recorded. In a slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
How to record slow motion movie on the Sony RX100 M6:
Set the mode dial to (Movie/HFR Motion).
Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[Movie/HFR Motion]- and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (HFR) ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
Select MENU- (Camera Settings2)-[ HFR Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.
Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.
Playback speed: The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Record Setting] and [Frame Rate].
(MENU – Movie settings – page 2)
Movie settings page 2
Img. Size(Dual Rec)
Sets the image quality for still images shot when recording a movie.
Auto Dual Rec
Sets the shutter to release automatically when an impressive composition including a person is detected during movie shooting.
Proxy Recording
This function allows you to simultaneously record a low bitrate proxy file at the same time as recording the high bitrate original file movie.
Proxy movies are recorded in the XAVC S HD format. The frame rate of the proxy movie is the same as that of the original movie.
AF Drive Speed (movie)
You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.
Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.
AF Track Sens (movie)
You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.
Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.
Auto Slow Shut. (movie)
Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.
On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
(MENU – Movie settings – page 3)
Movie settings page 3
Audio Recording
You can switch off audio recording in movie mode. When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a higher sound level to make the sound easier to hear. Regardless of the Audio Rec Level settings, the limiter always operates.
Micref Level
Selects the microphone level during movie recording.
Wind Noise Reduction
This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.
SteadyShot
Sets which type of steadyshot you want to use.
Marker Display (movie)
Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie mode. The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder
Marker Settings (movie)
Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.
Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. [Off]/[On]
Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display.
Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. [Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
(MENU – Movie settings – page 4)
Movie settings page 4
Movie w/ shutter
You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button, which is bigger and easier to press than the MOVIE (Movie) button.
(MENU – Movie settings – page 5)
Shutter and Steadyshot Settings
Shutter Type
Select here if you want to use the Electronic or Mechanical shutter. There is also an auto option, that switches from mechanical to electronic shutter if a flash is detected.
Release without card
If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.
Steadyshot
Turn image stabilisation on or off.
(MENU – Movie settings – page 6)
video zoom settings
Zoom Setting
Sets whether to use the Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom when zooming.
Digital zoom:
Pictures captured by the image sensor of the camera are enlarged using digital signal processing. As the magnification level increases, signals to be also estimated growth and can reduce the picture quality.
Clear Image Zoom:
Zoomed images are captured close to the original quality when shooting a still picture. The camera first zooms to the maximum optical magnification, then uses Clear Image Zoom technology to enlarge the image an additional 2x, producing clear, sharp images despite the increased zoom ratio.
Zoom Speed
Sets the zooming speed when you operate the zoom lever.
Zoom Func. on Ring
Sets the zooming function of the control ring. When you select [Quick], the zoom position moves in accordance with the degree of rotation of the control ring. When you select [Step], you can move the zoom position to a fixed step of the focal length.
(MENU – Movie settings – page 7)
Display/Auto Review settings
Disp button
Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.
Finder/Monitor
You can set the behavior of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder? Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.
Zebra setting
The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the entire scene.
Grid Line
Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.
Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off: Does not display the grid line.
Exposure set guide
The exposure set guide is an on-screen scroller that tells you the relation between your chosen aperture and the appropriate shutter speed for the scene you are shooting. I find this quite handy, but you can turn it off if you don’t.
Live view Display
Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed-in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier autofocusing in low light when it’s turned OFF,
(MENU – Movie settings – page 8)
Display/auto review settings page 2
Auto Review
You can check your captured image on the screen directly after shooting. You can select how long the image will stay on the screen (10, 5 or 2 seconds). I find this very annoying, so I turned it off. If you want to review your image, you can simply press play to do so.
You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, I assign [Eye AF] to [AF-ON] for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] because it’s more conveniently placed. You can easily recall [Eye AF] simply by pressing the AF-ON button. Learn how to do this here:
The keys that can be assigned functions are different for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] and [Custom Key(PB)].
You can assign the desired functions to the following keys.
Custom Button 1
Custom Button2
AF/MF Button/AEL Button
Fn/ Button
Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
Custom Button 3
Function Menu Set.
You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.
Av/Tv Rotate
Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed. Normal or reverse.
Touch Shoot Set
Touch Shutter: When you shoot using the monitor, the camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
Touch Focus: You can select a subject on which to focus using touch operations in the still image and movie recording modes.
(MENU – Movie settings – page 10)
Custom operations buttons page 2
MOVIE Button
Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button.
Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to [Movie/HFR] mode.
Wheel Lock
You can set whether or not to lock the control wheel when you press and hold the Fn (Function) button
Audio Signals
Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.
On: Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
Shutter: Only the shutter sound is produced.
Off: Sounds are not produced.
Write Date
Sets whether to record a shooting date on the still image.
MENU – Network settings- page 1
Network settings
Send To Smartphone
You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.
You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the Sony RX100 mark 6 or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).
You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the screen.
It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.
Send to Computer
You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the camera using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the Sony RX100 VI has turned off.
View On TV
If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network.
Ctrl w/ smartphone
By connecting the Sony RX100 VI to a smartphone using Wi-Fi, you can control the camera and shoot images using the smartphone, and you can transfer images shot with the camera to the smartphone.
Connection Info. displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the Sony RX to a smartphone.
Airplane Mode
Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.
Wi-Fi Settings:
WPS Push
If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.
Access Point Set.
You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.
Disp MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of your Sony DSC-RX100M6.
SSID/PW Reset
Your Sony RX100 VI shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection Info.] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.
MENU – Network settings- page 2
Network settings page 2
Bluetooth Settings.
Controls the settings for connecting the Sony RX100 VI to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”
Loc. Info. Link Set
You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.
To use the location information linking function of the Sony RX100 VI, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection
Procedure:
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the Sony RX and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)
On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Bluetooth Function] – [On].
On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [Bluetooth Settings] – [Pairing].
Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. Pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
On the camera, select MENU – (Wireless) – [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] – [Location Info. Link] – [On].
(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.
Options in this Menu:
Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the Sony RX100 VI using information from a linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Edit Device name
If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which RX100 is yours in particular situations.
Reset Network set
Resets all network settings.
If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.
MENU – playback options – page 1
Playback options page 1
Protect
Set your camera to not shoot images without inserting an SD card.
Rotate
Change the orientation of images in-camera.
Delete
Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD cards.
Rating
Rate your images in-camera for easy culling in Lightroom afterward.
Rating Set (Cust Key)
Set a custom key for easy rating.
Specify Printing
Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)
MENU – playback options – page 2
Beauty Effect
Allows you to apply the Beauty Effect to retouch the still image of a person and make it look better, for example, by retouching it for smoother skin, larger eyes, and whiter teeth. You can set the effects from level 1 to level 5. An image on which the Beauty Effect is used is saved as a new file. The original image is retained as it is.
Skin Toning: Adjusts the skin color as you like. Skin Smoothing: Removes age spots and wrinkles from the skin. Shine Removal: Reduces the look of oily skin. Adjusts the skin color as you like.
Eye Widening: Enlarges the eyes of the subject. Adjust the size of the eyes using up/down. Teeth Whitening: Whiten the teeth of the subject. You may not be able to whiten the teeth in some images.
To apply two or more effects consecutively using Beauty Effect, first apply one effect to the image, and then select another effect using left/right.
Photo Capture
Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.
Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.
MENU – (Playback) – [Photo Capture].
Play back the movie and pause it.
Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.
Press (Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.
Enlarge Image
Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.
Enlarge Init. Mag.
Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.
Enlarge Initial Pos.
Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either image center or the focus position.
Motion Interval ADJ
You can adjust the interval of the tracking of the subject’s motion.
MENU – playback options – page 3
Slide Show
Select whether you want the Sony RX100 VI to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.
View Mode
select how the camera will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.
Image Index
Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.
Display Cont. Shooting Group.
You can select to display burst images in groups or display all images during playback.
Display rotation
Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the camera or not.
MENU – Camera Setup – page 1
Monitor Brightness
Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.
Viewfinder Brightness
Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.
Finder Color Temp
Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.
Gamma Disp. Assist
Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting and may be difficult to monitor, using [Gamma Disp. Assist], contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma can be reproduced. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when playing back movies on the camera’s monitor/viewfinder.
Volume settings
Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.
Tile Menu
elects whether to always display the first screen of the menu when you press the MENU button.
MENU – Camera Setup – page 2
Mode Dial Guide
You can display the description of a shooting mode when you turn the mode dial and change the settings available for that shooting mode.
Delete confirm.
You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as the default setting on the delete confirmation screen.
Display Quality
You can change the display quality to High or Standard. When High is selected, battery consumption will be higher, and your camera will also heat up faster.
Auto monitor Off
The camera automatically switches to the power-saving mode if you do not operate the camera for a certain period of time in the still-image shooting mode. This function is useful for reducing the power consumption.
Pwr Save Start time
Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. I have it set to 5 minutes, a good balance between usability and battery life.
Function for VF close
Sets whether to turn the power off when the viewfinder is stowed.
MENU – Camera Setup – page 3
NTSC/PAL Selector
Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.
Touch Operation
Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch Panel+Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch Pad Settings
You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.
Operation in V Orien.:
Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
Touch Pos. Mode:
Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen ([Absolute Position]), or move the focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement ([Relative Position]).
Operation Area:
Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
Demo Mode
The Demo Mode function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration) when the Sony RX100 VI has not been used for a certain time. Normally select Off.
TC/UB settings
Timecode (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for synchronization of video in post production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.
TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset: Sets the time code.
UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
MENU – Camera Setup – page 4
HDMI Settings
When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.
Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
4K Output Sel.
Outputs still image in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.
Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the Sony RX100 VI memory card.
HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(25p)* : Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
USB connection
Selects what will happen when you connect your SonyRX100 Mark 69 to your PC or MAC.
Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer
USB LUN Setting
Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.
Older devices that are not able to connect to the Sony RX100 VI might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.
USB Power Supply
You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.
PC Remote settings
Sets whether to save still images stored in both the Sony RX100 6 and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the Sony without leaving the camera.
MENU – Camera Setup – page 5
Language
Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.
Date/Time Setup
The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your RX camera for the first time.
Area Setting
Sets where in the world where you are using your Sony RX100 M6.
Copyright info
Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.
Format
When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the Sony for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.
File Number
Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.
MENU – Camera Setup – page 6
Set File Name
Use the standard file naming system or a customisable one.
Select REC folder
If [Folder Name] is set to [Standard Form] and there are 2 folders or more, you can select the folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.
New Folder
Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.
Folder name
Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.
Recover Image DB
If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.
Display media info
You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video).
MENU – Camera Setup – page 7
Version
Check what version of the operating system your Sony RX100 VI and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.
Setting Reset
Fully resets the Sony camera to factory settings.
MENU – My menu setting
This is a new functionality not previously seen on many Sony camera.s It allows you to build a custom menu. Say you often change Raw file type from compressed to uncompressed, or maybe you don’t want to spend your time scrolling through the entire menu system looking for the SteadyShot settings. Well, now you can basically build your own Menu here with your most often used settings.
Add Item
You’ll see a list of all Menu options here and you can simply select your desired options and add them to your custom built menu page.
Sort Item
This setting basically changes the order of your ‘My Menu’ selected function.
Delete Item
Deletes functions in your ‘My Menu’.
Delete Page
Deletes entire pages of your ‘My Menu’ selection.
Delete All
Deletes all previously added functions of your ‘My Menu’.
In the next chapter, I’ll go over all the functionality that I find most useful
Mode dial functions: what’s the difference between intelligent and superior auto?
Intelligent Auto
This mode lets the camera detect what kind of scene you are photographing. It switches to the scene setting it finds most appropriate, including aperture, shutter speed, ISO, and AF mode.
These different scene settings are the same you’ll find manually selectable in SCN mode.
All Sony cameras do a good job at detecting scenes, although the advanced photographer will prefer to shoot in Aperture, Shutter priority or fully manual mode in order to have more control over things like depth-of-field, movement, and focusing area.
Superior Auto
Does the same scene recognition and (when theSony RX100 VI decides it is appropriate) adds hand-held twilight, anti-motion blur, and backlight correction HDR in order to optimize dynamic range, movement, and exposure.
This is only for jpeg shooters, as it uses multiple images shot in close succession at high quality and combines them into one jpeg. Works well on stills but should not be used for movement.
Zebra highlight clipping aide
Zebra will show zebra pattern lines on blown highlights.
The clipping detection threshold is selectable from 70 to 100 . Lower values indicate possible highlight clipping sooner than higher.
Setting it somewhere around 90 will give you a good indication of whether you’re in danger of unrecoverable clipping without having the screen cluttered with stripes all the time.
Manual Focus Assist and Focus Peaking
There are two manual focusing assist functions:
MF assist
When set to ON, Magnification will automatically magnify a selectable (through the menu) part of you image when in Manual Focus Mode (MF).
MENU – (Custom Settings) – [ MF Assist] – [On].
The duration of the magnification can also be set to either 2 sec, 5 sec or no limit in the menu Focus Magnification Time. (MENU – (Custom Settings) – [Focus Magnif. Time] – desired setting.)
You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
MENU – (Camera Settings) – [Focus Magnifier].
Press on the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the position you want to enlarge using up/down/left/right side of the control wheel.
You can change the magnifier scaling in two steps by pressing in the center, and close the focus magnifier mode and return to the normal shooting display by pressing three times.
Confirm the focus.
Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.
Peaking
This works in MF and DMF focusing modes
MENU – (Custom Settings) – [Peaking Level] – desired setting.
It displays a color selectable noise in the regions where the focus is on.
A low setting is recommended in enough light on the Sony RX100 IV.
In dim light, you might need to go to medium to get a good idea of where the focus is at.
Center Lock-on AF
Center Lock-on AF
Depending on the options selected in [Focus Area] or [Center Lock-on AF], the available functions varies when pressing the key. When you press the key when the [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Center] and [Center Lock-on AF] is [On], [Center Lock-on AF] will activate. The Sony RX100 VI will automatically focus while pressing the key when the [Focus Area] is [Wide] or [Center], [Focus Mode] is set to other than [Manual Focus], and [Center Lock on AF] is set to [Off].
When you press the center button, the camera detects the subject positioned in the center of the screen and continues to track the subject.
MENU – (Camera Settings) – [Center Lock-on AF] – [On]
Align the target frame (A) over the subject and press in the center of the control wheel. Press again to stop tracking.
If the camera loses track of the subject, it can detect when the subject reappears on the monitor and resume tracking.
Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.
Smile/face detect
When set to On, The Sony RX100 IV will automatically detect and focus on faces. This is a very powerful feature and can even be made faster by registering faces beforehand. You can even prioritize any of the 8 registered faces according to importance. Ideal for a wedding or family reunion when you know the persons who you are going to photograph.
Go to MENU – (Camera Settings) – [Smile/Face Detect.] and select either
On (Regist. Faces): Detects the registered face with higher priority using Face Registration.
On: Detects a face without giving higher priority to the registered face.
How to register faces:
MENU – (Custom Settings) – [Face Registration] – [New Registration].
Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].
Eye AF
Eye AF is great for portraiture and large apertures. With a shallow depth of field, it is at times difficult to get the appearance of a well-focussed face. The AF system could wonder to an ear or a chin when you finally get that exact shot that you’re looking for.
Eye EF eliminates this problem by detecting your subject’s eyes and placing the focus point there. It tracks them too. You’ll need to assign a button of your choice in order to make this work.
MENU – (Custom Settings) – [Custom Key Settings] – assign the [Eye AF] function to the desired button.
Point the Sony RX100 VI at a person’s face, and press the button to which you have assigned the [Eye AF] function.
Press the shutter button while pressing the button.
Exposure aides
AE lock
When contrast between the subject and background is high, meter the light at a spot where the subject appears to have the appropriate brightness and shut the exposure before shooting.
You’ll need to assign a button to this function to do this in Menu – Custom Settings – Custom Key Setting and then assign the AEL toggle to the desired key.
Then:
Center the spot at which the exposure is to your liking
Press the button to which the AEL toggle function is assigned
exposure will be locked, and AE lock lights up.
Focus on your subject and press the shutter button.
To cancel the exposure lock, press the button to which the AEL toggle function is assigned.
It’s easiest to select the AEL hold function in Custom Key Settings; then you can lock the exposure as long as
you are holding down the AEL button.
Bulb mode
Bulb mode is great for shooting trails of light, such as fireworks, car lights, etc.
It’s best to use a remote or the Sony Playmemories remote app (that is downloadable for free) as you want to eliminate movement.
Firstly set the mode dial to M.
Connect your phone to the Sony RX100 VI using WiFi or NFC.
Then:
Dial exposure time to Bulb on the app.
Dial in a suitable Aperture value from F/5.6.
Press the shutter button on the app to start the exposure.
Press the shutter button again on the app to stop the exposure.
Conclusion
The Sony RX100 IV brought many new software innovations to the RX line. Besides the ability to record in 4K and make High Frame rate movies, you shouldn’t overlook the many new focusing aides inside the Sony RX100 VI like Eye AF and focus peaking. I hope you found my advanced manual for the RX100 VI with tips and tricks useful. If you have any questions, I’d love to hear from you in the comment section below.
The Sony A7 III uses a new 24 megapixel Full-frame BSI sensor as incorporates many of the features and improvements brought in with the a9 and a7r III. Most noteworthy are the larger capacity ‘Z’ battery, AF joystick and the Eye AF. These mainly focus on enhanced speed, with now more AF points, a write-to-SD-card-buffer and an entirely new Bionz X processor. These will definitely make the ILCE-7M3 a more useable camera in terms of speed and functionality compared to older models. There are a few changes in the menu system when compared to previous Sony models, especially If you upgraded from an A7m2. We’ll have a page-by-page look at the menus in this post. If you’re looking for a particular feature, I would suggest that you use the search function in your preferred browser, as this post is quite long.
Sony A7III Menu system run-through
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 1
File Format:
Do you edit your pictures on your desktop? If so, set to RAW or RAW jpeg. A RAW file saves all information the camera pixels register during shooting and will make for better quality images if you want to edit in something like Adobe Lightroom.
A jpeg is a compressed image (available in FINE (larger) and STANDARD (smaller, less quality) which takes up less space on your SD card but is less suited for editing afterward. Jpeg images will also have in-camera noise reduction applied, something you might or might not want to take care of yourself later, depending on your style and preference.image size
RAW file type:
You can choose between either compressed or uncompressed RAW. Compressed files are smaller, but there is also a small degradation of quality, especially noticeable in long exposures and scenes with high contrast. If you notice haloing in the sky during post-processing for instance, then this is an artifact of that compression.
JPEG Quality:
Standard, fine and extra fine are selectable. Extra fine will give you the best possible quality JPEG. This includes noise reduction and sharpening from the on-board JPEG engine.
JPEG Image size:
Large, medium or small is selectable. Large is preferred.
Aspect ratio:
You can choose 3:2 (which uses the full sensor surface) or 16:9 (crop but a more broad view). Leave as is at 3:2, you can always crop your pictures later.
APS-C/Super 35mm:
This setting tells the camera what to do when you’ve attached an APS-C lens to this full-frame camera. An APS-C lens won’t cover the full surface of the sensor, or you’ll notice heavy vignetting towards the edges of the frame. When recording movies, this crop is called Super 35mm. The principle here is that you use any a part of the surface of the sensor. If you want to do this, don’t worry too much about image quality as this is a high megapixel camera leaving you with a usable 1O,66 MP in APS-C mode.
On: Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.
Auto: Automatically sets the capture range depending on the lens.
Set if you want the processing engine to apply noise reduction for images captured with a long exposure time. Leave it ON as there is no way of duplicating this process in post-production, except to take a black frame of the same length in the same atmospheric conditions.
High ISO NR
Here you can select the amount of noise reduction applied to images with high ISO settings (when quality is set to jpeg). As Sony has rather aggressive noise reduction, I would change it to Low. (if not, you run the risk of getting paint-like, smeared images at higher ISO values).
Color Space
You can choose between Standard and Adobe (extended color range) RGB. This is only important if you shoot JPEG and not RAW. Adobe RGB would be preferable if you print many images because of the extended color range.
Lens Comp
The Sony A7 III allows you to select whether you would like to apply various lens compensations (shading, chromatic aberration, distortion) even when shooting in RAW. I leave this ON, but you might get a conflict with RAW files and using a lens profile in programs like Lightroom where you’ll see a reverse vignette for instance.
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 3
Scene Selection
Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene. (like when setting the mode dial to SCN)
Menu item details
Portrait: Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.
Sports Action: Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still. The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
Macro: Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.
Landscape: Shoots the entire range of a scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.
Sunset:Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.
Night Scene: Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.
Night Portrait: Shoots night scene portraits using the flash.
Anti Motion Blur: Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.
Drive Mode
As usual, Single and Continuous shooting modes are available. Single will take one exposure when you press the shutter, continuous will continue taking exposures until the buffer fills up. If you want to take advantage of the buffer, you should set your A7m3 to continuous. If not, the camera will write every exposure separately to your SD card.
Bracket Settings
You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
Self-timer during Brkt: Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also, sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if using the self-timer. (OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
MR: Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)
This functionality allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with the Mode Dial memory positions in advance. It is now also possible to save your camera settings to a memory card and recall them later (or on a different camera). This is done by using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside this menu.
MR: Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)
This setting allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial. You can register various functions for shooting. The items that you can register are displayed on the menu of the camera. Aperture and Shutter speed are always available. You’ll need to select your SD card first using the ‘select Rec. media’ function inside the prior menu.
Select Media
Selects which of the two SD cards will be used to store your personal custom MR settings.
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 4
Reg Cust Shoot Set
You can save a number of settings here to a customized Shoot Set. There are 3 shoot sets available that you can recall at any time. You can import your current settings to one of these three shoot sets. You can also store these on your SD card and move them from camera to camera.
You can save the following settings:
Shoot Mode (Like program Auto)
Aperture
Shutter Speed
Drive Mode
Exposure compensation
ISO (like Auto or a single ISO value)
Metering Mode
Focus Mode
Focus Area
AF On
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 5
Focus Mode
Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.
AF-S (Single-shot AF):
The camera locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.
AF-C (Continuous AF):
The camera continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.
DMF (DMF):
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing autofocusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.
MF (Manual Focus):
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using autofocus, use manual focus.
Priority Set in AF-S:
Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF, DMF or Automatic AF and the subject is still.
Options are:
AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Priority Set in AF-C:
Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the subject is in motion. Balanced works great for any type of photography.
Choose between:
AF: Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release: Prioritizes the shutter’s release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis: Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.
Focus area
The Sony A7 III has an advanced autofocus system with 399 phase detection autofocus points and 425 contrast AF points on the sensor. This makes it one of the fastest and most reliable AF systems in the world. You might think it is best to leave it on the wide factory setting (as this uses all AF points), but for certain scenes, it is often better to use a zone or flexible spot to get it to focus on what you want.
Wide: Wide focus area uses all focus points on the sensor. Ideal for action scenes where there is a lot of movement going on in your frame.
Zone: Zone allows you to select one of 9 predefined areas where autofocus will be active. These zones each cover about 25% of the screen, with a slight overlap. You can quickly change the area by pressing the multi-controller button and navigating to any of the other areas.
Center: Focusses on whatever is centered in your images. A fail-proof way of getting the camera to focus on what you want. If you have any problems using the autofocus and are in a situation where you don’t want to miss any shots, revert to Center and just make sure you have your subject centered.
Flexible spot: Flexible spot area selects a place anywhere on the screen where the camera should focus. (similar to Center spot, except not.. in the center) You can set it to small, medium or large. If you want to use this focus area, set it to medium or large, as the camera will struggle to find focus when setting to small (except perhaps for close-up portraits where you’d want to focus on the iris of the eye)
Expand Flexible spot: If the camera can’t focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
Lock-on AF: When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the camera tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to Continuous AF. Point the cursor to ‘Lock-on AF’ on the Focus Area setting screen, and then adjust the desired area to start tracking by pressing the multi-selector left/right. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a flexible spot or expand flexible spot. If you’re coming from a DSLR, try to use this setting.
Focus Settings
Focus setting allows you to use the wheel, joystick or touch screen to move your focus point to any of the 693 on sensor phase detection points.
Swt. V/H AF Area
This is called Orientation linked AF points in Canon language. Switch AF point/AF Area to align with your subject in landscape mode (horizontal) if you change the camera orientation to Portrait (vertical) mode.
Off: disable this feature
AF Point Only: If you switch to portrait mode, the A7 III will automatically move the AF point in use up to align with your subject.
AF Point AF Area: If you switch to portrait mode, the A7 III will automatically move the AF point and AF area in use up.
(MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 6)
AF illuminator
The AF illuminator is a little red light allowing the camera to focus more easily when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It automatically is switched off when you fully press the shutter. Leave it on except if you are using an underwater housing.
Center Lock-on AF
This is a very powerful autofocus feature. When turned ON, it allows you to track a subject. In the iAuto mode, you can access this feature (when turned ON and the Sony A7 III is set to AF) by pressing the Center button of the multi-controller. You’ll see a square on your screen, then center your desired tracking subject and the camera will continue to track it, even when it exits your frame and reappears.
Face/Eye AF set
This is a new setting from the 2019 version 3 firmware update.
Face/eye Prty in AF
This will turn on continuous face and eye detection. As opposed to the previous firmware update, it’s now not necessary to assign and press a custom button to engage eye autofocus. The camera will do this automatically and autonomously from now on.
Tip: it might however still be a good idea to assign this ON/Off menu item to your old custom button when shooting a variety of scenes (as opposed to only portraits). This means you’ll be able to switch between the camera constantly looking for eyes to lock on too and any other ‘normal’ autofocus mode. It’s also of course still possible to use Eye AF as before, where it will override your selected focus area and the A7 III will focus on the eye as long as your custom button of choice is pressed.
Real time Eye AF works differently with Different focus areas:
WIDE: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the entire frame.
ZONE: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the within the selected Zone.
CENTER: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the center of the frame (Not recommended)
FLEXIBLE SPOT: L,M,S: Eye AF will search & track an eye within the selected Flexible Spot (Large works best for this setting).
If you want to focus on a specific animal’s eye when the displayed face of that animal is very small, or two or more animals are displayed on the screen, set the focus area to Flexible Spot and then focus on the subject so that it is easier for the camera to detect the eye.
EXPAND FLEXIBLE SPOT: Eye AF will search & track an eye in the area within or surrounding the Flexible Spot
LOCK-ON AF: EXPAND FLEXIBLE SPOT: Not compatible with Real Time Eye AF
Subject Detection
Choose between either human or animal subjects for Eye AF. Animal Eye AF works well with cats and dogs for the moment, Sony has promised to further develop this functionality to add other animals too.
Face Dtct Frame Disp
Sets whether or not to display the face detection frame when a human face is detected. Turn On.
(Animal) Eye Display
When On is set, the white eye detection frame appears over the eye. Should be turned on in order to see where the camera is focussing.
AF track sens:
High is useful when shooting fast action scenes. The standard mode works fine in most situations, but you can also try responsive if you need faster tracking capabilities. Locked on keeps the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.
AF system:
Here you can select the focus detection system (Phase Detection AF/Contrast AF) when you attach an Amount lens using an LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor.
Phase Detection AF: Focuses with Phase Detection AF. The focusing speed is very fast.
Contrast AF: Always focuses with Contrast AF. The focusing speed is slower but more precise. Use when you cannot focus with Phase Detection AF.
AF with shutter
Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Leave ON.
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 7
Pre-AF
Select if the Sony A7 III will automatically adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Eye-Start AF:
This configuration starts AF once the EVF sensor has detected your eye near the viewfinder. I’ve never used it personally, but some people might find this setting interesting as it can prolong battery life.
AF Area Regist.
Another feature inherited from Canon. By registering an AF area/point, you have a quick way to move between points without having the thumb-stick of scroll across the AF field. For example, a bird photographer can set their camera up so they can quickly switch from a spot AF point for precisely focusing on a static subject, to a wide AF pattern for quickly acquiring and tracking a bird in flight.
Del. Reg. AF Area
Deletes the registered AF area in AF Area Regist.
AF Area Auto Clear:
Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Disp. cont. AF Area
You can set whether or not to display the focus area that is in focus when[Focus Area] is set to Wide or Zone and Focus Mode is set to Continuous AF.
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 8
AF Micro Adj.:
Allows you to adjust and register autofocused positions for each lens when using an A-mount lens with the Mount Adaptor LA-EA2 or LA-EA4. In general use, you do not need to adjust the autofocused position using this function. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focus areas or focal lengths. Use this function only when adjustments are needed for certain focal lengths.
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 9
Exposure Comp
(Also available in the Quick Menu, accessed by pressing the FN button):
If you find that your image is overexposed (for instance when you are shooting at large apertures for a shallow depth-of-field in bright daylight), you can tweak the exposure compensation here in a plus or minus 5 (exact EV dependent on next step) range.
Reset EV Comp
Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using Custom Settings when you turn off the power when the exposure compensation dial position is set to 0.
ISO
You can select at which ISO value you’d like to capture your image or change the Auto ISO range.
I have this range set between 100-3200 as this range is virtually noise-free, and I don’t like the ISO performance above 3200. In a pinch, when you’re getting blurred images due to a too long shutter speed at low ISO, you can experiment with higher ISO settings. It’s better to get a sharp but noisy image than a blurred one….
Iso Auto Min SS.
This is a useful and exciting setting. If you select ISO AUTO you are in P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority) mode; you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing. The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower] is 1 EV.
You have three possibilities here:
FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than the Standard (normal). This will help you prevent getting blurred images when shooting action or sports. This at the cost of raising the ISO and noise in your images. Remember this is linked to your Auto ISO settings, so it won’t go any higher than your upper limit, even if the camera is capable of doing so.
STD (Standard): The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than the Standard setting. This enables you to shoot images with less noise. Never to be used if you want to shoot action, but can be useful if you are a landscape or architecture photographer who likes to walk around without a tripod yet takes some time to frame and shoot images carefully.
1/8000 ― 30″: The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.
Metering Mode
Metering mode refers to the way the camera reads the light and sets the exposure.
In multi, it considers the whole frame and sets exposure according to internal algorithms programmed in camera.
In spot or center, the camera only considers what is in that spot or the center (per example, if your subject is completely black, the camera will try to compensate by overexposing the image).
Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
Spot: Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the metering circle depends on the setting for [Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position of the subject changes.
Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.
Tip: When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area.
Face Priority in Multi Metering Mode
A very interesting addition to the metering possibilities. When Metering mode is set to multi, this function allows you to set the priority of the light metering to detected faces for a better exposure. great for portraits.
Self Timer Type
You can choose between shooting a single image with the self-timer or a designated number of images.
Self-timer (single: Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
Self-timer(Cont): Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 10
Spot Metering Point
Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when Focus Area is set to Flexible Spot or Expand Flexible Spot.
Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.
Exposure step
You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values either .3 or .5 EV steps.
AEL w shutter
Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select Off to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.
Auto (default setting): Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when Focus Mode is set to Single-shot AF.
On: Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off: Does not adjust the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to change focus and exposure separately.
The camera keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in Cont. Shooting or Spd Priority Cont. mode. Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the AEL w/ shutter settings.
Exposure Std. Adjust
Adjusts this camera’s standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode. You can set a value from -1 EV to 1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.
MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 11
Flash Mode:
(Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button)
If you have purchased a flash for your A7 III, it’s important to learn about the different Flash Modes. If you’re new to photography, I’d suggest setting it to Auto, where the camera will decide when and how you need the flash.
If you’d like to get more into flash photography, you should read up on the different possibilities and what their effect would be on your images. This is a basic explanation of what the different modes do:
fill flash: A fill flash is useful even in daylight to fill the shadows with light (like a person in the shade).
Slow sync: Tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed along with a flash, and thus is better for night shots. In manual and shutter priority modes, there is no difference in flash power. But when using aperture priority, program, or auto, choosing slow sync tells the camera to use a longer shutter speed than it would ordinarily pick.What the slow sync flash mode does is a first fire the flash for the subject exposure, then allow for a longer shutter speed that will allow for more ambient light to be captured by the sensor.
Rear Sync: Capturing an image involves two shutter actions: one when the capture starts and on when it stops. Rear Sync tells the flash to fire right before the shutter closes. Moving objects will show a streak where they came from and a sharp image where they were at the end of the exposure. This conveys a sense of speed with moving objects. Rear Sync is a creative technique, if you’d like to know more about this type of photography, I’d suggest doing a Google search on ‘Rear Sync Flash Photography.’
Wireless: Select wireless is if want to use the in-camera flash to trigger an external flash like the Sony HVL-43M (with TTL!). Using an external flash is helpful when shooting weddings and dimly-lit subject matter, You can use your main flash to light the subject, and your external flash to light the background.
Notes on using te Sony A7 III with an off-camera flash system like Godox or Flashpoint:
For basic operation, set the camera to ‘ambient’ flash.
Turn OFF Live view display (MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 7).
Flash comp or Flash compensation:
Especially when using Slow Sync or Rear Sync Flash modes, you might have to lower the power of the Flash to get a decently exposed image. (Also available in the Quick Menu accessed by pressing the FN button).
Exp comp set
Selects if the Exposure compensation function ( -5 in 0.5EV or 0.3EV steps) also reduces flash power or not. Leave it to Ambient And Flash, unless if you want to use HSS sync with flashes, then it is handy to be able to control exposure and flash output separately.
Wireless Flash:
On previous Sony cameras, Wireless was treated as a Flash Mode. This was not a problem except if you wanted wireless flash with Rear-curtain flash sync, which was Flash Mode. The Sony a7 III separates Wireless Flash from Flash Modes. This enables you to use Wireless Flash in conjunction with Rear-Sync. (Once you enable Wireless Flash in the menu there’s no reason to turn it off)
Red Eye Reduction:
This anti-Red Eye setting quickly fires the flash before your image capture starts, reducing the red-eye effect often seen when using a flash.
(MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 12)
White Balance
You can either set the white balance to Auto, where the camera tries to guess what the neutral grey value is, or use one of the preset white balance settings for different lighting conditions or customize the white balance according to your preference or using a grey card.
Priority Set in AWB
Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when White Balance is set to Auto.
Standard: Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience: Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White: Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
DRO/Auto HDR
DRO:
This stands for Dynamic range optimise and analyses the contrast of your scene in real-time. It produces an image with optimal brightness and recovered shadow detail. You can use this function even while the subject is moving or during the continuous shooting.
Auto HDR:
(not available for RAW captures) this feature Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create a picture with an extended range from highlight to shadow.
The highlight detail in auto HDR is better than that in DRO and with reduced noise. The shutter is released three times, so using this function for moving subjects is not recommended.
Creative Style
The Sony creative styles can best be explained as being film emulations (the same way as do some other camera manufacturers implements this). There is a range of styles available from vivid color to black and white. If you’re shooting RAW, these styles are embedded, but can always be zeroed after importing them to you RAW editor of choice. Jpegs are saved with this styling applied. It is always useful to try some of these and can be a real boost for your creativity, as you will notice that you make different images in say black-and-white as opposed to color.
Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambiance.
Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also stand out more. Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.
You can edit these different styles and save your own creative style if you want.
This functionality can be changed:
Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the image.
Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and subdued.
Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
Picture Effect
Think of this menu as an Instagram app right in your camera, with all kinds of retro filters and effects. These are only available when quality is set to Jpeg (Not in RAW).
Off: Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera: Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color: Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization: Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.
Retro Photo: Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key: Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color: Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.: Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Rich-tone Mono.: Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
Picture Profile
You can customise the picture settings by adjusting picture profile items such as Gamma and Detail. These settings apply to both RAW files and video, so you’ll need to change them back, or select the appropriate setting when switching between still shooting and video.
When setting this up, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while checking the picture on the screen.
Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.
Select the item to change using the up/down sides of the control wheel.
Select the desired value using the up/down sides of the control wheel and press the button in the centre.
The default settings PP1 through PP7 for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting conditions.
PP1: Example setting using a standard Movie gamma.
PP2: Example setting using the standard Sony Still gamma.
PP3: Example setting of natural color tone using the ITU709 gamma.
PP4: Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
PP5: Example setting using Cine 1 gamma.
PP6: Example setting using Cine2 gamma.
PP7: Example setting using S-Log2 gamma.
It’s possible to adjust settings and create your own picture profile.
Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)
Gamma
Selects a gamma curve. These are the curves available:
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie. (equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and [Cine2] and strengthens gradation in black.
Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3]. The contrast in dark parts is lower and the contrast in bright parts is higher than for Movie.
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU-709.ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-Log2].
S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will be processed after shooting.
Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))
Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
Mode
Selects auto/manual settings.
Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.
Auto Set
Settings when Auto is selected.
Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)
Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected.
Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))
Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when combined with ITU-709 gamma)ITU709
Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU-709 standard (when combined with ITU-709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)
Color Phase
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)
Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set Color Mode to Black & White.
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)
Detail
Add detail.
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to the horizontal (H) side))
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)
Copy
Copies the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
Reset
Resets the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once.
(MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 13)
Focus Magnifier
When focussing manually or in DMF mode, you can set the camera to magnify a part of the screen so you can check focus. This sub-menu allows you to select the part of the image that will be magnified during shooting.
Focus Magnif. Tim
You can set how long to hold the magnified area during MF assist. 2 sec, 5 seconds or no limit. 2 seconds is how I have it set up.
Initial Focus Mag.
Sets the initial magnification scale when using Focus Magnifier. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.
Full-frame shooting:
x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x7.8: Displays a 7.8-times enlarged image.
APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting:
x1.0: Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x5.1: Displays a 5.1-times enlarged image.
AF in Focus Mag.
You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.
Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the position using top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.
MF assist
This works in conjunction with the Focus Magnifier found on this page too You might remember that you can select the area to magnify there when using manual focus (MF). MF assist will need to be turned on if you want to use this feature.
Peaking Settings
Peaking Level
Peaking Level is a manual focusing aid which works when you have your camera set to MF or DMF.
You’ll see a type of noise outlining the parts of your image where the focus lies, and you can adjust the sensitivity to high, mid or low.
Which setting is best depends on what lens you use, as with a sharper lens it can be configured to low, while more soft lenses benefit from a medium or high setting to clearly visualize what you’re focusing on.
Peaking Color
You can choose the color of this Peaking between Red, white and yellow. I have it set to red, as this contrasts nicely with most scenes you capture.
(MENU → Red Camera Icon → page 14)
Anti-Flicker Shoot.
Reduces banding effects when shooting with the electronic shutter or EFCS with flash or with artificial light indoors.
Face Registration
Register faces here by taking an image of that face. These can then be set according to your preferred priority.
Regist. Face Priority
The ILCE-7M3 will give priority when detecting your registered faces.
MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 1
Exposure Mode
You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting here.
Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
S&Q Exposure Mode
You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with S&Q Settings later.
Program Auto / Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
File Format (video)
You can choose between XAVC S 4K, XAVC S H or AVCHD. You’ll need a fast UHS Speed Class U3 SD card to record at 100 Mbps or more.
XAVC S 4K: Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM
XAVC S HD: Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate. Audio: LPCM. The file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
AVCHD: Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV. Audio: Dolby Digital
Record Setting (video):
You can choose the quality of recorded video here. Select the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-rate, the higher the picture quality. Frame- and bit-rate differ depending on your movie file format.
When File Format is set to XAVC S 4K you have these options:
25p 100M
25p 60M
When File Format is set to XAVC S HD you have these options:
120p/100p: 120p 60M/100p 60Mbps or 120p 100M/100p 100Mbps.
30p/25p: 60p 50Mbps/50p 50Mbps.
60p/50p: 30p 50Mbps/25p 50Mbps.
24p: 24p 50Mbps when set to NTSC.
When File Format is set to AVCHD you have these options:
60i/50i: 60i 17Mbps(FH)/50i 17Mbps(FH) or 60i 24Mbps(FX)/50i 24Mbps(FX).
60p/50p: 60p 28Mbps(PS)/50p 28Mbps(PS).
24p/25p: 24p 17Mbps(FH)/25p 17Mbps(FH) or 24p 24Mbps(FX)/25p 24Mbps(FX).
S&Q settings
You can do slow-motion recording or record quick-motion recording. The sound will not be recorded. In a slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
How to record slow motion movie on the Sony A7 III:
Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).
Select MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[Movie/S&Q Motion]→ and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).
Select MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.
Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.
Playback speed: The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Record Setting] and [Frame Rate].
Proxy Recording
This function allows you to simultaneously record a low bitrate proxy file at the same time as recording the high bitrate original file movie.
MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 2
AF Drive Speed (movie)
You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.
Fast: Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.
Normal: Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
Slow: Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is changed.
AF Track Sens (movie)
You can set the AF sensitivity separately in movie mode.
Responsive: Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.
Standard: Sets the AF sensitivity to normal.
Locked on: Sets the AF sensitivity to low. You can shoot with a stable focus by ignoring the influence of anything in front of the subject.
Auto Slow Shut. (movie)
Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording dark scenes.
On: Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off: Does not use Auto Slow Shut. The recorded movie will be darker than when On is selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
Audio Recording
You can switch off audio recording in movie mode. When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set Audio Rec Level to a higher sound level to make the sound easier to hear. Regardless of the Audio Rec Level settings, the limiter always operates.
Audio Rec Level
You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.
Audio Level Display
Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.
Don’t see the audio level display?
Check if Audio Recording]is set to Off.
Check if DISP (Display Setting) is set to No Disp. Info.
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting, audio is automatically turned OFF.
MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 3
Audio Out Timing
You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio during HDMI output.
Live: Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when the audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
Lip Sync: Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.
Wind Noise Reduction
This helps reduce noise from the wind during video recording.
Marker Display (movie)
Select if you want guidelines (a grid) in movie mode. The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder
Marker Settings (movie)
Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies. You can display several markers at the same time.
Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen. [Off]/[On]
Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display. [Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. [Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
Video Light Mode
Sets the illumination setting for the optional HVL-LBPC LED light.
Power Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
REC Link: The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
REC Link&STBY: The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
Auto: The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.
Movie w/ shutter
You can map the movie recording function to the shutter button.
MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 4
Silent Shooting
Select here if you want to use the Electronic or Mechanical shutter. There is also an auto option that switches from mechanical to electronic shutter if a flash is detected.
e-Front Curtain Shut.
This shortens the time lag between shutter releases. When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.
Release without lens
Makes it possible to capture images even if a lens is not supported by the camera. (Like when using an adapter with vintage lenses)
Release without card
If set to Off, you won’t be able to engage the shutter when there is no SD card in the slot. This is a useful failsafe to prevent you from shooting images without the ability to save them.
SteadyShot
Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot (sensor stabilization) function.For optimal sharpness, turn it off when using a tripod.
SteadyShot Settings
If your lens does not relay focal length information to the A7 III body, you can still use the Ibis stabilization by dialing in the focal length manually.
Auto: Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
Manual: Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8mm-1000mm)
MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 5
Zoom
Turn the digital zoom function on or off.
Zoom settings
Set to Optical zoom only (using the optical zoom capabilities of your lens
Two other settings are available which use digital zoom (cropping of the original image):
Digital zoom:
Pictures captured by the image sensor of the camera are enlarged using digital signal processing. As the magnification level increases, signals to be also estimated growth and can reduce the picture quality.
Clear Image Zoom:
Zoomed images are captured close to the original quality when shooting a still picture. The camera first zooms to the maximum optical magnification, then uses Clear Image Zoom technology to enlarge the image an additional 2x, producing clear, sharp images despite the increased zoom ratio. If you don’t have a zoom lens, this might be an option as the camera uses the RAW file to zoom; although still some image quality will be lost.
Zoom ring rotate
Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses that support this function.
MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 6
Disp button
Selects the functionality (what is shown) on the screen when you press the DISP button (on the control wheel). You can choose Graphic Display, all info, no disp info, and histogram.
Finder/Monitor
You can set the behavior of the EVF and screen here. Do you want your screen on all the time, switch between screen and EVF once your eye has been detected near the viewfinder? Or turn the screen off and only use the EVF? It can all be selected here.
Zebra setting
The zebra function shows a zebra pattern on the screen while shooting in any area that is in danger of highlight clipping. You can switch this OFF or anywhere in a range between 70 and 100.The Zebra Pattern is a highlight warning indicator that is common in video cameras. It does not control exposure but just warns you that your highlights are blown out. It is not recorded into the resulting image.I have it set halfway at around 75, and it is a very useful indication of correct exposure of the entire scene.
Grid Line (stills)
Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.
Rule of 3rds Grid: Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Square Grid: Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated images.
Diag. Square Grid: Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off: Does not display the grid line.
Exposure set guide
The exposure set guide is an on-screen scroller that tells you the relation between your chosen aperture and the appropriate shutter speed for the scene you are shooting. I find this quite handy, but you can turn it off if you don’t.
Live view Display
Live view display allows you to see the image you’re going to capture with the settings you have dialed-in like aperture and shutter speed. Some users report easier autofocusing in low light when it’s turned OFF, and you’d need to turn it off when using external flashes too that can’t be used with Sony’s TTL (through the lens) functionality. When u use a flash in a studio situation, you will want to turn this off. Setting it to ON also reduces the EVF refresh rate from 120fps to 60fps.
MENU → Purple Camera Icon → page 7
Cont. Shoot. Length
Determines how to display the number of shots left in a continuous shoot bracket. You can select to always have this info displayed, only during shooting or turn it off.
Auto Review
You can check your captured image on the screen directly after shooting. You can select how long the image will stay on the screen (10, 5 or 2 seconds). I find this very annoying, so I turned it off. If you want to review your image, you can simply press play to do so.
You can assign the desired function to the desired key. Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, I assign [Eye AF] to [AF-ON] for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] because it’s more conveniently placed. You can easily recall [Eye AF] simply by pressing the AF-ON button. Learn how to do this here:
The keys that can be assigned functions are different for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] and [Custom Key(PB)].
You can assign the desired functions to the following keys. You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.2 1.
Custom Button 1
Custom Button2
AF/MF Button/AEL Button
Fn/ Button
Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
Custom Button 3
Function Menu Set.
You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.
Dial Setup
You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial between shutter speed and aperture.
Dial Ev Comp
You can compensate the exposure using the front or rear dial. You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to 5.0 EV.
Av/Tv Rotate
Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter speed. Normal or reverse.
MENU → Purple Camera Icon→ page 9
Dial Ev Comp
You can compensate the exposure using the front or rear dial. You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to 5.0 EV.
MOVIE Button
Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button.
Always: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
Movie Mode Only: Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to [Movie/S&Q Motion] mode.
Lock Operation Parts
You can set whether the dials will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function) button. You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.
Lock: Locks the front and rear dials when you press and hold the Fn button.
Unlock: The front or rear dials are not locked, even if you press and hold the Fn (Function) button.
Audio Signals
Selects whether the A7m3 produces a sound or not in silent mode with the electronic shutter.
MENU → Network settings→ page 1
Send To Smartphone
You can send one or several images directly to your wireless device (phone or tablet) by pressing this button.
You can either decide to choose which images you want to transfer on the camera or the wireless device (via the Sony PlayMemories app, available for free in the apple or android store).
You’ll have to connect the-the camera via Wifi first (it makes a Wifi access point), using the instruction on the A7 III screen.
It works just like connecting to any other access point with your phone or tablet.
You should do this as quickly as possible, just to get it out of the way.
When your phone has wirelessly connected to the camera once, and you’ve entered the password, it will remember this, and make it a lot faster to connect later.
Send to Computer
You’ll need to connect the computer physically to the camera using the supplied USB cable, and you can push selected pictures to your Sony PlayMemories desktop software (installed from the CD or downloaded from their website). This can even be set up to continue pushing images after the camera has turned off.
FTP Transfer Func.
View On TV
If you have a Wifi-enabled TV, you can see pictures and slideshows directly from your camera through your home wireless network.
Ctrl w/ smartphone
By connecting the camera to a smartphone using Wi-Fi, you can control the camera and shoot images using the smartphone, and you can transfer images shot with the camera to the smartphone.
Connection Info. displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.
Airplane Mode
Disables all wireless functionality, just like airplane mode does on your phone.
MENU → Network settings→ page 2
So the camera apps from the Playmemories store can’t be used on the A7 III You can however remotely control your camera with the Playmemories app for iPhone or Android. It’s also possible to transfer files to your smartphone (JPEG only) and transfer files over LAN using the supplied port.
Another new feature only previously available in the A6500 is Bluetooth connectivity. It is possible to connect your A7 III to your smartphone in order to Geotag your images.
Wi-Fi Settings:
WPS Push
If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.
Access Point Set.
You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.
Disp MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of your Sony ILCE-7m3.
SSID/PW Reset
Your camera shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [ Connection Info.] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.
Bluetooth Settings.
Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking function. If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”
Loc. Info. Link Set
You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected to your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.
To use the location information linking function of the camera, you need the PlayMemories Mobile application on your smartphone and transfer an image to your smartphone to test the connection
Procedure:
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated. (Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen!!! In steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile. If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile.)
On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].
On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].
Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”
Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of PlayMemories Mobile.
Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera. The pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.
On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].
(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.
Options in this Menu:
Location Info. Link: Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.: Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.: Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.
Edit Device name
If you wish, you can change the name of the Device Access point) perhaps to make it easier to identify which A7 III is yours in particular situations.
Imp Root Certificate
Import a root certificate from your memory card here.
Reset Network set
Resets all network settings.
If something does not function properly, and you want to start from scratch, can be useful.
MENU – playback options – page 1
Protect
Set your camera to not shoot images without inserting an SD card.
Rotate
Change the orientation of images in-camera.
Delete
Delete one or multiple images stored on your SD cards.
Rating
Rate your images in-camera for easy culling in Lightroom afterward.
Rating Set (Cust Key)
Set a custom key for easy rating.
Specify Printing
Specify Printing is a feature that allows images to be marked for printing later. Registered images are displayed with the DPOF mark. (DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format)
MENU – playback options – page 2
Copy
You can copy images from a memory card in a slot that is selected using [Select PB Media] to a memory card in another slot.
Photo Capture
Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.
Enlarge Image
Select an image and expand a portion of that picture. Useful for checking details and focus.
Enlarge Init. Mag.
Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.
Enlarge Initial Pos.
Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback. You can select either image center or the focus position.
Slide Show
Select whether you want the camera to repeat slideshows when all pictures are viewed or not, and choose the interval between slides.
MENU – playback options – page 3
Select PB media
Select what SD card slot will be used when you press playback.
View Mode
select how the camera will arrange captured pictures in the viewing browser.
Image Index
Choose whether you want the image browser to display 12 (larger) or 30 (smaller) images per page.
Display Cont. Shooting Group.
You can select to display burst images in groups or display all images during playback.
Display rotation
Select whether you want the camera to rotate images automatically when you rotate the camera or not.
Image Jump Setting
Sets which dial and method to use for jumping between images during playback. You can quickly find protected images or images set with a particular rating.
Select Dial:
Selects the dial to use for jumping between images.
Image Jump Method:
Sets the type of images to be played back with Image Jump.
MENU – Setup – page 1
Monitor Brightness
Manually set the Monitor brightness (recommended leave to zero) or change to a brighter setting for Sunny Weather.
Viewfinder Brightness
Set to Auto, which adapts to the lighting circumstances or manually changes to your preferred setting.
Finder Color Temp
Change the color temperature of the viewfinder (colder-warmer) to you liking. I don’t make any adjustments here.
Gamma Disp. Assist
Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic range. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting and may be difficult to monitor, using [Gamma Disp. Assist], contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma can be reproduced. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when playing back movies on the camera’s monitor/viewfinder.
Volume settings
Modify the playback volume for recorded video or demos.
Delete confirm.
You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as the default setting on the delete confirmation screen.
MENU – Setup – page 2
Display Quality
You can change the display quality to High or Standard. When High is selected, battery consumption will be higher, and your camera will also heat up faster.
Pwr Save Start time
Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down. I have it set to 5 minutes, a good balance between usability and battery life.
Auto Pwr OFF Temp.
Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to High, you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal. Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand as it can cause burns. Use a tripod. This will give you a 9-minute increase in movie recording at high ambient temperatures.
NTSC/PAL Selector
Plays back movies recorded with the product on an NTSC/PAL system TV.
Cleaning Mode
If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.
Touch Operation
Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor. Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as “touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as “touchpad operations.”
Touch Panel Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touchpad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
Off: Deactivates all touch operations.
MENU – Setup – page 3
Touch Panel/pad
Selects whether to activate touch panel operation when shooting with the monitor, or touch pad operation when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch Panel+Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Demo Mode
For display purposes in stores only.
Touch Pad Settings
You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.
Operation in V Orien.: Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
Touch Pos. Mode: Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen , or move the focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement .
Operation Area: Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
TC/UB settings
Timecode (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies. This is used for synchronization of video in post-production. The time code can be set between the following range: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29.
TC/UB Disp. Setting: Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset: Sets the time code.
UB Preset: Sets the user bit.
TC Format: Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run: Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make: Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec: Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
Remote CTRL
You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER button, 2 SEC button (2-second delay shutter), and START/STOP button (or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the Wireless Remote Commander RMT-DSLR1 (sold separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the Wireless Remote Commander.
HDMI Settings
When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.
Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
MENU – Setup – page 4
4K Output Sel.
Outputs video in 4K resolution to an HDMI-connected TV that supports 4K.
Memory Card HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(25p)* : Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
USB connection
Selects what will happen when you connect your camera to your PC or MAC.
Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
PC Remote: Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the computer
USB LUN Setting
Improves compatibility with external devices by limiting the functions of the USB connection.
Older devices that are not able to connect to the camera might work when set to single. Otherwise, use Multi.
USB Power Supply
You can extend battery life by providing a power supply over USB.
PC Remote settings
Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the camera without leaving the camera.
Language
Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings, and messages.
MENU – Setup – page 5
Date/Time Setup
The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on your A7 III for the first time.
Area Settings
Sets where in the world where you are using your camera.
Copyright info
Writes copyright information onto the still images like your name or business.
Format
When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable.
File Number
Name your files according to some shots or reset it to start from 1.
Set File Name
Use the standard file naming system or a customizable one.
MENU – Setup – page 6
Select REC media
Selects the memory card slot on which to record. [Slot 1] is the default setting. If you do not intend to change the settings and will only use one memory card, use the slot 1. To record the same image to two memory cards at the same time or to sort recorded images onto two memory card slots by the image type (still image/movie), use [Recording Mode].
Recording Mode
You can select the method for recording an image, such as recording the same image simultaneously to two memory cards or recording different types of images to two memory cards. (If you want to record a movie to a memory card in different formats, use [Dual Video REC].)
Standard: Records an image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media].
Simult. (stills): Records a still image to both memory cards and records a movie to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media].
Simult. (video): Records a still image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media], and records a movie to both memory cards.
Simult. (stills/video ): Records a still image and a movie to both memory cards.
Sort(JPEG/RAW): Records an image in JPEG format to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media], and records an image in RAW format to the other memory card.
Sort( stills/video ): Records a still image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Select Rec. Media], and records a movie to the other memory card.
Select REC folder
Selects where (to what folder) the camera will store newly captured images.
New Folder
Make a new folder for quickly organizing events and locations.
Folder name
Choose whether to have folder names in standard form (DSC) or create a new one by date. Setting folders by date will make organizing your images easier.
Recover Image DB
If you have a storage card error, you can try to rebuild the database to retrieve lost images possibly.
Display media info
You can check how much space is left on your SD card (have pictures in your desired quality and how many minutes of video)
MENU – Setup – page 7
Version
Check what version of the operating system your camera and the lens is running. Sony sporadically releases updates with new features, so it might be worth checking if any new firmware versions are available.
Setting Reset
Fully resets the camera to factory settings.
MENU – My menu setting
This is a new functionality not previously seen on any Sony Ax camera. It allows you to build a custom menu. Say you often change Raw file type from compressed to uncompressed, or maybe you don’t want to spend your time scrolling through the entire menu system looking for the SteadyShot settings. Well, now you can basically build your own Menu here with your most often used settings.
Add Item
You’ll see a list of all Menu options here and you can simply select your desired options and add them to your custom built menu page.
Sort Item
This setting basically changes the order of your ‘My Menu’ selected function.
Delete Item
Deletes functions in your ‘My Menu’.
Delete Page
Deletes entire pages of your ‘My Menu’ selection.
Delete All
Deletes all previously added functions of your ‘My Menu’.
Dealing with specific focussing scenarios
When shooting typical moving subjects using the α7rm3 (ILCE-7m3), the following settings are recommended by default.
Recommended default settings
Focus Mode
AF-C
Focus mode dial
Focus Area *
Flexible Spot: M
[] 4 / 13 (AF1)
Priority Set in AF-C
Balanced Emphasis
[] 4 / 13 (AF1)
AF Track Sens *
3 (Standard)
[] 5 / 13 (AF2)
Swt. V/H AF Area
AF Point Only
[] 4 / 13 (AF1)
* Recommended settings differ depending on the subject.
Focus Mode: AF-C
When set to the AF-C (Continuous AF) mode, the camera continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down.
Focus Area: Flexible Spot M
When set to the Flexible Spot , the camera allows you to move the focusing frame to the desired point on the screen and focus on a small subject in a narrow area. The size of the focusing frame can be selected. The medium size M is recommended for general use.
Other settings
Wide: Automatically focuses on a subject across the entire screen.
Zone: After the user selects a focus zone on the monitor, the camera will automatically select the focus points.
Center: Focuses automatically on the subject in the center of the image.
Expand Flexible Spot: If the camera cannot focus on a single selected point, it flexibly uses focus points around the spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
Priority Set in AF-C: Balanced Emphasis
Regarding whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus, shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.
AF Track Sens: 3 (Standard)
When set to 5 (Responsive), the camera focuses responsively on subjects at different distances.
When set to 1 (Locked on), the camera keeps the focus on a specific subject even when other objects pass in front of the subject.
Standard 3 is recommended for general use.
Difference between [1 (Locked on)] when using AF tracking sensitivity and [Lock-on AF]
[1 (Locked on)] is one of the settings in AF Track Sens (AF tracking sensitivity). In this setting, the camera keeps the focus on a specific subject when other objects pass in front of the subject.
On the other hand, the [Lock-on AF] and [Center Lock-on AF] functions on this camera allow the camera to shift the focusing frame in accordance with the subject’s movement.
Although these names are similar, their functions are different. Please be sure to distinguish between them
Swt. V/H AF Area: AF Point only
Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [Focus Area] is fixed.
Other settings
Off: Does not switch the [Focus Area] or the position of the focusing frame based on the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical).
AF Point AF Area: Switches both the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame based on the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical).
Recommended autofocus settings chart for each subject
Ball games
Athletics / Track and field
Winter sports
Motorsports
Other sports
Non-sport categories
Ball games
Subject
Focus Mode
Focus Area
Priority Set in AF-C
AF Track Sens
Swt. V/H AF Area
1st recommendation
2nd recommendation
Soccer, Football, Futsal
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
4
AF Point Only
Basketball
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Rugby
AF-C
Expand Flexible Spot
Flexible Spot M
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
American football
AF-C
Expand Flexible Spot
Flexible Spot M
Balanced Emphasis
2
AF Point Only
Handball
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
4
AF Point Only
Tennis
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Volleyball
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Athletics / Track and field
Subject
Focus Mode
Focus Area
Priority Set in AF-C
AF Track Sens
Swt. V/H AF Area
1st recommendation
2nd recommendation
Sprints (100 m~), Hurdles
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Javelin, Shot put
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Long jump, Triple jump
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
High jump, Pole vault
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Marathon
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Winter sports
Subject
Focus Mode
Focus Area
Priority Set in AF-C
AF Track Sens
Swt. V/H AF Area
1st recommendation
2nd recommendation
Alpine skiing (near a gate, jump)
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Mogul
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Snowboarding (Halfpipe, Slalom)
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Ski jumping (front, side)
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Biathlon
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Short-track speed skating
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Speed skating
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Zone
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Figure skating (Singles, Pairs)
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Zone
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Ice hockey
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
4
AF Point Only
Curling
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
2
AF Point Only
Bobsleigh
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Motor sports
Subject
Focus Mode
Focus Area
Priority Set in AF-C
AF Track Sens
Swt. V/H AF Area
1st recommendation
2nd recommendation
Car racing, Karting
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Motorcycling (on-road)
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Motocross
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Wide
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Other sports
Subject
Focus Mode
Focus Area
Priority Set in AF-C
AF Track Sens
Swt. V/H AF Area
1st recommendation
2nd recommendation
Swimming
AF-C
Expand Flexible Spot
Flexible Spot M
Balanced Emphasis
1 (Locked on) to 2
AF Point Only
Cycle race
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Archery
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Canoeing
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
2
AF Point Only
Judo, Kendo
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Horseracing
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Equestrian events
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
2
AF Point Only
Speedboat racing
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Sepak takraw
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Non-sport categories
Subject
Focus Mode
Focus Area
Priority Set in AF-C
AF Track Sens
Swt. V/H AF Area
1st recommendation
2nd recommendation
Trains and other railed vehicles
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Airplanes, Air shows
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Zone
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Wild birds
AF-C
Flexible Spot M
Expand Flexible Spot
Balanced Emphasis
3
(Standard)
AF Point Only
Wild animals
AF-C
Expand Flexible Spot
Flexible Spot M
Balanced Emphasis
2
AF Point Only
Star eater issue solution
All Sony A7 and A9 series cameras have an issue with long exposures that specifically impacts those of us who enjoy starscape photography.
This type of photography, where you attempt to capture the night sky, typically involves exposures longer than 4 seconds where Sony’s in-body RAW cooking adds a type off noise reduction to your image. Bas
As a result, the smallest stars in the sky might turn out less bright or even disappear because your camera believes it to be noise.
The following technique won’t work for bulb exposure (longer than 30 seconds), but will get you better results between 30 seconds and 4 seconds (where the noise reduction automatically kicks in. It’s a bit counter intuitive, but setting your camera to continuous high or low drive mode will ensure that this excessive noise reduction won’t be triggered. The only downside is that , since you’re in continuous drive mode, the camera will only save your images as a 12 bit file (instead of 14 bit when in single). This may impact the dynamic range of your image, and add some noise off course.
Other general settings tips
Back Button focus
I personally don’t like back button focus, but you might. This is disengaging the shutter button from autofocus functionality. Instead this is assigned to a button (most of the time the AF ON button on the back). It’s correctly configured by default, but we do need to adjust the “Shutter Release” button so that it too no longer controls your autofocus system. To do this, jump into the Red Camera Menu and go to Page 6. Adjust “AF w/ shutter” to “Off”.
Minimum shutter speed with auto ISO
A very important tweak can be found in the Exposure Menu ( red camera icon, page 9 of 14). It’s called ISO Auto minimum shutter speed and allows you to have the ability to set the minimum shutter speed you are willing to let your camera shoot at before the Auto ISO feature engages. This can be very handy for street photographers who have to deal with ever changing lighting situations. By setting your ISO AUTO Min. SS to 1/250 second, you are telling your camera that if your shutter speed doesn’t drop below 1/250h of a second, your ISO should stay at base ISO (for maximum quality). If light changes and it becomes darker suddenly, the camera will raise the ISO to maintain that minimum shutter speed.
Not just street photographers but also bird and action photographers (set to 1/1000 or 1/2000 second to freeze motion) can use this feature to make sure that their images are not impacted by loss of sharpness due to movement of your subject. Take a look at the table above for general settings first!
Using grid lines to improve your compositions
Using grid lines is a great way to improve your compositions. You can select Rule of 3rds, Square Grid or Diagonal Square Grid. The first is ideal for landscapes, you can try the latter two if you are a portrait photographer and check if it helps you to both keep things level and get a more dynamic image.
Grid line settings can be found in the purple camera icon menu (Display/Auto Review 1), page 6 of 9. It’s also available for movie mode.
Manual focussing aides
If you often shoot manual lenses, or prefer switching to manual focus, there are two important focusing aides that you should be aware of. These are focus magnification and focus peaking.
Focus magnification is quite straightforward, when MF (or DMF) is selected, your camera will magnify x1 or x7.8 a selectable portion of your image so you can more clearly view where your focus lies. You can move this selection by simply moving the joystick.
Focus Peaking works alongside focus magnification or separately, as you choose. I use both at the same time. As you turn the MF ring on your lens, you’ll see a color ‘noise’ over your image as things become sharp, making it easy to know when you are close to perfect focus. For the best results, set:
peaking display: ON
Peaking Level: Mid
Peaking Color: Red
Both these functions can be found in the camera settings (red camera icon) page 13 of 14.
Formatting and preventing loss of data
Accidentally formatting your SD card in the A7iii will result in a total loss of all data. Nothing will be coverable due to the fact that Sony decided to go for a full format (overwriting with zeros) when formatting. This is why, for important shoots (and certainly when you’re new to the camera) I recommend setting the camera up so that anything that is captured to Card 1 automatically gets copied to Card 2.
You’ll need to go to Rec. Media Settings in thze Setup menu (briefcase) page 6 of 7. You’ll need to set it to Simult. (picture) to do this.
Hybrid Log Gamma
The a7 III can capture Hybrid Log Gamma footage, both for video and stills. This is a broadcast standard designed to display high dynamic range content. Sony cameras have the tendency to slightly underexpose, but HLG Mode can give you perfect Raw exposure by using a method called ETTR (Expose To The Right). It saves you from underexposing unnecessarily (thereby supplying the sensor with as much light as it can tolerate), and reduces the degree to which you’ll need to pull shadows or boost exposure in post. In other words, your resulting image will contain less noise after processing.
Procedure:
Set one of your Picture Profiles to use ‘HLG’ for the gamma setting,
enable Zebra highlight warnings and set the Zebra level to 100+.
Increase your exposure until the moment you first see Zebra warnings.
These settings, where you first see a hint of Zebra warnings, is your optimal Raw file exposure. It will be the brightest possible, but counterintuitively (since you’re seeing the warnings), all highlights you want to capture won’t be clipped.
Using Sony AF Area registration to switch from spot to 9 point group focus (like Nikon)
One of the coolest things that Nikon cameras do is allow you to instantly switch from spot to 9 point group focus with your middle finger on your right hand. I miss that with Sony. I found this trick on how to do the same thing with 7iii with any two focus area settings.
Register a focus area and switch between 2 focus areas using a custom button:
Go to the AF3 Menu and enable ‘AF Area Regist.”. This allows you to register a focus area by long press,g the Fn button in the shooting screen. The registered focus area can be recalled with the custom key.
2. In the normal shooting screen, the Lock-on AF (Expand Flexible spot) is great for moving subjects, but when the movement becomes too erratic, I like to switch to Lock-on AF Wide. This is the one we are going to register as ‘AF Area regist.’.
3. Now long press the FN key until you see on the screen that the camera has ‘registered the focus area’.
4. Now we need to recall this function with the single touch of a custom button. We have to go to Custom operation 1 page 8/9 in order to set up the Custom Key(Shoot.) Menu to do this. We’ll assign this to the ‘Custom Button 3’ but you can of course choose another button.
We have 2 options here: we can hold the custom button to recall that registered focus area or simple press this custom button once to toggle between the two AF areas. The latter works best for me, but you might feel different.
5. Now if you press your preferred custom button, you’ll immediately go to ‘Lock On: AF Wide’. Press this button again and you go back to ‘expand flexible spot.
This method allows us to quickly cycle between any two AF areas using the registered focus area and assigning a custom button the toggle between the two!
Live view display
Live view display gives you a live feed of your camera brightness setting. So you’ll always see 100% live what your final image will be like.This is not a good way to work when for instance you use a flash in a darkened room, because the settings on your camera are dialled in for that brief moment of flash light. This is problematic because the rest of the time you’ll see near darkness.
Hence you may need to switch this to OFF when working with off-camera non-Sony flash in a darkened studio or when the ambient light is very low. (purple camera icon, page 7/9, Dispay/Auto Review2)